untitled

SECTION 16340 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH GEAR

______________________________________________________________________________

16340-1

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all equipment, accessories

and materials required for the installation of metal clad switchgear in accordance with

attached specifications and drawings.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract drawings

and the standards listed hereunder.

The following codes and standards provide an acceptable level of quality for materials

and products:

1. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

2. IEC 60298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated

voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 54 kV.

3. IEC 62271-102 AC disconnectors and earthing switches,

4. IEC 60694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and

controlgear,

5. IEC 62271-100 High-voltage AC circuit breakers,

6. IEC 60185 Current transformers,

7. IEC 60186 Voltage transformers,

8. IEC 60801 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process

9. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code)

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials and products shall be new, sound and uniform in quality, size, shape, colour

and texture and shall be free from defects.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the required standards of quality

control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed switchgear.

C. If requested by the client, the supplier shall provide proof of application of a quality

procedure complying with standards. This means:

1. use of a quality manual approved and signed by a management representative,

2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality

control procedures,

3. ISO 9002 certification.

D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of MV switchgear for not

less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied

equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been in

satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.

E. The equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-2

1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data:

The contractor shall submit to the client/client representative for review, detailed

dimensioned shop drawings and manufacturer's literature where deviations from the

contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be based

on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract drawings and

shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and complete installation.

Manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted indicating the necessary installation

dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The above information

may be provided by standard catalogue sheets marked to indicate the specific items

provided.

B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions:

The contractor shall furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities,

maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in accordance

with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions shall cover all

phases of control.

C. Test Reports:

The contractor shall submit test reports to the client/client representative for review.

D. Recommended Spare Parts List:

The contractor shall submit recommended spare parts list to the client/client

representative for review.

E. As Built Drawings:

The contractor shall submit the as built drawings to the client/client representative for

review and approval.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. The contractor shall be held responsible for the proper coordination of all phases of the

work under this contract.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate the work and equipment as

specified herein with work to be performed and equipment to be furnished under other

sections of the specifications in order to assure a complete and satisfactory installation.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site as per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Store switchgear in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory wrapping

or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,

water, construction debris and traffic.

C. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to

switchgear internal components, enclosure and finish.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTION

2.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The following specification is describing air insulated, metal enclosed - metal clad

Medium Voltage switchgear.

B. The equipment to be supplied shall consist of aligned cubicles satisfying the following

criteria:

1. Open-ended design,

2. Easy to install,

3. Safe and easy to operate,

4. Low maintenance.

2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. The switchgear shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:

1. Rated voltage: 17.5 kV three-phase.

2. Operating voltage: 13.8 kV

3. Frequency: 60 Hz.

4. Insulated level: 38kV-60Hz,1min

95 kV-1,2/50µs.

5. Busbar rated current: 630A derated at 50 Deg C.

6. Short-circuit current: 25 kA- 3 s

7. Insulation level to be coordinated for the proper altitude.

8. Space heater to be provided in each cubicle.

9. Switches to be provided with DC supply (Battery + Charger) for CB closing / tripping

coils protection relays and CB motor

2.3 SWITCHBOARDS

A. The switchboards shall meet the required criteria for indoor, air-insulated, metal clad

switchgear, in compliance with IEC standard 60298 , section 3, 1990-12 edition.

B. The environment shall be as follows:

1. Altitude: as per site location.

2. Ambient temperature:

- Minimum: -5°C

- Maximum: +50°C.

3. Hygrometry:

- At +20°C: less than 90%

- At +40°C: less than 50%.

C. The switchboards shall be modular and extendible on site.

D. They shall comprise functional units as defined by IEC standard 60298 , section 3.104:

“part of metal-enclosed switchgear including all the main circuit and auxiliary circuit

equipment that contributes to the performance of the same function”.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-4

E. A functional unit will be, for example, a transformer incomer unit, a motor feeder unit,

etc.

F. The factory-made functional units shall be bolted together at the place of use.

G. The switchboards shall be built so as to require no access to the rear section, for

installation or operation, in order to be installed at a distance of 200 mm or less from the

wall behind them.

H. The functional unit power circuits shall be interconnected by a busbar calibrated to

convey the strongest rated current that may flow through the switchboard.

I. The functional unit earthing circuits shall be interconnected by a main earth collector

made of copper, the cross-section of which shall allow the flow of the rated short-circuit

current.

2.4 FUNCTIONAL UNITS

A. Each functional unit shall contain all the elements needed to perform its function.

B. The functional units shall comprise:

1. An air-insulated, metal-enclosed, metal clad cubicle, for indoor use,

2. A withdrawal switchgear device with SF6 breaking medium, sealed for life,

3. A digital protection and control system.

C. Each functional unit shall be identified by a label, which clearly indicates its function and

electrical characteristics.

D. The switchgear shall be provided with the following functional units (refer to the

drawings):

1. Incomers: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.

2. Switchboard coupling: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.

3. Feeders: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.

4. Busbar voltage measurement.

5. Busbar earthing.

2.5 CUBICLES

A. The term “cubicles” designates all the functional units other than switchgear and the

protection and control system, namely:

1. The metal enclosure.

2. The compartment partitions.

3. The fixed power circuit.

4. The earthing circuit.

B. Architecture and enclosures

1. The cubicles shall be “metal-enclosed switchgear” type, in accordance with the

definition given in IEC standard 60298 , section 3.

2. The outer enclosure shall therefore be metallic and earthed.

3. Each cubicle shall be built on a self-supporting chassis made of bent steel plates.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-5

4. With the exception of the painted plates and the cubicle floor, the plates, which form

the enclosure, shall be made of aluminium-zinc and shall be 2 mm thick.

5. The plate shall naturally be protected against corrosion, without requiring additional

treatment.

6. Since the plates comprise the visible parts of the switchboard, both sides shall be

painted.

7. The plate shall be made of zinc-plated steel.

8. The plates, which comprise the cubicle floors, shall be made of galvanised steel and

shall be 3mm thick.

9. The cubicle shall be IP3X in accordance with IEC standard 60529 it must be

impossible to insert a rod 2.5 mm in diameter.

10. The cubicles shall have internal arc withstand, verified according to the six criteria of

IEC standard 60298 , appendix AA, class A accessibility.

11. The tests shall have been carried out, for each type of cubicle and for each of the three

power compartments, with the LV compartment door close.

C. Compartments

1. The cubicles shall comprise four electrically independent compartments, in

accordance with the definition of metal clad switchgear given in IEC standard 60298 ,

section 3.

2. All partitions between compartments shall be metallic and earthed.

3. In order to ensure maximum user safety, it is imperative for the movable inter-

compartment shutters to be metallic and earthed

4. All the compartments shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle.

5. Compartment access shall however be restricted by the presence of safety

mechanisms and interlocks.

6. The compartments shall be as follows:

I. Busbar compartment

- The busbar compartment shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle or the top of

the cubicle, by removing the bolted plates.

- It shall be equipped with flaps for evacuating overpressure to the top or back of the

cubicle.

II. Switchgear compartment

- The compartment shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle, by means of a door

that may be locked out by a key-type lock.

- It shall only be possible to open the door when the switchgear device is in the

“racked out” position.

- The compartment shall be equipped with the two earthed, metallic racking in

shutters which, when the circuit breaker is in the “rack out” position, shall ensure

isolation from the busbar compartment and the bottom compartment.

- The shutters shall be operated mechanically by the movement of the circuit breaker.

- When the circuit breaker is racked out, the shutters shall be mechanically locked out

in the closed position. To open them, it shall be necessary to use a tool.

- They shall be locked out individually by a padlock.

III. Low voltage compartment

- This compartment shall be located in the upper part of the cubicle, on the front, and

shall be included in the overall volume of the cubicle.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-6

- It shall be accessible, with the cables and busbar energised, by means of a door that

can be locked out by key-type lock.

IV. Bottom compartment

- According to the functional units, the compartment shall contain the cable

connection terminals or the lower busbar, the cable earthing switch, the current and

voltage transformers.

- It shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle by unbolting metal panels.

D. Fixed Power Circuit

1. The power circuit (also called main circuit) is the group of components, within a

cubicle, which participate in conveying power (with the exception of the switchgear

devices, which will be discussed in 2.06).

2. Those components are:

- Busbar.

- Connections.

- Racking in contacts.

- Cable connection terminals.

3. The power circuit insulation medium shall be ambient air.

4. If required by the situation, sheathing may be included to reinforce insulation.

5. Busbar

- A copper busbar of the «flat formation» type shall ensure the flow of power within

the switchboard: the bars shall be flat, parallel, and identical within each cubicle.

- They shall be bolted to each other and to the cubicle power circuits on the operating

site.

6. Connections

- The connections are the parts of the power circuit that interconnect the main

components (busbar/switchgear device, switchgear device/current transformers,

etc).

- They shall be made of copper.

7. Racking in contacts

- The racking in contacts shall be made of moulded, extruded aluminium, coated with

a silver film.

8. Cable connection terminals

- The cable connection terminals shall be located in the bottom compartment of the

cubicle.

- They shall be made of copper.

- It should be possible to connect up to six XLPE type cables per phase, and the

terminals should have a cross-section of up to 240 mm2.

- Cables shall be connected by bolting.

- Access to the cable connection compartment shall require prior closing of the cable

earthing switch.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-7

E. Earthing Circuit

1. The earthing circuit of a functional unit is the group of components that contribute to

equipment earthing.

2. The component include:

- The main earth collector.

- Secondary collectors.

- The cable earthing switch.

3. Two solutions shall be possible for busbar earthing:

- An earthing truck, separate from the switchboard.

- A special-purpose functional unit.

4. Main earth collector

- The main earth collector shall be made of copper and must have verified short-

circuit current withstand, in accordance with IEC standard 60298 .

- The collectors of all functional units shall be interconnected and connected to the

facilities main earth connector.

- The earth bar shall be installed in the bottom compartment.

5. Secondary collectors

- All the metallic parts of each functional unit shall be connected to the main earth

collector, by continuity of the metal frames, or by means of secondary collectors

made of copper. Metallic parts must never have floating potential.

6. Earthing switch

- The MV cables shall be earthed by means of an integrated earthing switch.

- The earthing switch shall have full making capacity (2.5 times the short-circuit

thermal current for which the cubicle is calibrated) in accordance with IEC standard

62271-102 .

- A mechanical interlock shall prevent earthing switch operation unless the main

switchgear device is in the racked out position.

- No key-type lock, padlock or electrical lockout solutions shall be acceptable for the

performance of this function.

- The earthing switch operating mechanism shall be of fast-closing type, independent

of the operator.

- A device shall prevent the earthing switch from being opened by reflex reaction

immediately after closing, so as to avoid all risk of arc generation between the

contacts. It should be impossible for the device to be forced.

- A device in the immediate proximity of the earthing switch shall inform the operator

that the cables are energised.

- This device shall include a separate neon lamp for each phase, supplied with power

by an isocapacitor connected to each cable connection terminal.

- A lock or padlock system shall be used to lock out the earthing switch in the open or

closed position.

7. Busbar earthing

- For busbar earthing, a truck specially designed for that purpose might be used.

- The truck shall insert the earthing arms through the racking in shutters near the

busbar.

- The earthing truck shall have full making capacity.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-8

- It shall be connected to the facilities’ earthing via the earth collector designed to

normally be in contact with the withdrawable switchgear device’s earth collector.

- Should it be impractical to use a truck, the busbar may be earthed by installing a

special-purpose functional unit in the switchboard. That functional unit should have

full making capacity.

2.6 SWITCHGEAR DEVICE

A. Out of concern for equipment efficiency and reliability, it is mandatory for the switchgear

devices that equip the functional units to be made by the switchboard supplier, or by a

manufacturing plant that belongs to the same company.

B. No solutions that include switchgear devices acquired from different suppliers shall be

accepted.

C. The cubicles shall be equipped with withdrawal switchgear devices:

1. A withdrawable circuit breaker,

2. A withdrawable contactor, with or without fuses,

3. A withdrawable earthing switch.

D. Racking in and racking out operations shall be carried out with the door closed.

E. The circuit breaker shall be mounted on its racking in/racking out mechanism in such a

way as to be inseparable from it in normal operating conditions.

F. Withdrawable circuit breaker

1. The circuit breaker shall be designed in accordance with IEC standard 62271-100 .

2. Minimum short circuit breaking capacity, 25KA

3. Rated current 630A at 50 Deg. C.

4. It shall be certified by test reports issued by a recognised body affiliated with an

international organisation.

5. The breaking medium shall be SF6.

6. In all cases, the circuit breaker and its operating mechanism shall have at least the

following verified endurance characteristics:

- Number of operations: 10 000 .

- Number of breaking operations at rated current: 10 000 .

7. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with an electrical operating mechanism with fast

opening and closing, independent of the operator, that is operated by a stored energy

mechanism.

8. The operating mechanism shall be equipped with:

- Push-button for opening and closing with indication lamps for breaker status

- Mechanical position indicator for the “open-closed” positions,

- Stored energy spring charging handle,

- “Charged-discharged” spring position indicator,

- Mechanical system for manual spring discharging,

- System for automatic spring discharging when the switchgear device is extracted,

- Trip units and auxiliary contacts.

9. The mechanical interlocks between the circuit breaker and the cubicle are summarised

in section 2.12 .D mechanical safety devices.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-9

10. The parts which contain SF6 shall comply with the definition of “pressure-sealed

systems” given in IEC standard 62271-100 .

11. No handling of gas shall be acceptable during the service life (30 years).

12. Circuit breakers, which require contact servicing or gas filling during their service

life, are not acceptable.

13. The SF6 relative filling pressure shall be 0.5 bar or lower.

14. The breaker shall have been tested at SF6 atmospheric pressure. In such conditions, it

shall ensure:

- Operating voltage withstand.

- Rated current breaking.

15. The breaker shall be equipped with a device for evacuating internal overpressure.

16. This device shall consist of an area in the enclosure calibrated to open when the

internal pressure exceeds 3.5 times the normal operating pressure.

17. This area shall be in a location such that the gases are directed towards the back of the

cubicle.

18. CB shall be provided with necessary auxiliary contacts in addition to 2 NO / NC

contact.

2.7 POTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General

1. All the relays, instruments and meters shall be incorporated in the LV compartment

location and top of the cubicle.

2. The manufacturer shall provide proof that he has already supplied equipment of the

same type and same make and that this equipment has been in operation for at least

three years.

3. The term “protection and control system” designates all the elements included in:

- The protection system - current and voltage sensors, relays, automation devices,

trip units, associated auxiliaries.

- The control system - sensors, measuring and counting devices, monitoring and

diagnosis devices.

- The communication interface for integration in a remote monitoring and control

system.

B. Protection and control unit

1. The switchgear shall be equipped with integrated digital protection and control units,

which include the protection, automation, measurement, counting, monitoring,

diagnosis and communication functions.

2. Additional functions may however be provided by complementary devices.

3. Since the Protection and Control unit is integrated as close as possible to the

switchgear, it must meet the severest environmental withstand requirements, in

particular:

- IEC standard 60255-4 impulse withstand 5kV.

- IEC standard 60255-22-1 1Mhz wave Class III.

- IEC standard 60255-22-4 fast transients Class IV.

- IEC standard 60255-22-3 electromagnetic radiation 20V/m minimum

(30 V/m desirable).

- IEC standard 60801 -.4 electromagnetic compatibility


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-10

4. The operating temperature shall be from -5 to +55 °C.

5. The Protection and Control unit range shall be designed to accommodate wide range

of auxiliary power supply voltages, all types of current sensors and voltage sensors.

6. The unit shall be of disconnectable type to facilitate replacement.

7. It should be possible to withdraw the current circuit connectors without prior short-

circuiting.

8. Each connector shall accommodate 2.5mm2 wiring and 6 mm2 wiring of current

circuits.

9. The output relays shall be capable of withstanding steady state current of 8 A.

10. The logic inputs, which shall have the same voltage rating as the auxiliary power

supply, shall comply with the standards (IEC 60011- 32) relative to PLCs and the

drawn current shall be at least 6 mA (4 mA with 220 V DC).

C. Protection

1. Each Protection and Control Unit shall contain all the necessary protections, the

number and type of which depend on the application being considered (as shown on

the drawings).

2. Each protection device shall have wide setting ranges, in particular for current

protections, providing a choice of curve types (direct time) DT, (IDMT) SIT, VIT,

EIT, UIT, and time delays from Instantaneous (50ms) to 500 s, as a minimum.

3. Setting shall be performed by the direct input of primary current values.

4. Detection fault pick-up may reach 100 mA primary.

5. Protection tripping shall be indicated on the front of the device by a signal lamp and a

message indicating the cause of the fault.

D. Measurement

1. Each Protection and Control unit shall include the measurements needed for operation

and commissioning, i.e. at least the following:

- Phase current measurement.

- Maximum phase current demand.

- Measurement of fault current interrupted in each phase.

- Additional measurements such as residual current.

2. Measurement accuracy shall be 1% (according to IEC 60255-4).

3. The unit shall include voltage, frequency and energy measurements.

4. For power and energy data, the unit measure real and reactive values and take into

consideration the direction of energy flow (incoming, outgoing).

E. Operation

1. The Protection and Control unit shall include an alphanumeric display unit that

indicates:

- Measurement values.

- Operating messages.

- Maintenance messages.

- Circuit breaker open or closed position, displayed on the front of the device by two

signal lamps.

- It shall be possible to make the settings and perform parameter setting via a portable

terminal or a PC.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-11

F. Control and monitoring

1. The Protection and Control unit shall include the input resources and logic outputs

required for control of the breaking devices (circuit breaker or contactor) and for

interfacing with the process monitored, comprising at least the following:

- Open and close Control, whatever the type of shunt trip or undervoltage release coil

control.

- Racked in position.

- Earthing switch closed position.

- Lockout of making in the presence of a fault.

- Monitoring of the circuit breaker operating mechanism and trip circuit (power

supply, wiring and coil).

- Detection of unit connected and plugged in connectors.

- Operation counter, fault trip counter.

- Cumulative total of KA interrupted.

- Storage of information (even during auxiliary power supply outages).

G. Communication

1. The Protection and Control unit shall be fitted with a communication interface option

of the JBUS/MODBUS protocol, 38400 baud speed and suitable hardware interface

for connection to PLC or equivalent.

2. The unit shall provide time tagging of events within an ms, with an adapted input

available for an external clock synchronisation contact.

H. Operation dependability

1. The Protection and Control unit shall include:

- An internal function self-monitoring mechanism, which activates fail-safe watchdog

changeover contacts.

- An automatic device for switching to the fail-safe position, with disabling of output

controls when an internal failure is detected.

- Indication on the front of the device by signal lamps and messages indicating self-

test status.

I. The protection and control system shall also be equipped with:

1. Test units for the injection of current or voltage into the transformer secondary

circuits, installed on the front of the low voltage compartment:

- 1 unit for voltage,

- 1 unit for measurement current circuits,

- 1 unit for protection current circuit,

- 1 unit for zero current circuit.

2. Low voltage protection circuit breakers, located in the low voltage compartment. Fuse

protections are not acceptable.

3. A “local / remote” selector switch for integration in the remote monitoring and

control system.

4. The low voltage auxiliaries shall comply with the standard IEC 60298 section 5-4

and IEC 60694 , article 5, section 5.4.

5. The low voltage cables shall be of the self-extinguishing, 1000 V insulation class

type. Both ends shall be identified to facilitate checking during maintenance

operations.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-12

6. For the current circuits, the cable cross-section shall be 2.5 mm2, and 1.5 mm2 for the

other circuits.

J. Commissioning

1. The Protection and Control unit shall be delivered ready to use. Only settings and

parameter setting specific to the installation will need to be performed on site.

2. However, the unit shall include capacity for customisation and adaptation:

- Extension of the number of logic inputs and outputs.

- Modification of the control logic program on request.

3. After a spare hardware base has been set up, the proposed system shall enable

restarting without any setting or the use of special equipment.

4. The parameter and setting values shall be saved on a movable storage medium, which

is part of the unit.

2.8 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

A. The current transformers shall comply with IEC standard 60185 .

B. The current transformers shall have the same short time withstand current and rated

voltage as the switchgear.

C. The current transformers shall be made of cast epoxy resin and must be labelled

individually.

D. The manufacturer shall be in a position to provide type-test reports certified by an

approved laboratory affiliated with international organisations.

E. Current transformers not satisfying these criteria will not be accepted.

2.9 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

A. The voltage transformers shall comply with IEC standard 60186 .

B. The voltage transformers shall have the same rated voltage withstand as the switchgear.

C. The voltage transformers shall be made of cast epoxy resin and must be labelled

individually.

D. Depending on the needs, the voltage transformers shall be of the phase-to-phase or phase-

to-earth type. They shall be protected by MV fuses or by circuit breakers on the power

circuit.

E. The manufacturer shall be in a position to provide type-test reports certified by an

approved laboratory affiliated with international organisations.

F. Voltage transformers not satisfying these criteria will not be accepted.

2.10 ELECTRICAL OPERATING MECHANISM INTERFACE

A. The withdrawable switchgear device circuit breaker shall be operating by a mechanism

that includes the following in the same component:

1. A representation of the position of the switchgear device by an electrical mimic

diagram with LEDs.

2. An opening button.

3. A closing button.

B. This mechanism shall be installed on the front of the low voltage compartment, in the

immediate proximity of the protection and control unit.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-13

2.11 AUXILIARY CONTACTS

A. The switchgear shall be equipped with auxiliary indication contacts connected to

terminals in the factory.

B. The terminal blocks, which receive the available auxiliary contacts, shall be located in the

low voltage compartment.

C. The available auxiliary contacts shall be the following:

1. Switchgear.

2. Earthing switch.

2.12 USE

A. In order to make the switchgear simple and safe to use, the following construction

requirements must be met.

B. Operating mechanisms

1. All operating mechanisms and access points shall be on the front of the cubicle.

2. In particular, cable and busbar connections must be possible via the front.

3. Racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker or contactor shall be carried out with

the door closed.

4. The door shall include inspection ports for unequivocal viewing of the circuit breaker

position (racked in or racked out).

5. The different operations shall be validated once they have been completed by a

special-purpose selector switch that may be locked out by key-type lock or padlock.

C. Instruction guide

1. The operating procedures for the current operations must be described on the front of

each functional unit:

- Opening/closing of the switchgear device.

- Racking in/racking out of the switchgear device.

- Opening/closing of the earthing switch.

- Plugging in/unplugging of the voltage transformer protection fuses.

2. This shall be described exclusively in the form of explicit symbols and colour codes.

3. Instructions guides, which use text, are not acceptable.

D. Mechanical safety devices

1. The functional units shall have a large number of fail-safe mechanical devices so as to

make the use of the switchgear safe:

- Impossible to earthed cables unless the switchgear device is racked out,

- Impossible to rack in or rack out switchgear device when the earthing switch is

closed.

- Impossible to rack out a closed switchgear device.

- Automatic discharging of the switchgear device’s stored energy spring in the event

of racking out.

- Impossible to open the switchgear compartment door unless the device is racked

out.

- Impossible to gain access to the compartment which contains the cables when the

earthing switch is open.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-14

- Impossible to gain access to the voltage transformers and their protection fuses

unless the fuses have been withdrawn.

- Impossible to extract a switchgear device from a cubicle unless the extraction truck

is solidly locked to the cubicle.

- Impossible to unlock the extraction truck unless the circuit breaker is locked to the

truck or in the cubicle.

- Locking of the switchgear device to the truck when it is disconnected from the

cubicle.

2. None of these safety measures may be ensure by the use of a key-lock or padlock.

2.13 TYPE TESTS AND ROUTINE TESTS

A. The following type-test certificates shall be submitted for the equipment :

1. Impulse dielectric tests,

2. Power frequency dielectric tests,

3. Temperature-rise tests,

4. Short-time and peak withstand current tests,

5. Mechanical operating tests,

6. Short circuit breaking tests.

7. Short circuit making tests.

8. Internal arc withstand

9. Partial Discharge tests.

10. Verification of the degree of protection,

B. The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer shall be substantiated by a test report

signed by the manufacturer's quality control department. The reports shall cover the

following aspects:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,

2. Insulation resistance test.

3. HV Dielectric tests.

4. Phase continuity tests,

5. Functional tests (including mechanical operation).

Testing shall be witnessed by supervising agency representative


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-15

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and all

work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with the best

trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by skilled

workers equipped to produce satisfactory results; in a safe, substantial manner so as to

avoid undue stresses, rigid enough to prevent undue movement, so as to present a neat,

orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing, maintenance and repairing.

3.2 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS

A. The contractor shall provide concrete pedestals, anchor bolts, hangers, channels, saddles,

etc., for installation of equipment and apparatus shown on the drawings and specified in

the various sections.

3.3 EQUIPMENT ERECTION

A. All electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, good electrical engineering practice, and the relevant drawings and

specifications.

B. All metal surfaces to be bolted shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. The

connections shall be tightened with manual torque wrenches to the manufacturer's

erection instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION/COMMISSIONING

A. General

1. The switchgear shall be located in premises reserved for electrical facilities.

2. It shall be set up on steel structures, above a utilities space, which allows for the

running of cables.

3. The minimum required clearance to be provided around the switchboard shall be:

- Lateral: 500 mm.

- Behind the switchboard: 200 mm rear access to the switchboard is not

acceptable.

- In front of the switchboard: 1800 mm, to facilitate any subsequent

extraction of functional units.

- Above the switchboard: 700 mm.

4. The equipment, on a forklift, should be able to pass through a door 2500 m high and

1000 m wide.

B. Cable connections

1. Cable inlets should be provided at the bottom of each functional unit.

2. The bottom plates shall be pre-drilled, and all the holes blocked off by cut-out type

plastic cones.

3. The cables shall be connected via the front.


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-16

4. The cables ends shall be bolted to pre-drilled connection terminals.

5. The cables shall be flanged to cubicles by plastic collars.

6. When the cables are connected, the floor of each functional unit shall be closed off by

a non-magnetic panel.

C. Busbar connections

1. Busbar connections shall be via the front or the roof of each functional unit.

2. The bars shall be bolted, to each other and to the ends of the connections, on pins

fastened to the connections.

D. Earth collector connection

1. The switchboard’s main collector shall be bolted onto the collector of each functional

unit.

E. Low voltage circuit connections

1. The low voltage circuits of each functional unit shall be factory-wired.

2. Only the LV and inter-cubicle cables and connections arriving from outside the

switchboard should be wired in site.

3. The outside cable inlets may be on the bottom of each functional unit or at either end

of the switchboard.

4. The LV cable ends shall be connected to terminal blocks located in the low voltage

compartment.

5. The inter-cubicle wiring shall be supplied by the supplier.

6. The wiring shall be identified by codes, which comply, with indications given in the

wiring diagrams, which the supplier agrees to include with the switchgear.

7. In order to facilitate inspection and servicing operations, connection of the protection

and control unit, carried out in the factory by the suppliers, shall be the “plug-in” type.

F. Commissioning

1. Commissioning of a functional unit should be simple and quick.

2. All the documents necessary for the operation shall be made available by the

switchgear supplier.

3.5 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. After the installation is complete and properly adjusted, the contractor shall conduct

operating tests. The various equipment and systems shall be demonstrated to operate in

accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Tests shall be performed in

the presence of the client/client representative. The contractor shall provide electric

power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the various tests.

B. The testing of all electrical equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the items

below. This shall be in addition to testing specified elsewhere in this specification.

1. General equipment check.

2. Field wiring and ground system verification.

3. Equipment adjustment.

4. Insulation Resistance Test


______________________________________________________________________________

16340-17

5. HV Dielectric Test

6. Functional Test

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16350 L.V. GENERATOR

______________________________________________________________________________

16350-1

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


and materials required for the installation of L. V. Generator in accordance with attached

specifications and drawings.


A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract drawings

and the standards listed hereunder.


and products:


2. ABGSM Association of British Generating Set Manufactures

3. BS British Standards Institution

4. EEC 89/392 Safety and Health

5. EGSA Electrical Generating Systems Association

6. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

7. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

8. ISO 9000 International Standards Organization 9000

9. NEC National Electric Code

10. NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association

11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

12. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act


A. The complete power generation system, including engine and generator, shall be the

product of manufacturers who has been regularly engaged in the production of

generating and power systems for at least 10 years. All components shall have been

designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility to prove integrated

design capability.

B. SubAssembly and Packaging

Generator set mounted subassemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake system,

exhaust outlet , and generator set controls shall be designed, built, and assembled as a

complete unit by the engine - generator manufacturer.

C. Specific Prototype Reports

Prototype Reports shall include:

Engine:

Performance (part load, full load,)

Fuel Consumption

Exhaust Emissions

Noise Levels, Mechanical and Exhaust


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-2

Generator:

Motor Starting

Wave Form Harmonic Analysis

Insulation Resistance

Winding Resistance

Saturation, Open Circuit

Saturation, Short Circuit

Saturation, Rotating Exciter

Reactance and Impedance, Negative Sequence

Reactance, Zero Sequence

Regulator Voltage Adjustment

No Load Losses

Efficiency

Short Circuit Capability

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Evaluation

Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)

1.4 SUBMITTAL




contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be based

on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract drawings and

shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and complete installation.

Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet

identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component

design and performance data.

Engine:

Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle

Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders

Engine lubricating oil capacity

Combustion air inlet flow rate

Exhaust gas, flow rate

stack temperature

Exhaust system backpressure (maximum)

Heat rejection to: coolant

aftercooler

exhaust

atmosphere from engine

atmosphere from generator

Alternator:

Model

Insulation class

Number of leads

Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D)

Time constants, armature short circuit (TA)

Reactance, subtransient - direct axis (X"D),

Reactance, transient - saturated (X'D)


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-3

Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD)

Reactance, negative sequence (X2)

Reactance, zero sequence (X0)

Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including Synchronizing panel , and

day tank.

Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overall generator set measurements,

mounting location and interconnect points for load leads, fuel and exhaust.

General installation coordinated layout (Electrical, Mechanical, Structural, etc.).

Generator room ventilation and noise control calculations with technical proposal of

materials

Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel outline drawings

published by the manufacturer.



maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in accordance

with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions shall cover all

phases of control.

C. Test Reports:


Factory test to be witnessed by supervising agency.


The contractor shall submit recommended spare parts list to the client representative for

review.


The contractor shall submit the as built drawings to the client representative for review

and approval.

1.5 COORDINATION





sections of the specifications, (CCMS, MV Switchgears, etc.) in order to assure a

complete and satisfactory installation.




______________________________________________________________________________

16350-4

B. Store Genset in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory wrapping or

provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,

water, construction debris and traffic.


switchgear internal components, enclosure and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

Provide all labor, materials, and equipment to furnish, install, and place in operation the

power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and design drawings.

These specifications also describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of

the power system.

The installation of the power generation system shall include the following:

Engine-driven generator set

Control system

Cooling system

Fuel supply and storage system

Generator set accessories

Mounting system

System control

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The electric power generating system shall be according to the drawings , 0.8 power

factor, 380 volts, Wye connected, three phase, 60 hertz, 1800 RPM at 50 Degree C

ambient temperature. The Generator set shall be derated as required to deliver rated

output at applicable relative humidity and altitude.

2.3 GENERATOR SET CONSIST

The system shall consist of generator set(s), which include all controls, protection, wiring,

and accessories for automatic start-stop operation.

2.4 SYSTEM FUNCTION

The generator set(s) shall include the capability of automatically controlling generator set

operation. After starting, the unit(s) will attain rated speed and voltage, and accept rated

load. The engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output

voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator.

Manual adjustment of generator speed and voltage shall be provided.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-5

2.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, GENERAL

The power generating system shall conform to the following performance criteria:

1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated generator

set kW/kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all engine-mounted

parasitic and external loads such as radiator fans and power generators under

applicable climatical conditions on the basis of Stand-By Power operation.

2. Start Time and Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage and

frequency, and be capable of accepting load within 7-8 seconds after the Engine

receive the starting signal.

3. The maximum voltage difference between the 3 Phase at 100% balanced load

shall not exceed 1%

2.6 PERFORMANCE, SYSTEM

The power generating system shall satisfy the following performance criteria at site

conditions:

Total of Power Capability As shown on drawings

Total Load As per the drawings

Frequency 60 Hz

3 Phase Volts 380 Volts

Allowable Voltage Dip < 30%

Power Factor 0.80

2.7 Minimum Service and Warranty Qualifications

The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factory-trained

servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance, and warranty

administration.

A. Warranty Terms - 2 Years

The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall be for a period of two (2) years

from date of preliminary handing over acceptance of the system and shall include

repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the jobsite,

Applicable deductible costs shall be specified in the manufacturer's standard

warranty.

B. Mechanics and Equipment

The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service representatives and

tooling necessary to test, maintain, and repair all provided equipment.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-6

C. Parts Availability - 90%

The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over

the counter availability of at least 90% of parts.

2.8 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Engine

1. Engine Equipment

The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure

gauge, lubricating oil cooler, filters, water pump and temperature gauge,

service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing

2. Structure

The design of the basic engine shall provide for maximum structural

integrity to extend service life. Materials used in the engine shall

incorporate the highest level of proven metallurgical and manufacturing

technology.

Block shall be of one-piece design and cast of high tensile strength iron in

the system manufacturer's own foundry.

Crankshaft shall be a one-piece forging with regrindable wear surfaces

hardened through heat treat methods. Cylinder wear surfaces shall be

induction hardened over their entire length. Main and rod bearings shall

consist of aluminum bonded by copper to a steel backing. The wear

surface shall be coated with a lead-tin overlay and the bearing covered by

a tin flashing.

Connecting rods shall be high strength steel with tapered pin bore. Drilled

passages to supply oil from rod bearing for piston cooling and lubricating

oil will not be permitted.

Pistons shall be a lightweight aluminum alloy, which is elliptically ground

across the skirt and tapered from crown to skirt. Oil jets shall supply piston

cooling and lubricating oil. Valves shall be hard-faced with replaceable

inserts.

3. Lubrication System

The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is

integral with the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The

system shall incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue

lubrication in the event of filter clogging.

The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle.

Systems where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are

not acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the

underside or inside of the crown and piston pin.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-7

4. Diesel Fuel System

The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel

filter, transfer pump, lines, and nozzles.

The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously

controlled by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by

signals from the engine governor.

The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray

pattern for efficient combustion.

- Primary Fuel Filter

In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a

primary fuel filter between the fuel tank and transfer pump to

screen large contaminants.

- Fuel Cooler

Fuel shall be piped from the filter/water separators to the intake of

the engine fuel pump, and then to the engine. Excess fuel shall be

piped through the fuel cooler and returned to the fuel tank. The fuel

cooler shall be capable of exchanging heat rejected at full load with

the cooling medium, including 10% reserve to accommodate

fouling.

- Fuel Priming Pump

A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding

air from the system.

- Fuel Lines

Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed

to isolate vibration.

- Auxiliary Fuel Tank

A fuel tank shall be provided sized for 4 hours autonomy at full

load (2000 Liters minimum). The tank shall incorporate threaded

pipe connections, float switch, Tank Side glass . manual valve on

the fuel line to the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be

included. Fuel will not be supplied to the tank by gravity feed.

5. Governor

The engine governor shall control engine speed and transient load response

within commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed,

and tested by the generator set manufacturer.

a. Governor, Electronic - Load Share/Speed Control –

The engine governor shall be Electronic Load Sharing and Speed

Control with EG Electro-Hydraulic Actuator. Speed droop shall be

externally adjustable from 0 (isochronous) to 10% from no load to

full rated load. Steady state frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.25

percent. It shall be capable of sharing load within 5% when


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-8

paralleled with similarly equipped engines. Speed shall be sensed

by a magnetic pickup off the engine flywheel ring gear. A

provision for remote speed adjustment shall be included. The

governor shall incorporate provisions for limiting fuel during start-

up, and include capability for actuator compensation adjustment.

Protection from voltage spikes and reverse polarity shall be

included. In the event of a DC power loss, the forward acting

actuator will move to the minimum fuel position.

6. Cooling System

The engine jacket water cooling system shall be a closed circuit design

with provision for filling, expansion. The cooling pump shall be driven by

the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect

external cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.

- Radiator, Engine Mounted

Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the

atmosphere through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be

sized to cool the engine continuously while operating at full rated

load and at site conditions.

- Blower Fan

The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the

engine. Air shall be drawn from the engine side and exhausted

through the radiator core.

7. Inlet Air System

The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element

- TurboCharging

Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine

exhaust gases and direct - connected to a compressor supplying

engine combustion air.

- AfterCooling

Aftercooler core air surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion

inhibitor to minimize oxidation.

8. Exhaust System

The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion

gases quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including

silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and in no case shall

backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O).

Heavy walled piping such as Schedule 40 is preferred, Piping shall be

installed with 229 mm (9 in) minimum clearance from combustible

material or incorporate appropriate insulation and shielding.

Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth

being transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-9

accommodate thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be

included where necessary to isolate vibration.

Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water Drain

at the lowest point.

- Exhaust Noise Control

The exhaust silencer shall be critical type and supplied by the

engine supplier. It shall be mounted near the engine to minimize

noise and condensation, and pitched away from the engine. A

provision for draining moisture shall be included.

- Silencer - Residential

The silencer shall provide suitable noise control for environments.

- Noise Level

Noise of engine shall not exceed 85 dBA when measured 1 meter

away from exhaust louver.

9. Acoustic Treatment of Generator Room

Contractor shall provide complete acoustic treatment for Generator Building

and submit detailed technical proposal with calculations based on the

following.

A. Noise level from the Generator Building shall not exceed max 78 NC at

any location 1 meter from the Generator Building.

B. Generator set shall be provided with critical type silencer.

C. All doors and windows shall be sound proof with appropriate acoustic

ratings.

D. Acoustic lining shall be provided in the inner surface of walls in the

generator room.

E. Outdoor air intakes and exhausts shall be provided with sound

attenuators, sized based on Engine noise levels.

F. Radiator fans shall be upgraded for addition static due to sound

attenuators or additional intake booster fans shall be provided.

G. Acoustic proposal shall include detailed calculations, method statement,

installation details, and testing and commissioning procedures, and shall

be fully coordinated with Genset Supplier / Manufacturer, before

submitting for the review and approval of the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-10

10. Electrical Starting System

The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor), starter

relay Batteries shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the

starting motor. A corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be

located to avoid spillage from servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required

cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy circuit requirements. The

system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped engine within 7-8

seconds.

a. Jacket Water Heater

Jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain coolant

temperature at 32C while the engine is idle. Heaters shall accept

127 -volt AC single phase power and include thermostatic controls.

Hoses to and from the heater shall be industrial quality, which

exhibit long life in operational environments. Manual shutoff

valves shall be incorporated to isolate the heater during servicing.

b. Batteries

Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by

the generator set manufacturer. They shall be a heavy duty lead

acid type.

Starting batteries shall be rated 24 volt DC and shall be located as

close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark sources, in

a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and

maintenance. Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the

generator set manufacturer.

c. Alternator

An engine-mounted belt driven battery-charging alternator shall be

installed with an automatic voltage regulator. It shall be suitable

for heavy-duty applications with a rating of 24 volts.

11. Alternator

The alternator(s) shall be rated for Stand-by Power service. Kilowatt rating

will be according to the drawings , 0.8 PF, 380 V, three phase, 60 Hz,

1800 rpm and Class H insulation.

It shall exhibit less than 5% waveform deviation at no load.

a. Structured,

The alternator shall be close coupled, drip proof and guarded,

constructed to NEMA 1 and IP 22 standards, salient pole,

revolving field, synchronous type with amortisseur windings in the

pole faces of the rotating field. The alternator terminal box shall

provide generous space for entrance and installation of power

cables.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-11

b. Mechanical Design

The alternator housing shall be one piece and mount directly to the

engine flywheel housing. The alternator-ventilating fan shall

mount to the engine flywheel and act as a pressure plate to secure

the flexible plates.

The rotor core shall be constructed of low loss non-orientated steel

laminations attached to the core lengths . The rotor assembly shall

have 125% overspeed capability

c. Excitation

The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting

of a three-phase armature and a three-phase full wave bridge

rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be

included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage spikes.

- Exciter - Permanent Magnet

The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive

excitation current from a pilot exciter mounted on the rotor

shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of rated

current for ten seconds during a fault condition.

d. Voltage Regulator

The automatic voltage regulator shall maintain alternator output

voltage by controlling the current applied to the exciter field of the

alternator.

The regulator shall be a totally solid state design, which includes

electronic voltage buildup and overcurrent protection. It shall

incorporate volts per Hertz characteristics.

The regulator shall be suitable for mounting external to the

alternator assembly, and have provision for remote voltage level

control, using 16 gauge-shielded wire.

As installed, the voltage regulator shall meet the applicable

sections of the following standards:

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

12. Mounting

The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the

engine-generator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed

and built by the engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection,

maintain alignment, and minimize resonant linear vibration.

- Mounting Base - Package Generator Set

The base shall be constructed of formed steel "C" channel members

with a minimum 6-mm thickness. The base arrangement shall

incorporate a common interior width for furnishing dedicated stub


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-12

up areas for mechanical and electrical connections. Steel cross

members shall support genset.

- Isolator - Spring Type

Steel spring isolators shall be installed between the generator set

base and the mounting surface. The isolators shall bolt to the base,

and have a waffled or ribbed pad on their bottom surface. The pads

shall be resistant to heat and age, and impervious to oil, water,

antifreeze, diesel fuel, and cleaning compounds.

13. Fuel Storage

The work required under this section shall conform to the following

requirements

a. Storage Below Ground

A fiberglass tank with a capacity of sized for 5 days full load

operation of all Gensets (Minimum of 50,000 Liters) shall be

provided for fuel oil storage below ground. It shall have an

Underwriter's Laboratory label permanently attached and visible.

Submittals and drawings shall be submitted showing all

dimensions, and connections.

Connections - All piping shall be connected and supported by the

building structure or independent supports.

All manways shall be furnished complete with UL

approved gaskets, bolts, and covers.

All fittings shall meet UL requirements and be supplied

with threaded plugs.

Lifting lugs shall be provided that are capable of

withstanding weight of tank with a safety factor of 3.

b. Day Tank

A auxiliary fuel tank shall be provided sized for 4 hours full load

operation (Minimum 2000 Liter). The tank shall incorporate

threaded pipe connections, float switch, fuel side glass .A manual

shutoff valve on the engine supply line and a drain valve shall be

included.

14. Controls, Protection

The controls, and protection systems of the generator set and its operation

shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer.

a. Automatic Start - Stop Control

The 24 volt DC system shall incorporate energize to run logic and

include:


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-13

Control:

Alternator voltage level rheostat and ammeter/voltmeter

phase selector switch shall be mounted on the panel door.

The engine start-stop switch shall be door mounted and

include positions for off/reset, manual, automatic, and stop.

Shutdowns/Annunciation:

The generator set shall shut down and signal operational

faults of high water temperature, low oil pressure,

overspeed, and overcrank.

Monitor:

Monitoring devices shall include AC voltmeter, AC

ammeter, ammeter/voltmeter phase select switch, frequency

meter, electric hourmeter, oil pressure gauge, and water

temperature gauge.

Safety Devices:

ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided.

b. Cycle Cranking

A cycle crank timer shall provide four 10 second cranking periods

separated by 10-second rest periods.

c. Engine CoolDown

A cool down timer shall provide an adjustable 0-30 minute engine-

running period before shutdown .

d. Alarm -

NFPA-99 requirements for the alarm panel shall be satisfied by a

24 volt DC alarm module mounted in the panel and including red

indicating lights and silencable alarm horn to annunciate alarm

conditions for high and low coolant temperature, low oil pressure,

low DC voltage, and system not in automatic.

e. Battery Charger

A 10 ampere 24 V DC constant voltage battery charger shall be

provided which shall accept 220 volt AC single phase input to

provide 24 volt DC output. It shall be fused on the AC input and

DC output, and incorporate current limiting circuitry to avoid the

need for a crank disconnect relay. An AC ammeter and voltmeter

shall be available to monitor the charging.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-14

PART 3 - EXECUTION

The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable procedures and practices

of inspecting, installing, and testing the generator set and associated equipment.

3.1 PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION

A. A predelivery inspection must be performed by client representative at the

manufacturer local dealer facility to insure no damage occurred in transit and all

genset components, controls, and synchronizing panel .

3.2 PRE-DELIVERY TESTING

A. Prior to delivery and acceptance, the generator set shall be tested to show it is free

of any defects and will start automatically and carry full load. This testing shall

be performed at the facility of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer in

the presence of supervising agency representative

B. The testing shall be done on dry type, resistive load banks. Salt water brine tanks

or load banks requiring water as a source of cooling will not be allowed.

C. Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the owner's engineer or his

appointed representative. Testing shall be according to NETA and NFPA-110

Standard test procedure. (See Division 16 Section for Testing)

E. Any defects, which become evident during the test shall be corrected by the bidder

at his own expense prior to shipment to the jobsite.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings,

specifications, and the manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational

compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local

dealer. The engine lubricating oil and coolant , as recommended by the system

manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer. If different

manufacturers furnish switchgear and generator sets, technical representatives of

both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets

requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor.

B. The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the

Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting, and any site testing required

after the installation is complete.


______________________________________________________________________________

16350-15

3.5 ORIENTATION

A. The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation

for the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include

hands-on instruction. Which include control operation, and routine maintenance.

3.6 OPERATION / MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND PARTS MANUAL

A. The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish four (4) copies

each of the manuals and books listed below for each unit under this contract:

B. PARTS Manual - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and

components, except standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.).

C. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS - on the genset that

cover daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance requirements

and include a complete lubrication chart.

D. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST - showing all consumables anticipated

to be required during routine maintenance and test.

E. WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS - showing function of all electrical

components.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16360 RING MAIN UNIT SWITCHGEAR (RMU)

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all equipment,

accessories and materials required for the installation of metal enclosed, RMU type

switchgear in accordance with attached specifications and drawings.


A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract

drawings and the standards listed hereunder.


and products:


2. IEC 60298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated

voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 54 kV.

3. IEC 60265 High-voltage switches,

4. IEC 62271-102 AC disconnectors and earthing switches,

5. IEC 60694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear,

6. IEC 62271- 100 High-voltage AC circuit breakers,

7. IEC 60801 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process



A. All materials and products shall be new, sound and uniform in quality, size, shape,

color and texture and shall be free from defects.


control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed switchgear.




2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable

quality control procedures,


D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of switchgears for not

less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already

supplied equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been

in satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.

E. The equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-2

1.4 SUBMITTAL




contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be

based on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract

drawings and shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and

complete installation.




provided.



maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in

accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions

shall cover all phases of control.

C. Test Reports:








1.5 COORDINATION

A. The contractor shall be held responsible for the proper coordination of all phases of

the work under this contract.



sections of the specifications in order to assure a complete and satisfactory

installation.



B. Store switchgears in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory

wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units

from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-3


switchgears internal components, enclosure and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTION

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following specifications apply to the factory-built, RMU type, compact,

extensible, metal-enclosed indoor switchgears complete with instrument transformers.

B. The equipment to be supplied shall come in the form of a compact switchboard and

shall meet the following requirements :

1. Easy to install

2. Safe and easy to operate

3. Compact

4. Low maintenance

C. Upon the request, units shall be available either in standard compact range or in

extensible versions (see the contract drawing).

D. For extensible version, extensibility shall be easily possible on site by the contractor,

without SF6 handling , without any particular floor preparation and specific tools.

When assembled, extensible units shall respect integral insulation and insensitivity to

environment.

2 .2 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The RMU shall be suitable for operations at a height of 1000 meters or as per site

location.

B. The RMU shall be capable of operating normally within the following temperature

range

1. Maximum air temperature + 50 ° C

2. Minimum air temperature - 25 ° C

C. Manufacturer shall declare whether RMU is able to operate in air temperature higher

than + 40 °C and if current derating is necessary.

D. The RMU shall be capable of being operated in electrically exposed locations.

E. The RMU shall be capable of being exposed to high relative humidity and ambient air

pollution.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-4

2.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Network Three phases - Three wires

Rated Voltage 17,5 KV

Service Voltage 13.8 KV

System Frequency 60 Hz

Lightning Impulse withstand Voltage

- Phase to phase, phase to earth

- Across the isolating distance

95 KV

110 KV

Power Frequency withstand voltage 38 KV rms - 1 minute

Rated Normal Current

- Network disconnector

- Transformer circuit breaker feeder

630 A

200 A

Rated Short time current withstand ( 3 sec ) 21 KA

Rated Short circuit making capacity of

network disconnectors and earthing switches

50 KA peak at Rated Voltage

Rated load interrupting current


630 A rms

Rated cable charging interrupting current


30 A

Rated magnetizing interrupting current


16 A

Number of mechanical operations

- Network disconnectors and earthing

switches

- Circuit breaker

1000 O/C

2000 O/C

Number of electrical operations at rated

current for network disconnectors

100 O/C

All of the switchgear shall be capable of withstanding this current without any damage being

caused, in accordance with the recommendations IEC 60694 § 4.5, 4.6, 4.7 and IEC 60298 §

4.5.

2 .4 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT

A. The different configurations may be used as follows, for exact requirement refer to

contract documents :

1. Standard compact range with different configurations between network

disconnector, transformer protection feeder and branch circuit breaker feeder.

2. Extensible range with different configurations between network disconnector,

transformer protection feeder.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-5

2 .5 GENERAL STIPULATIONS REGARDING THE DESIGN AND

DEVELOPMENT OF SWITCHGEAR

A. Introduction

1. The RMU shall meet the criteria for compact, metal-enclosed indoor switchgear in

accordance with IEC 60298 .

2. It shall include, within the same metal enclosure, the number of MV functional

units required, such as network disconnector and feeder circuit breakers to

transformer or branch supply.

B. Switchboards

1. The switchgear and busbar shall all be contained in a stainless steel enclosure

filled with SF6 at 0.2 bar relative pressure to ensure the insulation and breaking

functions. Sealed for life, the enclosure shall meet the "sealed pressure system"

criterion in accordance with the IEC 60298 standard (appendix GG § 2.3 and 3.3):

a system for which no handling of gas is required throughout the 30 years of

service life. So, refilling valve is not required .In addition, manufacturer shall

confirm that maximum leakage rate is lower than 0,1 % / year.

2. It shall provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the

environment (temporary flooding, high humidity...), IPX7 degrees of protection in

accordance with recommendation IEC 60529 .

3. Thus assembled, the active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance-free and

the switchboard shall be low-maintenance.

4. The switchboards shall have an IP2XC protection index.

5. The tank shall be made of at least 2 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel and be

able to withstand an accidental internal overpressure of at least 3 bars.

6. The switchboards shall be suitable for mounting on a trench, utilities space or

base.

7. Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly

indicates the functional units and their electrical characteristics.

8. The switchgear and switchboards shall be designed so that the position of the

different devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switchboard and

operations are visible as well.

9. In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so

as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.

10. Switchboard to be provided with DC supply (battery + charger) for operation of

switches, breakers and control

C. Dielectric medium

1. SF6 gas is the preferred dielectric medium for RMUs. Oil filled switchgear will

not be considered. SF6 gas used for the filling of the RMU shall be in accordance

with IEC 60376 .

2. It is preferable to fit an absorption material in the tank to absorb the moisture from

the SF6 gas and to regenerate the SF6 gas following arc interruption.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-6

D. Earthing of metallic parts

1. There shall be continuity between the metallic parts of the switchboard and cables

so that there is no electric field pattern in the surrounding air, thereby ensuring the

safety of people.

2. The substation frames shall be connected to the main earth busbar without

dismantling any busbars.

E. Earthing of the main circuit

1. The cables shall be earthed by an earthing switch with short-circuit making

capacity, in compliance with IEC 62271- 102 standard. The earthing switch can

only be operated when the switch is open.

2. The earthing switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism and manual

closing shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism, independent of operator

action.

3. The moving contacts of the earthing switch shall be visible in the closed position

through transparent covers.

4. Mechanical interlocking systems shall prevent access to the operating shaft to

avoid all operator errors such as closing the earthing switch when the switch is

closed.

F. Network Disconnectors

1. The switches shall be of the maintenance-free, with breaking in low pressure SF6

gas. The position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly visible on the

front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact

indication in accordance with IEC 60265- 1 standard. In addition, manufacturer

shall prove reliability of indication in accordance with IEC 62271-102 standard.

2. The switches shall be of the "increased operating frequency" in accordance with

IEC 60265-1 § 3.104 standard. They shall have 3 positions, open-disconnected,

closed and earthed, and shall be constructed in such a way that natural

interlocking prevents unauthorized operations.

3. The switches shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory.

4. Manual opening and closing shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism,

independent of operator action.

5. Each switch shall be fitted with an electrical operating mechanism in a specially

reserved location, without any modification of the operating mechanism and

without de-energizing the switchboard.

6. The switch and earthing switch operating mechanism shall have a mechanical

endurance of at least 1000 operations.

7. Loop side switches shall be rated 630A.

8. Each side of the RMU shall be equipped with a grand sensor relay.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-7

G. Feeder circuit breaker

1. Feeder shall be:

- Transformer protection feeder by circuit breaker (200 A).

2. The circuit breakers shall be of the maintenance-free, with breaking in low

pressure SF6 gas. The position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly

visible on the front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide

positive contact indication in accordance with IEC 60265- 1 standard. In addition,

manufacturer shall prove reliability of indication in accordance with IEC 62271-

102 standard.

3. The circuit breakers shall have 3 positions: open-disconnected, closed and earthed

and shall be constructed in such a way that natural interlocks prevent all

unauthorized operations.

4. They shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory.

5. An operating mechanism shall be used to manually close the circuit breaker and

charge the mechanism in a single movement.

6. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push

button. There shall be no automatic reclosing.

7. The circuit breaker shall be associated with an integrated protection unit that will

operate without any auxiliary power supply and shall include:

- Three toroid transformers incorporated in the feeders tee-off bushings,

- An electronic relay,

- A low energy release,

- A "fast-on" test receptacle for protection testing (with or without CB tripping)

8. The protection system shall ensure circuit breaker tripping as of a minimum

operating current (Is) which is the rated current of the transformer or underground

cable network to be protected and may be set from 8 to 200 A for transformer

protection feeder and from 8 to 600 A for branch circuit breaker feeder.

9. For transformer protection feeder, phase to phase protection shall be able to work

from 1,2 time the minimum operating current Is.

10. For transformer protection feeder, ground fault protection shall also be provided.

11. For branch circuit-breaker feeder, the phase protection shall have two separately

adjustable settings:

- The low setting may be chosen with definite time or IDMT. The IDMT curves

are in compliance with the IEC 60255-3 standard. They are of the standard

inverse, very inverse and extremely inverse types.

- The low setting may also be used with the RI curve.

- The high setting is of the definite time type.

12. For branch circuit-breaker feeder, The earth fault protection shall be operated by

residual current measurement, which it uses the sum of the sensor secondary

currents.

13. Like phase protection, earth protection shall be fitted with two separately

adjustable settings.

14. Electrical characteristics of the circuit-breaker function shall not be less than the

following values:

- Rated current 200 A

- Short-circuit breaking capacity 21 KA / 17,5 KV


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-8

H. RMU bushings and Cable terminations

1. Bushing

- It is preferable to have all bushings accessible from the front of the RMU.

Bushings along the sides or the rear of the RMU are not acceptable.

- The bushing should be conveniently located for working with cables specified

and allows for the termination of these cables.

2. Cable clamps

- A non Ferro-magnetic cable clamp arrangement shall be provided for all

network cables terminated on the RMU

I. Padlocking facilities

1. The circuit breakers and earthing switches shall be lockable in the open or closed

position by 1 to 3 padlocks 6 to 8mm in diameter.

J. Voltage indicator lamps and phase comparators

1. Each function shall be equipped with a voltage indicator box on the front of the

device to indicate whether or not there is voltage in the cables. The capacitive

dividers shall supply low voltage power to the lamps.

2. Three inlets shall be provided to check the synchronization of phases.

3. This device shall be in compliance with IEC 61958 standard.

K. Safety of people

1. Any accidental overpressure inside the sealed chamber shall be limited by the

opening of a pressure limiting device in the lower part of the enclosure. Gas shall

be released to the rear of the switchboard away from the operator.

2. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove compliance with IEC 60298

appendix AA 'Internal fault'.

L. Operating lever

1. An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to

reopen immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch.

2. All manual operations shall be carried out on the front of the switchboard.

3. The effort exerted on the lever by the operator should not be more than 250 N for

the switch and circuit breaker.

M. Front plate

1. The front plate shall have an IP2XC degree of protection. The front shall include a

clear mimic diagram which indicates the different functions.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-9

2. The position indicators shall give a true reflection of the position of the main

contacts. They shall be clearly visible to the operator.

3. The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram.

4. The manufacturer's plate shall include the switchboard's main electrical

characteristics.

N. Cable insulation testing

1. It must be possible to test the core or the sheath insulation of the network cables

while the RMU remains energized at rated voltage. It shall be preferable to carry

out the phase by phase testing through a built-in facility without necessity to have

an access to cable compartment.

2. The maximum test voltage shall be less than 42 kV DC for 10 minutes.

O. Remote control of the RMUs

1. A number of applications for remote operation of the RMU shall be possible.

2. Remote operation of the RMUs network disconnectors shall be possible using

motors fitted to the operating mechanism.

3. It shall be possible to fit the motors either directly in manufacturing plant or on

site when required. Installation on site shall be possible with the RMU fully

energized and manufacturer should provide detailed instructions for installation to

the control mechanism. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of switch status

are also required.

4. The fitting of the motors to the mechanism must not in any way impede or

interfere with the manual operation of the switches. An auxiliary contact to

prevent motorised operation of the mechanism while the operating handle is

inserted into the operating point must also be provided

P. Finishing

1. The device shall be fully designed for use in a hot, humid atmosphere and shall be

low-maintenance. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove salt fog

withstand for at least 200 hours on operating mechanism according to IEC 60068-

2-2 standard.

2. All metallic parts shall have rust protection.

3. Two lifting rings shall be installed on the top of the switchboards for handling.

2.6 TYPE AND ROUTINE TESTS

A. The following type-test certificates shall be submitted for the equipment :

1. Impulse dielectric tests,

2. Power frequency dielectric tests,

3. Temperature-rise tests,

4. Short-time and peak withstand current tests,

5. Mechanical operating tests,

6. Short circuit breaking tests.

7. Short circuit making tests.

8. Internal arc withstand


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-10

B. The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer shall be substantiated by a test report

signed by the manufacturer's quality control department. The reports shall cover the

following aspects:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,


3. HV Dielectric tests.

4. Phase continuity tests,

5. Functional tests (including mechanical operation).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and

all work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with

the best trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by

skilled workers equipped to produce satisfactory results; in a safe, substantial manner

so as to avoid undue stresses, rigid enough to prevent undue movement, so as to

present a neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing, maintenance

and repairing.


A. The contractor shall provide concrete pedestals, anchor bolts, hangers, channels,

saddles, etc., for installation of equipment and apparatus shown on the drawings and

specified in the various sections.




specifications.






operating tests. The various equipment and systems shall be demonstrated to operate

in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Tests shall be

performed in the presence of the client/client representative. The contractor shall

provide electric power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the

various tests.


FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV

___________________________________________________________________________

16360-11






END OF SECTION

SECTION 16425 STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

______________________________________________________________________________

16425-1

1. General

An LVSTS is a device that will provide a source of uninterrupted electrical power to a load.

This function is based on the assumption that two independent and reliable sources of power

are available. If the source designated as the Preferred Source is determined by the LVSTS to

be out of tolerance, the LVSTS will transfer the source to the remaining source, designated as

the Alternate Source. This determination and transfer will take place in less then ¼ of a 60

Hz cycle or less then 4.17 mSec. The transfer from preferred to alternate source will be seen

by the load as a closed transition and by the sources as an open transition. The switching is

accomplished through the use of solid state devices known as thyristors or SCR’s. No

mechanical switching such as wrap-around breakers or paralleling devices shall be allowed.

The thyristors must be rated for continuous duty at the LVSTS rated current.

2. LVSTS Technical Requirements

The following describes the technical requirements for the proper specification of a Low

Voltage Static Transfer Switch.

2.1. Electrical Requirements

2.1.1. Voltage

The operating range shall be 380 VAC- 1 2 wire or 3 4 wire systems. A neutral and

ground buss shall be provided. A bonding jumper between the ground and neutral bus

shall be provided for service entrance applications.

2.1.2. Frequency

The standard operating frequency shall be specified as 60Hz.

2.1.3. Switching

The main switching shall be accomplished through solid-state devices. The solid-state

devices shall be thyristors and shall be rated for 100% continuous current. Hybrid

switching using underrated thyristors and paralleling mechanical breaker or switches is

not allowed. 4-pole switching shall switch the three phases and the neutral, ABCN. The

switching of the neutral shall not result in a voltage shift between the phase voltages or a

cross-connection of the two neutrals.

2.1.4. Current Ratings

The LVSTS shall be rated for 100% continuous operation at rated current. The overload

rating of the unit shall be a minimum of 125% for 30 minutes. Fault withstand ratings

shall conform to UL1008 . Short circuit ratings shall be determined in accordance with

UL1008 requirements of X/R=6.6 for three cycles. The repeatable UL1008 fault

withstand requirement is 20X or 10kA minimum at 380 VAC. The LVSTS shall have a

one time fault withstand of 65 kA at 380 VAC with rupture of the thyristors or damage to

internal bus or switchgear.


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-2

Operating Limits

The LVSTS shall supply any load with a power factor from 0 lead or lag to unity. The

efficiency shall exceed 99% with a power factor of 0.8. Load current harmonics are

unlimited. Source voltage harmonics cannot exceed 5% maximum or 3% for any single

harmonic.

2.1.5. Devices

The thyristors used as the static switch portion shall be properly sized to meet the

requirements of UL1008 without the need of series fuses or wrap-around switchgear.

2.2. Mechanical Switching Requirements

2.2.1. Devices

The LVSTS shall employ molded case circuit breakers or switches (breaker). Two of the

breakers shall serve as the disconnect means to each of the thyristor assemblies. One

breaker shall serve as the common output disconnect for the common output of the

thyristor assemblies. The remaining two breakers shall serve as bypass devices for each of

the thyristor assemblies. A sixth, breaker shall be added in parallel with the existing

output breaker. This sixth breaker provides redundancy for a potential single point of

failure. The breakers shall be plug-in. The breakers shall not be capable of being removed

unless the breaker is open.

2.2.2. Operation

The disconnecting means shall be non-automatic type with instantaneous tripping only.

Motor operators shall not be used. Shunt trips shall be provided on all breakers except the

output breaker. All breakers shall be equipped with 1 Form A and 1 Form B dry auxiliary

contact. The controller shall determine the status of each breaker. The breakers shall not

have under voltage tripping devices. Kirk Key interlocks shall be employed on all

breakers except the output breaker. The output breaker shall have a tag out/lock out

means for maintenance. The Kirk Key sequence shall not allow a cross connection of

sources during bypass operation. The bypass operation shall be conducted without the use

of any portion of the control circuit. The controls shall continue to monitor the status of

all breakers and thyristors, even in bypass. In addition to the Kirk Key lock, the controls

will not allow a closure of any breaker, via shunt tripping, which would results in a cross

connections of sources.

2.3. Mechanical And Environmental Requirements

2.3.1. Cooling

Natural convection cooling shall be provided for all units rated at 400A and below.

Forced air-cooling shall be available for all units’ 100A and above. All cooling fans are

to be redundant. NEMA 1 enclosure designs shall have the air inlet on the bottom of the

unit and the exhaust on the top of the unit. Filter and fan replacement shall be possible

with the LVSTS in bypass mode. The continuous operating temperature range shall be

between 0OC to 50

OC with a relative humidity not to exceed 95% non-condensing at an


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-3

altitude below 6000 ’. Screening on the inlet and exhaust areas shall not admit any object

greater then ¼” in diameter.

2.3.2. Enclosure

The standard enclosure shall conform to NEMA 1 requirements. Units rated between

100A and 600A shall be a single unit enclosure. Each unit shall be mounted on self-

leveling casters. Units rated between 800A to 1200A shall be a two-unit enclosure. Units

rated 1600A to 4000A shall be three or more units. Ratings above 600A shall mount

directly on the floor.

In wet and/or hard atmospheric conditioned areas, NEMA 3R enclosures shall be used

and to have front inlet, exhaust and meet all applicable NEMA requirements. NEMA 3R

requirements may be met by placing a NEMA 1 LVSTS inside a NEMA 3R enclosure.

2.3.3. Cable Entrance And Service

Cable entrance shall be from the top, bottom or sides. Access for connections and

maintenance shall be from the front and side and/or the rear. Dedicated points shall be

provided to land all cable connections without drilling holes in the bus. All front doors are

to be lockable. All major components, thyristor assemblies, breakers, controls, are to be

removable from the front.

2.3.4. Internal Arrangements

All bus and cable connections are to be available for infrared scanning (IR) from the

front. All bus is to be copper or aluminum and rated at 1000A/in2. All internal cables are

to be bundled and labeled. Fiber optic cables are to be used for critical control

connections to minimize impact from EMI and RFI.

2.4. Standards The LVSTS shall conform to the following requirements and standards:

2.4.1. ANSI/NFPA 70

2.4.2. National Electric Code (NEC)

2.4.3. NEMA ST-20: Dry Transformers

2.4.4. NEMA AB1: Molded Case Circuit Breakers

2.4.5. NEMA PB1: Panel Boards

2.4.6. Zone 4 Seismic

2.4.7. UL1008

2.4.8. UL991

2.4.9. CBEMA/IEEE 488

2.4.10. ETL

2.4.11. CE

2.4.12. cUL

2.4.13. CSA

2.4.14. UL50 Cabinets & Boxes

2.4.15. UL489 Molded Case Breakers & Enclosures


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-4

2.4.16. UL1950 Standard For Safety

2.4.17. IEEE 587/ANSI C62.41 Surge & Noise Suppression

2.4.18. ISO 9001

2.5. Controls

2.5.1. Metering

The display shall toggle between a control screen and a meter screen. In the meter mode

the following values shall be displayed simultaneously on the front panel display screen:

Preferred Source Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn. Vcn

Alternate Source Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn

Output Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn

Preferred Source: Ia, Ib, Ic

Alternate Source: Ia, Ib, Ic

Output Current: Ia, Ib, Ic

Preferred Source: Frequency

Alternate Source: Frequency

Phase Angle: Between Preferred & Alternate Source

Output KVA

Output %THD to 13 Harmonic

Output Power Factor

2.5.2. Display Panel

A mimic bus shall display the status of the following LVSTS points via red/green LEDs:

Open/Closed status of each breaker

Off/On status each thyristor switch (1 LED per 6 thyristors)

Preferred/Alternate Source Selected

Source Available

Bus energized (3 LEDs: Preferred Source, Alternate Source, Load Bus)

The mimic bus shall also display the following system status indications. An

unacknowledged alarm shall also include an audible indication:

Overload

Circuit Breaker Trip

Over Voltage Condition


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-5

Under Voltage Condition

Over Frequency Condition

Under frequency Condition

Open/Shorted Thyristor

Sources In Sync

Sensor Failure

Over Temperature

Controller Failure

2.5.3. Control Setpoints

The following operating parameters and set points shall be available and shall be

adjustable via the front panel keypad:

Voltage Limits

The voltage detection thresholds may be set within the following limits. This applies to

the fast and slow detection thresholds.

Over Voltage: 0% to +100%

Under Voltage: 0% to -100%

Frequency Limits

The limits established are for synchronizing with a potentially unsynchronized alternate

source such as a diesel generator or UPS.

Over Frequency at 60Hz: to 62Hz

Under Frequency at 60Hz: to 58Hz

Phase Angle

The phase angle between the two sources is referenced from the active source to the

inactive source. This limit also applies when the two sources have met the frequency

criteria defined above.

Source Phase Difference: 2 Degrees to 50 Degrees

Retransfer Enable

Upon restoration of the Preferred Source, an automatic retransfer may be allowed after

the Retransfer Time Delay has expired. Retransfer Holdoff blocks any automatic

retransfer for a brief period. This allows the new source to recover from any sag or

voltage regulation reaction as a result of the initial transfer.


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-6

Automatic Retransfer: Allow/Inhibit Retransfer

Retransfer Delay: Return to Preferred Source Upon Restoration

from 30 seconds to 12 minutes

Retransfer Holdoff: 5 seconds to 44 seconds

Source Selection

Either source can be designated as the Preferred Source. This designation will define the

retransfer source as well. This designation can be changed at will without an actual

transfer taking place until the retransfer delays have expired.

Source Selection: Designate Preferred Source

Forced Retransfer

In the event the Alternate Source is degraded prior to the Preferred Source being restored,

a transfer can be forced to the original Preferred Source regardless of the status of the

source.

Forced Retransfer: Automatic retransfer is Alternate Source Is also lost

Reverse Current Limit

If regenerative current, from the load to the active source, is detected above the defined

current threshold, a transfer from the active source will be initiated. Any retransfer will be

inhibited until the source is restored unless the Forced Retransfer is enabled.

Reverse Current: 5% to 190%

Overcurrent Threshold: 10% to 390%

2.5.4. Control Features

The following control features are available via the front panel or are carried out

automatically by the controller:

Auto/Manual Transfer Select

The automatic or manual transfer feature shall be selected. If the manual option is

selected, the switch will not transfer upon degradation of the Preferred Source.

Preferred Source Select

Either source may be designated as the Preferred Source. This selection may be changed

at will.


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-7

Emergency Shutdown

To allow a total interruption of all current paths, the gating signals shall be removed from

all thyristors and all circuit breakers, so equipped, shall be shunt tripped.

Emergency Transfer

An emergency transfer to the opposite source will be carried out regardless of the voltage,

phase, or frequency. This is only available as a manual function from the keypad.

Manual Transfer

Allows the operator to transfer to the opposite source even if the present source is within

tolerance.

Local/Remote Operation

Disables the local keypad and allows remote operation.

Transfer upon detection of open thyristor and alarm

In the event an open thyristor is detected in the conducting thyristor assembly, the

controller will switch to the opposite source, inhibit any future transfers, and signal an

alarm.

Inhibit transfer upon detection of shorted thyristor and alarm

In the event of a shorted thyristor detected on the non-conducting side, the switch will

transfer to the shorted side, inhibit any future transfers, and signal an alarm.

Event log

All transfer events shall be recorded with regard to conditions at the time of the transfer

along with a time stamp.

Transfer upon detection of reverse current

If reverse current from the load to a fault at the active source is detected, the switch will

transfer from that source to the opposite source.

Retransfer upon restoration of Preferred Source

The switch can be programmed to automatically return to the Preferred Source upon

restoration of that source. There is a programmable time delay that can be set between

30s seconds and 12 minutes.


______________________________________________________________________________

16425-8

Transfer inhibit into fault

If a large current accompanies a voltage drop on the active source, the switch will wait 10

seconds before initiating a transfer. This is to allow the downstream or upstream

protective device to clear the fault or the large load to start. If the condition still persists,

the switch will shutdown when the thermal limits are reached.

Sources synced transfer

If two sources such as a utility and a generator are attempting to synchronize, the switch

will transfer when the frequency and phase angles enter the transfer window.

2.5.5. Communications

The following communications options shall be available:

RS-232

RS-485

ModBus

SCADA

TCP/IP

2.6. Reliability All critical signal paths shall be redundant or isolated. Each thyristor shall have an

independent date drive and power supply. The gate drive signal path shall be fiber optic to

eliminate issues with EMI, RFI, and voltage dielectric. Allow power supplies shall be

supplied via an inter UPS. In addition to the UPS, an additional UPS shall supply the logic

controller.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16440 WIRING DEVICES

________________________________________________________________________

16440-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all accessories and

materials required for various types of receptacles, connectors, switches and finish

plates.

1.2 APPLICATION CODES AND STANDARDS

A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

B. BS 3676 Lighting Switches

C. BS 1363 Socket Outlets

D. BS 4293 RCD

E. BS 4343 & BS 5420 Industrial Sockets


A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical devices,

sizes, and ratings. These products have been in satisfactory use and in service

for not less than 2 years. Products shall be complied with requirements of

local codes, British and IEC Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTAL

Submit the followings:-

A. Product Data: Data shall be submitted for each product specified in this

section, with catalog clippings and manufacturer technical specifications.

B. Samples: Provide sample for each device which shall be used and for all

relevant accessories (cover, plates). Colour selection and technical

features shall be complied with the requirements of codes and of the

Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant Local, and International

Standards and all types shall be of the same manufacturer to provide consistent

appearance and finish.

Rated voltage and ampere should be indicated on all wiring devices


________________________________________________________________________

16440-2

2.2 Wiring Devices

A Boxes and Fittings

Boxes shall be provided with means for securely terminating conduits.

Heavy-molded rigid PVC boxes shall be provided with brass insert threads and

fixed lugs to receive cover screws.

B Plates

Plates shall be of square or rectangular shape to adequately cover corresponding

outlet boxes and be designed to fit the electrical devices, Various samples shall be

submitted for approval and/or selection by the Engineer.

Fixing screws shall be recessed chromium plated, polished. Screw head shall be

finished to suit the plates.

Plates for socket outlet shall match switch plates in each particular area.

Plates shall be designed to match associated devices and to cover the outlet boxes.

Plates for flush mounting devices shall be constructed of metal or stainless steel or

moulded materials of white in colour, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C Socket (Receptacles) Outlets

The Contractor shall supply a unified standard type socket (receptacle) outlet for

the whole project.

Standard socket outlet for use in single phase circuits 220V (service) shall be rated

13 amp, 250 volts with two poles plus earth. The earth terminal of each socket

shall be effectively connected to the earth continuity conductor, phase and neutral

conductors to the respective terminals.

Receptacles shall have fire-resistant non-absorptive hot moulded phenolic

compositions or equal bodies with metal plaster ears, internal with supporting

member. Receptacles shall be flush type except where otherwise indicated on the

drawings.

Contacts shall be self-adjusted and have a non-expanding size limiting entry, to

prevent permanent distortion.

Where duplex socket outlets are shown on Drawings, two of this type of socket

shall be mounted under one common plate.


________________________________________________________________________

16440-3

Weatherproof socket outlets shall be mounted in the box specified with a gasketed,

weatherproof cover plate, with individual cap over each socket outlet opening and

stainless steel mounting screws. Caps shall be tightly closed with spring-retained

cover when socket outlet is not in use.

Terminals for 220V outlets shall each be capable of receiving and satisfactorily

connecting two (2) conductors (solid or stranded), each of 4 mm2 minimum.

Socket outlets for flush fitting shall be mounted in appropriate recessed box.

All power sockets for use in three-phase circuits 220 volts (Service) shall be, 4 wire, 32

amps. or 45 amps as indicated on the drawings, 3P+E, 400V weatherproof type. The

locations of these receptacles are shown on the drawings.

Power sockets shall be provided with matching plugs

250V general purpose Socket outlets shall be mounted with correct polarity, such that

switch shall cut the hot wire.

Socket outlets used for UPS shall be marked “UPS Outlet” engraved on it.

Receptacles in hazardous areas in which flammable gases or vapours may occur shall be

of explosion proof type in accordance with IEC-79.

Industrial socket outlet shall be 16 or 32A, 250 V or 400 V, 2P+N+E or 3P+N+E,

single with polycarbonate housing switch and matching plug.

All sockets located in wet areas are to protected with earth leakage module.

D Switches

- Switches shall be quick make and quick break type, suitable for use

with standard interchangeable plates. Switches for use in incandescent

or fluorescent lighting circuits shall be of the A.C. general use type

and be fully rated 10 amps at 250 volts and as indicated on the

drawings.

- Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cap

type with entire body of moulded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fiber,

paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or

cover. Switch handles shall be of white colour. Metal yoke shall not

extend beyond the sides or constitute the switch body cover. The

mounting yoke shall be insulated from the mechanism, equipped with

plaster ears and fastened to the switch body or bolts, screw rivets or

other substantial means that meet test requirements. Provision of an

equipment grounding screw in the yoke is optional. The section of the

yoke normally intended to bear on the surface outside the box shall

have a minimum over-all dimension of 20 mm measured at right angles

to the longitudinal axis of the coke.


________________________________________________________________________

16440-4

Contacts shall be made between silver or silver alloys. Switches shall

be back and side wired with terminal of screw or combination screw-

clamp type. Terminal screw shall be not smaller than M3 and shall be

captive or terminal type. Back wire devices shall have separate access

holes for wiring. The screwless type shall have an additional hole for

wire release.

- Switches shall not be connected in the neutral conductor. Switch shall

be rigidly attached to outlet boxes by means of two screws.

- Adjacent switches used in different phases must be provided with

marking indicating this.

- 20 amp or 30 Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light,

and shall have the Works "Water Heater" engraved on it when used

for that propose.

- 45/50 amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and

shall have the work "Cooker" engraved on it when used for that

purpose.

- Switches assemblies shall be of the grid switch system, comprising

grid switches and cover plates of metal or stainless steel or moulded

material with white finish, unless otherwise indicated and approved by

the Engineer

Switch assemblies shall comprise 16 or 20 amp lighting switches, and

other units if so indicated on the drawings.

E Cable Outlet

Cable outlet shall comprise a moulded cover plate with a side groove for 3 x

16mm2 multicore flexible cord, a cable clamp, 3 terminals for 16mm2

conductors.

F. Wiring Devices Assignment

Location Finishing / Protection Manufacturer

General Areas, Corridors,

Offices and small electrical

rooms

Flush Mounting;

White Plastic

To the approval of the

Engineer

Out door;

Roof top

Surface Mounting

Ingress Protected IP 56

Polycarbonate housing with

cover and seal


Engineer

Major Electrical /

Mechanical rooms

Metalclad,

Surface Mounting


Engineer

Laundry / Kitchen Polycarbonate housing

Surface Mounting


Engineer


________________________________________________________________________

16440-5

IP 44 – Splash proof

PART 3 - EXECUTION

General:

Flush-mounted boxes shall be cast in concrete walls and grouted into hollow walls.

Metal boxes threaded to raceways in exposed installations shall be separately

supported.

Boxes installed in concealed conduit or raceway systems shall be set flush with the

finished surfaces. The location of all boxes shall be easily accessible and any

interference with mechanical equipment or structural features shall be relocated as

directed by the Engineer.

Sockets:

The sockets shall be located and installed as shown on the Drawings. The location

shall be easily accessible. Receptacles shall be so installed that the neutral

(grounded) pin is always on the left side or top side,

when viewed facing the installation.

Switches:

Local wall switches near doors, shall be located at strike side of doors as finally

hung, whether so indicated on Drawings or not.

A junction box shall be placed in the back of each wall mounted switch or socket

outlet.

If thickness of wall does not permit such an installation, adjacent position shall be

accepted.

The switches shall be installed as shown on the approved Drawings. Where more

than one switch is shown for one indoor outlet box, the switches shall be installed

under one plate. Toggle switches for lighting, except for 3-way and 4-way

switches shall be installed so that the contacts are closed when the handle is in the

up position.

Switches shall be mounted with longer dimension vertical and operating handle in

upward position when in the "ON" position.

Single pole switches shall switch the (phase) wire circuit. Neutral wire shall not

run through switches provided with a neutral shunt or bridge.

Device Plates:


________________________________________________________________________

16440-6

Device plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with

finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. device plates shall

be installed vertically with an alignment tolerance of 0. 16 mm (1/16 inches).

Mounting Height:

The mounting height of wall-mounted outlet and switch boxes; measure between

the bottom of the box and the finished floor, shall be as specified and as approved

by Engineer.

ID

Switches : 110cm FFL

Socket : 30cm FFL

Above Counter : 20cm from top of counter sockets

F/A Break galss : 190 cm FFL

F/A Srumder : 220 cm FFL

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES

___________________________________________________________________________

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused

switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the latest applicable standards:

1. NEMA KS-1

2. UL 98

1.3 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW / APPROVAL

A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Dimensioned outline drawing.

2. Conduit entry/exit locations.

3. Switch ratings including:

a. Short-circuit rating

b. Voltage

c. Continuous current

4. Fuse ratings and type

5. Cable terminal sizes

6. Product data sheets

1.4 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in paragraph

1.04

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or

9002 certified.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The safety switches shall bear a UL label.


___________________________________________________________________________

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the

equipment at time of shipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Products in compliance with the specification shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 GENERAL DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide switches as shown on drawings with the following ratings:

1. 30 to 600 amperes

2. 240 volts AC maximum

3. 2- and 3-pole plus S/N

4. Fusible and non-fusible

5. Mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors.

B. Construction

1. Switch blades and jaws shall be visible and plated copper.

2. Switches shall have a black handle through 100A (except on plug-fuse

type) that is easily padlockable with two 3/8-inch shank locks in the

OFF position. Higher rating shall have a red handle that is easily

padlockable with three 3/8-inch shank locks in the OFF position.

3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door

from opening when the handle is in the ON position.

4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the

enclosure.

5. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the ON and OFF position.

6. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasable, positive quick-

make/quick-break type (except 30A plug-fuse type).

7. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment and be

equipped with factory installed neutrals.

8. All switches (except 30A plug-fuse type) shall have side opening doors.

Door padlocking capability shall be provided.

9. Suitable for systems capable of 100kA with Class R Fuses (except 30A

plug-fuse type).

10. Double-make, double-break switch blade feature shall be provided

(except 30A plug-fuse type).

11. 30A to 100A shall have R fuse rejection capability (not applicable to

plug-fuse type)if on the drawings specified as fused switch.


___________________________________________________________________________

C. Enclosures

1. All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 general purpose unless otherwise

noted.

2. Other types, where noted, shall be:

a. NEMA 3R approved for outdoor application.

b. NEMA 1 plug fuse indoor

3. Paint color shall be ANSI 61 gray.

4. 30A to 60A NEMA 1 enclosures shall have tangential knockouts on the

top, bottom, and sides of the enclosure. NEMA 3R enclosures shall

have tangential knockouts on the bottom and sides. (Not applicable to

NEMA 1 plug-fuse type).

2.3 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplate shall be front cover mounted, containing a permanent record of

switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY TESTING

A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this

section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and

NEMA standards.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16450 OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

___________________________________________________________________________

16450-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


and materials required for the installation of oil-immersed distribution transformer in

accordance with attached specifications and drawings.





and products:


2. IEC 60076-1 Power transformers to 60076-5

3. IEC 60354 Loading guide for oil-immersed type power transformers.

4. CENELEC Harmonization Documents:

- HD 398-1 to 398-5: 1980 .

- HD 428-1 S1: 1992 .





control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed transformer.




2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality

control procedures,


D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of transformers for not

less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied

equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been in

satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.

E. Equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company



___________________________________________________________________________

16450-2

1.4 SUBMITTAL











provided.






C. Test Reports:








1.5 COORDINATION








___________________________________________________________________________

16450-3



B. Store transformers in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory




transformers internal components, enclosure and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTION

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following specifications apply to three-phase oil-immersed transformers,

hermetically sealed with integral filling, insulation system with oil natural air natural

(ONAN) cooling for indoor installation destined for use in three-phase MV/LV

distribution systems.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Magnetic Core

1. This shall be made from laminations of grain oriented silicon steel, insulated with

mineral oxide; the method of cutting and stacking shall be "step lap", so as to

optimize the level of no-load losses.

B. LV Windings

1. These shall be made from copper profile wire.

C. MV Windings

1. These shall be made of copper profile wire or copper round wire.

D. MV Connections

1. Fixed MV plug-in bushings straight or elbow according to the orientation of the

incoming cables shall be provided.



___________________________________________________________________________

16450-4

E. LV Connections

1. The LV connections shall be made using porcelain bushings up to 200 KVA, and

flat-bars from 250 KVA onwards.

2. A LV air-insulated terminal cover shall be provided.

3. Neutral shall be fully rated and brought out

F. MV Tapping

1. The tapping which act on the highest voltage adapting the transformer to the real

supply voltage value, shall be provided with an off-circuit tap-changer switch with

a padlocking facility on the top cover of the transformer.

2.3 MAIN CHARACTERISTIC OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Tank

1. The tank of the transformer shall be made with flexible cooling corrugations, in

order to absorb the expansion of the dielectric due to temperature variations.

2. The cover shall be bolted on top of the tank.

3. The tank shall be built in such a way as to avoid any water accumulation.

B. Dielectric and Component Material

1. The dielectric shall be mineral oil, class I & II according to IEC 60296 .

2. The concentration in PCB has to be lower than the minimum detection rate of 2

ppm (parts per million).

3. The components of the transformer such as insulation material, varnish, painting,

etc. have to be new and PCB-free.

4. The filling of the transformer shall be made under vacuum, in order to guarantee

the maximum preservation of dielectric properties.

5. The live part of the transformer shall be previously oven dried so as to remove all

residual humidity.

C. Gaskets

1. All the gaskets shall be resistant against the action of the mineral oil, at the

working temperature.

D. Protection Against Corrosion

1. The anticorrosion treatment of the tank and the cover shall comprise:

- An external degreasing and rinsing

- A hot phosphating operation

- A powdering through application of a polyester resin with an electrostatic spray

gun (minimum thickness 40 to 50 microns)



___________________________________________________________________________

16450-5

2. The main characteristics of the coating guarantee:

- A gloss of 30 to 60 % for an angle of 60° (measured according to ASTM-

D523)

- A salt spray resistance of 1000 hours (measured according to ASTM-B117)

- A UV resistance without losses more than 10% gloss according to the RAL

scale 1 (measured according to NFT 30-057, over a 3 months period).

- An adherence of between 0 and 1 (measured according to ASTM-D3359)

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND STANDARD EQUIPMENT

A. The transformers shall be equipped with:

1. 4 bi-directional flat rollers

2. 2 lifting and untanking lugs

3. 2 earthing terminals

4. 1 filling plug

5. 1 draining device

6. 1 Presuure relief device

7. 1 rating plate

8. 1 "Danger Electricity" warning label

9. 1 routine tests certificate

10 . 1 instruction manual for installation, commissioning and maintenance in English.

B. Protection

1. The transformers shall be equipped with a DGPT2 protection relay (or equivalent)

including:

- 1 gas detector/flow level indicator with one contact (for gas discharge and drop

in liquid level)

- 1 over pressure contact (for internal pressure increase)

- 2 thermostats for alarm and tripping (for internal temperature increase)

- 1 dial type thermometer without contact.

2.5 ROUTINE AND TYPE TESTS

A. Routine Tests

The following tests shall be carried out on all the transformers after the manufacturing,

enabling an official test certificate to be produced for each one:

1. Measurement of windings resistance.

2. Measurement of the transformation ratio and vector group

3. Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss

4. Measurement of no load loss and no load current

5. Applied voltage dielectric test

6. Induced voltage dielectric test



___________________________________________________________________________

16450-6

B. Type Tests and Special Tests

The following tests shall be submitted for the transformers:

1. Temperature rise test.

2. Lightning impulse test.

3. Short circuit test.

4. Noise level measurements in accordance with IEC 60551 .

5. Measurement of partial discharges.

C. The manufacturer shall produce a test report from an official laboratory on a

transformer of the same design as those produced.

Transformer Technical Data

Type Hermetically sealed

Rated power as shown on the drawings at

50 Deg. C. and shall be derated

for relative humidity and altitude

applicable to site.

Cooling ONAN

Standard IEC 60076 and SASO

Thermal Class A

Dielectric Mineral oil

Max. ambient temperature 50 Degree C

Dielectric temperature rise 50 K

Winding temperature rise 55 K

Average daily temperature 40 Degree C

Average yearly temperature 30 Degree C

Vector Group Dyn11

Winding material Copper

Rated primary voltage 13.8 KV

Rated primary insulation level 17.5 KV

Power-frequency withstand voltage-rms 38 KV, 1 minute

Impulse withstand voltage - peak 95 KV

MV tapping range (off-circuit) +/ - 2.5 % +/- 5 %

Rated secondary No-load voltage 400 V

Frequency 60 HZ

Rated impedance voltage 6 % max



___________________________________________________________________________

16450-7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and all

work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with the

best trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by




and repairing.








specifications.









provide electric power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the various

tests.






END OF SECTION

SECTION 16520 EXTERNAL LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

________________________________________________________________________

16520 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

Without restricting the generality of the foregoing, the installation covered under this

section of the Specifications shall include the supply, delivery to site, storage,

installation and putting into satisfactory operation the following:

Cables from external lighting panel to all fuse junction boxes of external lighting

columns, including trenching concrete encasement when needed, backfill, and the

like.

External lighting columns with foundation holding - down bolts and accessories,

excavation and backfill, painting and the like.

External lighting luminaires with lamps, control gear, outlets, junction boxes, internal

wiring and the like.

Luminaires generally shall comply with IEC 598 and the applicable C.I.S.P.R

recommendations. Manufacturer shall verify compliance with these standards and the

applicable local regulations and design standards.

Earthing system with the pit, earthing rod and accessories, earthing conductor,

excavation, backfill and the like.

Making good any impaired surface or grade finish and transportation of excess earth.

Calculations, preparation of 'shop' and 'as-built' drawings, equipment data, technical

literature, instruction manuals, samples and the like.

Labelling of all equipment

Testing of installation and hand-over upon completion of the work.

A General Design Conditions

The electricity to the lighting pillars (FPP) shall be made available at

380 /220 V declared volts, three phase, four wire 60 Hz, with solidly grounding

neutral from the existing L.V. supply point.

Power supply to each luminaire shall be at 220 V, 60Hz.

The lighting loads shall be evenly balanced across the three phases in

accordance with the Drawings.

Unless otherwise stated, all equipment shall be designed and derated for

continuous and trouble free service under 40 oC maximum ambient

temperature, 90% relative humidity and maximum sun radiation temperature


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -2

reaching 50 oC, with a high content of ultra violet rays. The equipment shall

be able to withstand full load operation

exposed to sun, corrosive agents, vermin and the like. Unless otherwise

indicated or specified all low voltage equipment shall be of the 600/1000 volt

class.

The component parts of each electrical system or piece of equipment shall be

the latest standard product of a single manufacturer to provide operation and

performance in accordance with the general design intent of the Specification.

Where the use of components by different manufacturers is permitted such

components must be of standard designs and dimensions and be fully

interchangeable.

1.2 PERFORMANCE AND STANDARDS

A Testing

Testing and inspection of the installation shall be carried out in accordance

with the Regulations and Standards listed in the documents after completion

of the work prove compliance with the Specification. The tests will be carried

out in the presence of and to be satisfaction of the Engineer.

Manufacturer's test certification for appropriate equipment shall be handed to

the Engineer prior to the Site testing being carried out.

All result of the tests on Site shall be recorded and signed by all witnessing

parties. Subsequently, three copies of all such documents shall be submitted

to the Engineer.

Prior notice shall be given to the Engineer of proposed tests together with a

list of equipment to be used. In particular the Contractor shall submit his

proposals for measuring the illumination levels and for calculating the average

levels as specified.

All tests including where applicable, insulation test, continuity tests,

effectiveness of earthing, measuring of earth electrode resistance shall be

carried out under the responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in testing and

commissioning and shall re-test at his own expenses any item that fails. No

repeat test shall be carried out until the cause has been established and

rectification of the failure has been carried out.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -3

The Contractor shall include the following tests to be carried out on Site:

1. lighting panel tests

2. insulation resistance test with 500 volts megger

3. phasing out of polarity check

4. operation and protection gear tests

5. visual inspection: The Contractor shall include for carrying out the

following tests in addition to those previously called for:

* Condition of equipment and quality of the workmanship

* Level, perpendicularly and alignment of the columns and

Luminaires.

* Actual characteristics of equipment.

Measurement of insulation resistance: Insulation resistance tests on the

various LV circuits, shall be performed after insulation, in accordance with

approved Standards to determined the adequacy of insulation between phases,

neutral and earth (lamps shall be removed during these tests where

applicable).

Resistance tests of the earthing of all metallic frames and earthing conductor

and pits.

The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer after completion of

all tests for authorization of connection of the power supply to the

installation.

Also the following operational tests must be performed:

- Normal functioning of all lamps.

- Operational tests on all switchgear and power equipment including

recording the voltage at the terminals of each ballast on the final

column in each circuit.

- Performance tests after 100 hours of normal functioning:

Measurement of illumination levels and uniformity's.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

The manufacturer shall supply the following technical documentation and information

for each type of luminaires:

A Catalogue sheet of the luminaire

B Detailed construction drawing of the luminaire


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -4

C Polar diagram of luminous intensity in roadway vertical plane and transverse

vertical plane.

D Utilization factor curve for actual inclination of luminaire

E Isolux diagram for actual inclination of luminaire

F Intensity table, in the C-gamma co-ordinates recommended by C.I.E. Nr. 27

publication.

G Computer calculation printout as detailing photometrical performance, with

illuminance and luminance levels and uniformities and TI values.

H Tightness test certificate confirming the IP 65 protection degree from the

optional compartment of the luminaire and the IP 23 protection degree for the

control gear compartment. This test certificate shall be issued by an

independent official laboratory.

I Wind resistance of one luminaire (value of Cx. s product).

J Total weight of the luminaire (with lamp and control gear).

K Power factor of one complete luminaire.

L Total electric consumption of the luminaire, including control gear losses.

M Mark and type of lamp to be used.

N Rated lumen output of the lamp under nominal conditions.

O Depreciation curve of the luminous flux with burning hours.

P Luminous flux variation with the main voltage.

Q Mark and type of ballast, ignitor and capacitors with their electrical

characteristics.

R Approval Of Equipment

The Contractor shall not order any equipment before submitting to the

Engineer, and receiving approval of, three copies of the detailed technical

characteristics of the equipment proposed for the installation, including

catalogues. Documents shall be in English.

The Contractor shall, at his own expense, submit samples to the Engineer for

approval of each type of luminaire, piece of equipment and cable proposed

for the contract, complete in every respect, after the technical characteristics

have been approved by the Engineer.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -5

The approval of the proposed columns will only be given after the acceptance

by the Engineer for the detailed calculation and design to be submitted by the

Contractor as detailed on the Drawings.

The Engineer reserves the right to verify the performance and quality of the

samples by instructing that tests of his choice to be carried out at the

Contractor's expense before granting approval of the sample.

Approval of samples by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from his

contractual obligations in respect of suitability of equipment or its final

performance once installed.

The Engineer reserves the right to reject any sample, piece of equipment or

cable presented by the Contractor which, from examination is found not to

comply with the general intent and meaning of the Specifications and/or

Drawings.

No claims whatsoever shall be allowed against the Employer and/or the

Engineer due to rejection of a sample and the Contractor shall be wholy

responsible for any delay resulting from such rejection.

S Calculations

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval before ordering

equipment, luminaires construction details and photometric performance

characteristics certified by a laboratory, together with supporting

documentation of illumination levels and uniformity's calculations and

luminaries settings based on CIE standards to prove compliance of the

propose installations with the Lighting Design Criteria.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Manufacturers

The list of approved manufacturers appearing in the following sub-sections

indicates the minimum quality and standard of equipment to be accepted.

Products of unlisted manufacturers having equivalent repute and standard will

be considered by the Engineer on an equal basis. In this respect, the

Engineer's decision shall be final and not subject to any justifications.

B Lighting Design Criteria

Road surfaces on which the lighting levels shall be measured is defined as the

width of all traffic lanes of all roadways.

The illuminanced and luminance levels of the roadways as specified below are

the maintained average levels to be calculated and substantiated by


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -6

measurements by the Contractor, after 100 hours of operation. The

Contractor shall specify the anticipated lamp lumen and luminaries dirt

depreciation factors after two years of operation certified by the

manufacturers, to assist the Engineer in assessing the maintained levels of the

installation.

Upon the completion of the installation the Contractor shall be required to

carry out measurements of illumination on site in accordance with Subsection

'Testing of Installation'.

The following lighting design criteria has been applied.

1. Arrangement:

The columns are spaced at intervals as shown on plans.

Contractor shall check location of all columns, to ensure that the

installation does not cause any conflict with other installations.

Clearances required by International Regulations shall be applied. In

case of a conflict, the issue shall be raised to the Engineer

accompanied with the proposed solution for approval before

proceeding with any works. It is the Contractor's responsibility to

ensure that above Regulations and Clearances required are met.

C Roadway Lighting Columns

Lighting columns shall have an octagonal section, tapered type, made from

sheet steel electrically welded.

Column walls shall have a minimum thickness as detailed on the drawings

and the overall diameter of the column at its base shall be sufficient to accept

the cable termination and control equipment as shown on the Drawings.

The column tops shall be designed to receive the approved luminaires or

group of luminaires to form an aesthetic homogeneous assembly. Special

brackets shall be supplied for a multiple luminaires assembly.

The columns shall be made of sheet steel with a minimum rupturing resistance

of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2.

The Contractor, shall obtain assurance from manufacturer, so that the column

once installed and fully equipped shall be able to withstand a wind of 160

km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable direction, at a height of 5 meters

above ground level taking into consideration the effect of two luminaries

heads assumed having not less than a resistance of 25 kg/luminaires plus any

special bracketing. Appropriate reinforcement shall be provided where needed

to increase the strength.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -7

Access door of weatherproof construction shall be positioned at column base

and shall be suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable termination's

and protective device. Door shall be flush fitting with retaining mechanism

and positive locking arrangement with removable hexagonal key. Column

shall be reinforced at door opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic

baseboard of suitable size to accept appropriate equipment shall be fixed to

inside of column by purpose-made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud

with washers and nuts shall be welded inside the column near the access door.

The fatigue of the steel shall in no case exceed half of the elasticity limit,

taking into account dynamic stresses due to vibrations.

A steel flange plate of adequate thickness shall be solidly welded onto the

lower edge of the column as shown on the Drawings. The plate shall have the

required number of holes for columns to accept the holding down bolts

together with a clearance hole in the center as shown on the Drawings.

D Finish

All welds shall be smooth and spatter removed. The interior and exterior

surfaces of the columns shall be cleaned by pickling or blasting and shall be

free of any grease trace.

All components of the column shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

No further touching up, finishing or modifications shall be carried out after

galvanizing. The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 500 g/m2 on both

the inside and

outside faces of the column. Galvanizing shall be carried out by total

immersion in molten zinc bath.

The galvanizing standard used shall be at least equal to French Standard NFA

91 121 (June 1985 ) or U.K. Standard BSS 729/71 .

Any damage to the galvanized shall be corrected and repaired during erection

by wire brushing affected area and treating with an approved rust inhibitor to

the satisfaction of the Engineer.

At site after weathering, the galvanizing shall be washed down with a mild

detergent solution (one percent tepol by volume) and well rinsed with clean

sweet water. The following coatings shall than be applied by brush working

within a temporary enclosure to be erected on Site by the Contractor to

maintain suitable conditions for painting:

One coat Mordant Solution ref. 45/0141 . After 16 hours drying all surfaces

shall be checked to have turned black. Any area remaining metallic gray shall

be degreased and a further coat of Mordant Solution applied.

One coat of Tower phosphate primer ref. 151/1544 to a thickness of microns.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -8

E Foundation Columns

Concrete for columns bases shall be class A concrete made with sulphate

resisting cement all as specified in subsection 'Civil Works' of these

Specifications.

The position of the anchor bolts and the level of the top surface shall be

exactly determined and adjusted. PVC conduits of sizes as shown on the

Drawings shall be installed in the foundations for incoming and outgoing

feeder lines.

The tops of the foundation blocks shall be horizontal and mid-point level

adjacent back edge of should or kerb or as detailed on the Drawings. Any

error exceeding plus or minus 25 mm shall be corrected.

Columns shall be installed on the concrete bases as shown on Drawings.

Holding down bolts, plumbs adjusting nuts and washers shall be anti-

corrosion treated steel.

Erection of the lighting columns along the roadways shall be such that

luminaires shall be located on a line parallel to the theoretical profile of the

road. Alignment of the columns both horizontally and vertically must be exact

to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Handling, off loading, storing on site, erecting and adjusting of columns shall

be carried out carefully to avoid any damage to columns and to the anti-

corrosion painting coat.

F Concrete Footing For Floodlight Pole

The bases for the light poles shall be constructed in reinforced Portland

cement concrete or lean concrete in accordance with the requirements of the

section for structural concrete of the general specifications for Civil Works

and as shown on the drawings.

The concrete bases shall be built on prepared foundations, Conform to the

dimensions indicated on the drawings or as required by the Engineer.

Instructions of the manufacturer of the poles shall strictly be followed with

regard to Conduits, anchor bolts, etc. The required reinforcement, anchor

bolts, lighting poles and conduits shall be placed as indicated on the drawings

and shall be approved by the Engineer before the concrete is poured. In order

to achieve a firm bond between the base and the surrounding soil, backfilling

along the vertical faces of the base will not be permitted. The volume of

poured concrete shall be equal to the volume of excavation, as indicated on

the drawings.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -9

G Column Mounted Luminaires

Luminaires shall be factory assembled and wired, complete with lamp,

electrical gear and accessories. Each luminaires shall be provided with the

necessary 3 x 2.5 mm2 heat resistant thermoplastic 3-core cable for

connection to the column fuse/junction box and shall be tested on ground

before installation. The third core of the above cable shall be connected to the

earth bolt inside the Luminaires and the fuse box respectively.

Luminaires adjustment shall be made at the factory to provide a

predetermined composite light distribution. Luminaires shall be installed on

top of columns single, twin or in multiple arrangement as shown on drawings.

Purpose made brackets shall be to the manufacturer's specifications. The

angle of inclination shall be in accordance with the design requirements.

Luminaires shall be set at 90 oC to the longitudinal axis of roadways.

H Fuse/Junction Box

The fuse/cable junction box shall be of cast metal with hinged lockable cover.

It shall house a 4 A HRC fuse to each luminaire, terminal blocks for maximum

3 incoming feeder cables up to 25 mm2 and outgoing cables to luminaires up

to 4 mm2 with cable holding clamps. All cable entries, fuse supports and cable

connection joints shall be made of porcelain or special backelite suitable for

the weather conditions encountered on site. Each luminaire shall be fed by at

least 3 x 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated and sheathed heat resistant copper cable

drawn inside the column from the junction box.

I Luminaires-Mechanical Specification

All luminaires material shall support without damage or aging or alteration in

structural or physical properties, severe climatic conditions (tropical climate)

in addition to heat emitted by the lamp. Plastics and other similar materials are

not acceptable.

Exposed non aluminium metallic parts of the luminaires shall be factory

finished, stove enamelled with a suitable corrosion resisting paint not affected

by the heat emitted by the lamp during continuous operation every if

necessary under maximum sunlight conditions. Colour to be agreed with the

Engineer.

Luminaires shall be firmly fixed on top of the column so that rotation or

falling of the luminaires will not occur even if the column is subject to heavy

impact.

J Description Of Street Lighting Luminaires


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -10

Luminaires shall be dust and splash proof IP65 to IEC529 specifically

designed to house the lamp and accessories. The luminaires shall be able to

withstand a wind speed of 160 km/hr during a short period.

Luminaires shall be made of extruded or pressure die-cast aluminium alloy of

the corrosion resistant type with exterior totally smooth. The copper content

shall be less than 0.05 percent to prevent intercrystalline corrosion.

The luminaires shall incorporate a die-cast aluminium control gear support

casting with side entry facilities. Access to the spigot entry fixing screws shall

be from the underside allowing tightening when canopy is fixed to the casting.

- The casting shall be finished with stove enamelled acrylic or epoxy

polyester in black, or other approved paint treatment processes.

- The casting shall support the control gear assembly, which must be

easily removed as one unit for maintenance purposes with plug and

socket electrical connection.

- High pressure die-cast entry pieces of non-corrosive aluminium and a

light weight glass fibre re-inforced polyester housing of outstanding

quality will be accepted if meeting the following requirements.

- Housing shall be a one-piece pressure die-cast GRP moulding finished

in high reflectance white inside and outside. The molecular structure

of the polyester shall be of the long chain type providing

- for maximum resistance against corrosive atmospheres and the effects

of the sun's radiation and ultra-violet rays.

- The GRP housing shall be guaranteed in writing by the Manufacturer

for a minimum of ten years for the intended environment. It shall be

the tenderer's responsibility to ensure the luminaire canopy's

suitability, as luminaires without guarantees will not be considered.

Mirror reflectors shall be of high purity (99.9% ), glazed and anodized

aluminium rigidly fixed to be body and easily replaceable. The reflector shall

be adjustable to predetermined positions to obtain the suitable light

distribution.

Optical compartment or unit shall be protected by a very high shock resistant

clear glass refractor and shall be dust and water-tight to the recommendation

of IEC publication No. 144 . Both faces of the refractor shall be smooth to

reduce to a minimum dirt accumulation and maintenance and have a

coefficient of transmission of the order of 90 percent.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -11

Plastic bowls (acrylic, or methacrylate) shall be permitted if they have a

maximum resistance to atmospheric corrosion and the ultra-violet effects of

the sun polycarbonate bowls shall not be accepted.

- The Engineer shall be the sole judge to approve plastic bowls on the

basis of the technical characteristics submitted by the supplier.

- If approved, plastic bowls shall be smooth externally and internally

and shall be injection moulded, one piece.

- Bowl/frame assembly shall be hinged to the body and maintained in

place with stainless steel fixing spring clips and a neoprene gasket

ensuring complete dust tightness. Removal of bowl frame assembly

from the hinge shall be possible without tools.

- The housing to bowl gasket shall be continuous polyurethane without

joints and shall be capable of withstanding the temperature, radiation

and elements to which they may be exposed, and designed to exclude

dust and water when fitted. It shall be attached to the luminaire

canopy in such a manner that it will be retained in position when lamp

bowl is opened. When the bowl pressure is removed from the gasket,

the gasket shall assume its original shape as though new, ie., 100%

recovery rate.

The housing and lamp compartment shall be complete with necessary bosses

and fixings to support and hold firm the lampholer die cast U shape & support

bracket and lamp reflector/optical systems to ensure precise lamp

position throughout life of luminaire. A locking system shall prevent the

loosening of the lamp.

- The support bracket shall allow the socket to be moved into at least

three different vertical positions to adjust the lamp for focal point.

- The lampholder should be fixed securely to the canopy and designed

in a way that it cannot be disturbed during its normal lifetime,

(vibrations) or during maintenance operations (lamp replacement).

- The luminaire optical system shall be removable for maintenance

purposes with a replacement only possible in the correct position in

relation to the light source for correct light distribution.

Lamp, control gear and ignitor shall be mounted in two different and isolated

compartments. Heat emitted by lamp shall not be conducted to control gear

components. An enclosed terminal block composed of plug-in quick

disconnect

electric leads shall be included such that all electrical connections shall not be

exposed to weather the canopy shall hinge downwards from the support/gear


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -12

casting to give access to the control gear compartment from above for

maintenance purposes, allowing a complete and easy visual check of all

electrical parts and connections. The hinge point shall be between lamp

compartment and support casting to provide canopy stability during

maintenance in the event of high winds, and shall be restrained/steadied with a

chain connected between the spigot casting and canopy. It shall be possible

to gain access to the control gear compartment without having to disturb the

separate lamp compartment.

Manufacturer's name and catalogue reference of lighting luminaires are given

for general reference only. It shall be understood that the actual fixtures

supplied shall meet all the requirements of the specifications, and, if

necessary, the standard fixture indicated for reference, shall be modified

accordingly. Material of other manufacturers complying with the

Specifications will be considered on equal basis.

Luminaires shall bear manufacturer's name and the factory inspection label.

Luminaires shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with IEC

Publication 162 , unless otherwise specified.

Relamping the fixture shall be possible without having to remove the fixture

from its place.

K Cable

Power will be distributed to the lighting installation by directly buried

underground cables or in conduits (refer to drawings) at 38 0/220 volts, 60

Hertz, 3 phases, 4 wires, solidly earthed neutral.

Cables for low voltage distribution in External lighting installation shall be as

specified under "Wires & Cables".

L Earthing

Earthing system shall be in full compliance with the requirements of the

Regulations and the Specifications.

All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of columns, pillars,

Luminaires, cable armour, shall be grounded. Series earthing of one piece of

equipment to another shall not be permitted.

Earthing installation shall consist of:

- Earthing of each column by the armour of the cable. The final column

in each circuit cable run shall be connected to an earth pit as shown on

the Drawings.


________________________________________________________________________

16520 -13

- Luminaires shall be earthed by means of the third conductor (2.5

mm2) and connected to the earth terminal inside fuse/junction boxes

of columns.

Bonding to the column and panels shall be made by means of 16 mm2

stranded copper single core bare cable bolted to the earth rod. Bolts, washers

and nuts shall be of the zinc copper alloy. Ferrous hardware will not be

accepted.

M Labelling

All items of equipment shall be adequately and clearly labelled. Lighting

columns shall be fitted with Trifoliate or similar labels to give black lettering

on a white background of sufficient size to be visible from a passing vehicle.

These labels shall be attached to the columns by means of stainless steel nuts

and bolts positioned just above the access doors. The columns shall be

identified in accordance with the coding and locations shown on the

Drawings.

External lighting feeder pillar labels shall be engraved on Trifoliate to give

black lettering on a white background, and shall indicate the voltage, current

rating and phase colour, together with the manufacturer mark.

All accessories such as local switches, switch-fuses and isolators used for the

control of equipment, lighting fittings etc. shall carry engraved identification

plates to indicate the circuit number and phase to which accessory is

connected as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16550 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

The Contractor shall supply, install and connect a complete underground distribution

system as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

General routing of the underground distribution system shall be adhered to, except

that any interferences with other trades or with existing underground installation

shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

Underground distribution shall be either directly buried or in concrete duct

banks as specified or shown on the Drawings. Roadway crossings shall in any case

be in concrete duct banks.

Manholes and handholes shall be used as required and/or as indicated.

Concrete used shall be class A.

1.2 PERFORMANCE AND STANDARDS

A Testing - General

The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and appliances for

testing the underground cable circuits. The Contractor shall test to his con

satisfaction and then request in writing the presence of the Engineer to

witness and demonstrate to his satisfaction the following:

1. That all lighting, power and control circuits are continuous and free

from short circuits.

2. That all circuits are free from unspecified earth.

3. That all circuits are connected in accordance with applicable wiring

diagrams.

4. That all connections are corrosion free and mechanically sound.

5. That all circuits are operational. Demonstration tests shall include

operating each Control not less than 10 times and the continuous

operation of each lighting and power circuits for not less than 4 times

4 hours.

High voltage insulation resistance tests shall be performed in the presence of

the Engineer.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -2

Test sheets shall be supplied in triplicate to the Engineer signed by

Contractor's Electrical Engineer and counter-signed by the Engineer's

Electrica1 Engineer.

B Electrical Tests On Cable

Cables buried in earth (that is, not in duct) should be tested before and after

backfilling the cable trench.

C Site Tests

1. Power Cables

a) Conductor Resistance Test

When the installation of cables and associated jointing

accessories has been completed, the d.c resistance of each

conductor shall be measured and recorded and shall not

exceed the values given in IEC/BSS.

b). Insulation Resistance Test

Insulation resistance test shall be carried out on all cables

installed with an insulation resistance tester.

c) Continuity Tests

Continuity tests shall be carried on each core of power and

pilot cables, after the cables are installed and jointed.

2. Inspection

Inspection by appropriate authority shall be carried out at the

following stages of work:

a. Cable trench before laying of cables.

b. Cables laid in trench before back filling.

c. After protection tiles are laid.

d. After warning tape is placed.

Further work at each stage shall proceed only after inspection and

approval.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Directly Buried Cables

Directly buried cable shall be laid underground as shown on the Drawings

and as herein specified.

Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to

approved formations and dimensions. Trenches shall have vertical sides and

shall be close timbered and strutted where necessary to prevent subsidence.

All unsuitable excavated material shall be removed from site.

All cables laid in the same trench shall be placed in the same horizontal

plane leaving a space of at least 7.5 cm except as otherwise shown on the

Drawings and specified hereinafter.

Cable trench depth shall be as shown on layout drawings, with minimum

depth of 100 cm for a single layer of HV cables unless otherwise indicated on

drawings. Minimum depth from the top of cables to finished grade, unless

otherwise, indicated on layout drawings, shall be 100 cm for LV power

feeders, and 45cm for street lighting cables.

High tension cables shall, where possible, be laid in separate trenches.

Otherwise a space of at least 50 cm shall be left between these cables and

any other cable unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

Direct buried cables shall be laid in a clean soft sand bedding with nominal

depth of 100 mm below cables and at least 100 mm above the top of cables.

Bedding shall be of clean small-grained sand or equivalent, free of stones

and other material liable to damage the cables.

After the cables have been laid, the trenches shall be backfilled in 150 mm

thick layers which shall be well watered and rammed and consolidated.

Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large/sharp angular

material, or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where

materials may damage ducts, cables or other substructures, or prevent

adequate compaction of fill or contribute to corrosion of ducts, cables or

other substructures.

Trench filling shall be well-watered and compacted to obtain highest possible

thermal conductivity and to avoid cavities in the trench-top covering

following any settling of the soil.

The surface of refilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated in a thoroughly

safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil is achieved.

Direct buried cables shall be protected by suitable PVC cable covers,

complete with marking indicating the presence of electrical cable Covers


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -4

shall be standard interlocking type laid a nominal 100 mm above the top layer

of cables throughout their full length. Covers shall extend to full width of

cables laid, giving an overlap of at least 50 mm, beyond outer cables.

A red PVC strip marked 'DANGER' and as specified in the design

specification shall be installed 100 mm above cable protection covers.

Adequate guarding and/or fencing shall be provided to all excavations for

the protection and safety of the public, traffic and adjacent properties.

Where trench/joint pit excavations involve removal of pavement

slabs/interlocked tiles, permission for taking them out shall be obtained from

the Ministry of Communications/Municipality. All care and attention shall

be excercised in their removal and later reinstatement to the entire

satisfaction of the Ministry of Communication/Municipality.

Cables shall be laid direct from drums.

Sufficient number of rollers shall be provided to avoid twisting of cable on its

longitudinal axis during the pulling operation.

Rollers shall be placed as close as possible to avoid abrasion to the cable

serving.

If power driven cable pulling is employed, it shall be by bond pulling method

using steel carrier wire.

Cable laying operations shall be carried out with all care and attention, to

ensure that no damage to the sheath, armour or its serving is caused

during the process. The ends of cross linked polyethylene cables shall be

capped to prevent ingress of moisture into the filler or other hygroscopic

elements of cable. The caps shall remain intact during transport and laying

operations.

All cable or armour shall have links to earth to enable testing of sheath.

Earth resistance shall not be greater than 10 ohms.

All schemes employing power cables having on extruded outer covering shall

be installed as an insulated system.

Cable screens shall be solidly bonded to earth at each end of the route.

Bonding leads shall be of sufficient cross section to carry the maximum short

circuit current.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -5

B Manholes And Handholes

Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of class A concrete cast in

place or of precast-concrete sections with leakproof joints.

Frames and covers shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.

Manholes shall be provided with cable racks, hooks, pulling irons and other

features as shown on the Drawings and as required.

A 15cm crushed-stone base shall be placed under each manhole and

handhole.

Conduits entering manholes and handholes shall terminate in end bells.

Additional openings in manhole walls for future conduit entrance shall be

provided where required or as indicated. Such openings shall be sealed with

necessary courses of brick.

The exterior surfaces of all manholes and handholes shall be given two

heavy coats of bituminous water proofing material.

C Cable Identification

Cable Identification shall consist of :

a) Cable route and joint markers.

b) Identification markers of the cable itself.

Cable route and joint markers shall be placed at intervals of 50 metres and at

points of route alignment changes and at both ends of road for road or pipe

crossings. Cable trenches less than 100 cm side shall be provided with single

markers on the center line of the run.

Trenches wider than 100 cm shall be indicated by markers mounted on each

side of the trench at the intervals specified.

Markers shall be 60 x 40 x 10cm class B concrete block with 2.5 chamfer

around edges. The top of the markers shall be flush in paved areas, shall

protrude 5cm in unpaved areas and 2 cm in finished lawns.

The words "Electrical Ductbank" with directional arrows shall be impressed

both in English and in Arabic on the markers used for ductbanks.

The words "Electrical Cables" shall be impressed both in English and in

Arabic on the markers used for direct burial Cables.

Similar materials suitably inscribed shall be used to indicate the position of

underground joints.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -6

All power and control cables shall be provided with identification markers at

their termination, and at points along the route at intervals of not more

than 25 metres apart. Markers shall be made of permanent material of an

approved type.

D Cable Records

Records of cables shall be carefully taken on site during the execution of the

works. The records shall show the routes, the exact location of each cable,

the position of joints and terminations, the date of jointing, weather

conditions prevailing, the date of testing, the name of jointer, the lengths

between joints, the serial number of cable drums, the direction of lay of

cable, that is A to Z ends, and where more than one cable is laid, sectional

insert of cable trench. Any other services that cross the route of the cable

shall be recorded.

E Power Cables End Sealings

Power cables terminating in cable pits shall be left slack at least 2 meters.

Cable end sealing caps shall be used to terminate all cables in cable pits.

Sealing cap, shall be constructed of rubber with high density polyethylene

ends, factory assembled onto removable collapsible cores supplied for site

installation in a prestretched condition.

Sealing caps shall provide moisture, ozone, acid, alkali, ullraviolet and

contamination resistance. In addition they shall provide puncture resistance

due to sharp conductor strands.

Sealing caps shall be similar to PST 8520 , 1,2,3 .

F Power Cables Jointing

Power cables of long stretches that cannot be continuous may be jointed

with an approved method of jointing suitable for directly burial.

Tape shall be of self-fusing EPR based material insulation, Corona and water

resistant. Physical and electrical properties shall be unaffected by the

degree of stretch.

Tape shall be similar to Scotch 23 .

In-line mould assembly shall be used to encapsulate the joint. Mould shall

be similar to Scotchcast In-Line joints 91 -A15 , 16 , 17 etc. when using steel

wire armoured cables. Proper moulds shall otherwise be provided for other

approved types of armoured cables.

Standard cable resin shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -7

G Installation In Duct Or Conduit

The maximum number and voltage ratings of cables installed in each single

duct or conduit, shall be as follows:

a. Power cables of the same voltage may be installed in the same duct.

b. Power cables of different voltage, but less than 600 volts may be

installed in the same duct.

c. Power cables of less than 600 volts should not be installed in the same

duct, with control, telephone, or coaxial type cables.

d. Power cables of more than 600 volts should not be installed in the

same duct, with control, telephone, Coaxial or power cables of less

than 600 volts.

e. control, telephone, and coaxial cables may be installed in the same

duct.

Connections or joints made in any cable shall not be installed in any Conduits

or ducts.

The Contractor shall make sure that the Complete duct is open, continuous

and clear of debris before installing cables. The pulling wire installed in the

pipes is to be used for pulling the rope for the cable installation. The cable

shall be installed in a manner to prevent harmful stretching of the conductor,

injury to the insulation, or damage to the outer protective covering.

Moistureseal tape or crimp socket before installing and it shall be left sealed

until Connections are made. Where more than one cable is to be installed in a

duct or conduit under the same contract, all cables shall be installed at the

same time.

The pulling of cable through ducts or conduits shall be accomplished with the

use of cable grips or pulling eyes. Maximum pulling tensions shall be

obtained from the manufacturer of the cable for straight ends and bends.

A lubricant recommended for the type of cable being installed shall be used

where pulling lubricant is required. Duct or conduit markers temporarily

removed for excavations shall be replaced as required. Kinks or cuts in the

insulation or the sheath of the cable shall not be permitted and will cause

rejection of that part of the cable length.

Such cable shall be replaced by the Contractor without any additional cost to

the project. After installation of cable in ducts or conduits, Contractor has to

make sure that the pulling wire in each pipe of the duct/conduit is re-installed

and that the ends of ducts/conduits are provided with plugs.


__________________________________________________________________________

16550 -8

In manholes or handholes, the cable shall be carefully formed around the

interior, avoiding sharp bends. Cables and splices shall be properly supported

by plastic cable racks where necessary.

H Installation In Trenches

Cables shall be unreeled in place alongside or in the trench and shall be

carefully placed on the sand bedding on the bottom of the trench as indicated

on the standard Detail Drawings. Cables shall not be unreeled at one spot

along the trench and then from there pulled into the trench and dragged

through the trench. Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same

trench, they shall be placed apart with a minimum distance of 10 cm center.

The trench shall be wide enough to accomplish this. Cables crossing over

each other shall have a minimum of 10 cm vertical displacement with the

topmost cable depth at or below the minimum required depth below finished

grade. At least 100 cm of cable slack shall be left on each side of dusting to

light units or transformers and at all other points where cable is connected to

field equipment. The slack cable shall be placed in the available space of the

trench.

I Low Current Cables Jointing

All low current cables splicing shall be done in handholes. Splicing straight or

butt) shall be direct burial grade. Splicing shall comprise a PVC transparent

enclosure with end caps with required sizes and configurations to meet exact

requirement. End caps shall have 1, 2 or 3 stepped openings which shall

accomodate at least 4 different cable sizes by trimming off the unwanted

portion. Stainless steel clamps shall hold the mold halves and end caps

firmly in place.

Closures shall be filled with approved compound to completely

encapsulate the splice for burial application.

Splicing shall be done under the following situations:

When standard cables lengths are not adequate for a long run.

When number of pairs entering a handhole is different than number

of pairs outgoing.

Cables shall moreover be left 2 meters slack in the handhole.

Cable terminations shall be treated in a similar manner with end seal

enclosures. Future connection will be performed by removing this

enclosure, doing the in-line jointing and encapsulating in a new

enclosure.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16610 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

______________________________________________________________________

16610-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installation of a

complete uninterruptible power supply system as shown on the drawings

and as specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ANSI - American National Standard Institute

ANSI C84.1 Voltage Rating for Electric Power Systems and

Equipment (60 Hz)

B. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

Pub/No. 1B 4 Amperehour and Watthour Capacity of Lead-Acid

Industrial Batteries for Stationary Service

Pub/No. 1B 5 Life Testing of Lead-Acid Industrial Batteries for

Stationary Service

Pub/No. PE 1 Uninterruptible Power Systems

Pub/No. 250 Enclose for Electrical Equipment

C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 70 National Electric Code

NFPA 71 Installation, Maintenance and Use of Central Station

Signaling Systems

NFPA 75 Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing

Equipment

NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities

NFPA 101 Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 59 Semiconductor Rectifier Components

IEEE 446 Practice for Emergency and Standby, Industrial and

Commercial

Power Systems


______________________________________________________________________

16610-2

E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors

UL 486B Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors

UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 1778 Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s data on uninterruptible power

supply systems and components.

B. Shop Drawings : Submit layout drawings of UPS systems and

accessories including, but not limited to, rectifiers/chargers, batteries,

and instruments.

C. Maintenance Data : Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

uninterruptible power supply and accessories including “trouble

shooting” maintenance guide.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. Handle uninterruptible power supply equipment carefully to prevent

damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged units or

components; replace with new.

B. Store units in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,

construction debris, and physical damage.

C. For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instruction

regarding storage and handling.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Entire system and components shall be warranted by manufacturer for

period of minimum 2 years from the substantial completion against

defective materials and workmanship. Warranty shall be jointly signed

by the manufacturer and the contractor.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture

of uninterruptible power supply systems, of types and ratings required,

whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not

less than 5 years period, and shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________________

16610-3

B. Installer Qualifications : Firm with at least 3 years of successful

installation experience on projects with uninterruptible power supply

systems similar to that required for this project, and shall be authorized

by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

C. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following codes :

1. NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical

equipment.

2. NFPA 71, 75 and 101.

3. UL 1778, ANSI, IEEE and NEMA.

4. Provide UPS system components which are UL-Listed and Labeled

or Otherwise to the approval of engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2. 1 GENERAL:

A. Provide UPS systems, or type, rating, details on charger and electrical

characteristics as shown on drawings; consisting of rectifiers/chargers,

inverters, AC transfer switches, maintenance switches and batteries with

charger. Construct the ancillary instruments, indicators and controls

required for UPS systems to operate as complete and independent

installation. Mount ancillary components on front of enclosures. Finish

enclosure in manufacturer’s standard finish and color. The entire system

including converter, inverter, battery charger, transfer equipment, and

battery shall be designed for maximum reliability in emergency service

and shall be designed with modular construction for easy field

replacement.

B. All solid state components shall be rated at twice the actual duty

requirements.

2.2 EMERGENCY INVERTER SYSTEM:

A. Furnish and install emergency AC inverter system capable of serving a

127 volts, 60 Hertz connected load for a period shown in the drawing.

B. The system shall be designed to operate from 400 volts, 3phase, 60

Hertz (or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service), and supply the

maintained power load at 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230 volts, 1

phase, 60 Hertz service) under both normal and emergency conditions.


______________________________________________________________________

16610-4

2.3 DC to AC INVERTER:

A. The DC to AC inverter shall be of the solid-state type with ferro-

resonant output transformer to provide 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or

230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) output.

B. Design shall be such that the output voltage shall be regulated within 3/4

– 5% from no load to full load to unity power factor over the entire range

of input battery voltage and the frequency shall be regulated within +/- 1

Hz.

C. Design shall be such that the inverter will automatically shutdown on

high battery voltage.

D. Total conversion efficiency shall be within 75% minimum and shall

have a sine wave output with 10% nominal total harmonic distortion.

E. Self-protective feature shall include automatic 130% current limit, short

circuit protection, fail-safe start-up, automatic low battery shutdown, and

reverse input polarity protection. The input power and control circuitry

shall be separately fused.

2.4 AC to DC CONVERTER:

A. AC to DC converter shall be capable of keeping battery fully charged

during time utility power is on and supplying DC power to inverter to

prevent interruption of AC load power.

B. System shall incorporate sensoring diode method of switching upon loss

of utility AC and shall be equipped with automatic bypass switch in

event of inverter malfunction.

2.5 BATTERY:

A. The battery shall be sized to power the fully loaded inverter for one (30)

minutes or as indicated on drawings and shall be of the high capacity,

sealed, lead-calcium requiring no addition of water during service life.

B. Batteries shall be re-chargeable after being fully dis-charged.

C. Rechargeable battery shall have an expected service life in excess of 10

years and shall be guaranteed for 10 years; 1 year unconditionally and 9

years pro-rata.


______________________________________________________________________

16610-5

2.6 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS:

A. Instrumentation and controls shall be suitable to determine that the

system is operating in a satisfactory manner. As a minimum, these shall

include a light for battery low/high voltage, ready normal power “ON”

light, charge light, inverter supplying load pilot light, battery voltmeter,

ammeter, and test switch to check system operation.

2.7 FINISH AND MOUNTING:

A. The entire system shall be enclosed in a free-standing, 14 gauge, sheet-

steel NEMA 1 enclosure, painted chlorium blue, with hinged door. The

doors shall be key-locked.

B. The inverter and charger shall be mounted above the battery on isolating

shelves in the unit. All components shall be mounted on easily

removable chassis with quick disconnect interwiring.

C. All potentially hazardous components shall have safety covers and be

properly marked with tags to indicate care handling. The battery shall be

arranged for easy maintenance. Every possible care shall be taken to

main installation and connection easy and fast.

2.8 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE

- Rating : As shown on drawings

- Voltage Input : 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230

volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) as drawings

- Voltage Output : 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230

volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) as drawings

- Input Frequency : 60 Hz +/- 1 Hz

- Output Frequency : 60 Hz +/- 1 Hz

- Steady State Output Voltage : 400 (or 230) VAC as drawings) +/-

5%

- Output Wave : Sine wave, with approximately

10% distortion

: into resistive load, 5% distortion

optional

- Power Factor : 0.75 lag to 0.90 lead

- Inverter Efficiency : 80% during emergency run

- Overload Capability : 130% for 5 minutes

- Ambient Temperature Limits : 0° C to 49° C (32°F to 120°F)

- MTBF : In excess of 20,000 hours

- Switching : Automatic by-pass upon inverter

failure

- Minimum Load : 10%


______________________________________________________________________

16610-6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. The uninterruptible power supply system shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer’s drawings, instructions, and recommendations.

B. All electrical wiring and methods shall conform to the requirements of

Section 16050 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

3.2 TESTING:

A. The completed installation shall be tested in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Testing shall be conducted by the

representatives of the manufacturer. The Client and the Engineer shall be

notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the test.

Certified copies of test procedures and results shall be forwarded to the

Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

______________________________________________________________________

16670 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work consist of furnishing and installation of a complete lightning

protection system conforming to as shown on the drawings and specified

herein.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODE :

BS 6651

SASO 16600 - 2 05

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data for each type of product specified herein.

B. Material Samples.

C. Shop Drawings.

D. Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer of the lightning protection

system has had suitable and adequate experience installing other lightning

protection systems, and is capable of installing the system specified

herein.

. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection system with the installation

of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring,

supporting structures and building materials, and metal components

requiring interface with lightning protection systems.

B. Complete coordination shall be required with structural works .


A. Materials and workmanship shall comply with applicable requirements of

BS 6651 and SASO

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL:

A. Lightning protection system shall be air terminal type and shall conform to

the applicable requirements of BS 6651 .


______________________________________________________________________

16670 -2

B. Air Termination System:

No part of the roof within the air termination network should be more

than five meters from a conductor.Roof conductor shall be bare copper

tape of size as shown on drawings.

Roof conductors shall be installed within 0.5 m of the roof perimeter or

on top of parapet. All metal equipment mounted on the roof (e.g. Air

conditioning equipment, exhaust fans…) shall be bonded to the air

termination system.

Air Terminals

Air terminals shall be copper , and shall be a minimum of 500-mm long

15-mm diameter, and taper pointed.

Down Conductor System

All metal building structures (e.g. shading structures, metal window

frames) shall be bonded to the down conductor system.

There shall be a minimum of two down conductors, with at least one

down conductor for each 20 m of building perimeter. Each down

conductor shall terminate in an earthing rod or plate and provided with a

test link.

C. Earth Termination System

Earth rods

Earth rods shall be inch minimum diameter by -feet long, copper

clad steel , stainless steel or copperbonded steel.

Unless specific site conditions indicate otherwise, copperbonded steel rods

shall be preferred ,constructed of low carbon steel with tensile strength of

at least 600N/mm2. Copper cladding shall be 99.9 % electrolytic copper,

molecularly bonded to the steel, to a thickness of 0.25 mm.

Threads shall be rolled. Machined threads or threads in which the steel

core is exposed shall be rejected. Rods shall be inspected and rejected if

there is any indication of separation between steel core and copper

cladding.

Rod couplings shall be high copper alloy and shall completely cover the

thread when in position.

Earthing conductors shall be connected to earth rods with a clamp

consisting of high copper alloy with phosphor bronze screw.

Earth rods shall be installed close to the building. In rocky soils they shall

be installed in predrilled holes, with conducting material such as bentonite

packed down around them. Where it is necessary to have several rods in

parallel to achieve the desired resistance level, the distance between rods

shall be not less than their length or 2 metres minimum.


______________________________________________________________________

16670 -3

Earth Plate - solid copper

Solid copper Earth plates shall be minimum 600 x 600 x 1.5 mm,

constructed of high purity copper.

Earth plate - lattice copper, minimum thickness 3 mm may be used as an

alternative.

Earthing Service Manhole

The main connection to the earth rod system shall be in an earthing

service manhole. The manhole may be constructed of concrete or clay

pipe with concrete, galvanized steel or cast iron cover plate. In all cases

the device must be sufficiently strong to sustain traffic load in the location

selected. The manhole, or inspection pit shall be large enough to permit an

earth bar with multiple earth connections to be fitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Air terminals:

1. Air terminals shall be base-mounted as shown on the drawings in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shop

drawings.

B. Conductors or Tapes:

1. Roof conductors shall be installed and coursed where applicable.

2. No bends along the conductor shall be angled at less than 90

degrees and a radius shall not be less than 20 cms.

C. Bonding or Metallic Bodies:

1. All metal parts of the building or equipment exposed to lightning

strike or within 180 cms. of the lightning protection grid shall be

bonded to the grid by approved type of bolted connectors.

3.2 TEST:

A. Resistance of the Earth termination system to ground shall be less than 10

Ohms. Where the system consists of several rods or plates (one for each

down conductor) the resistance of each shall be less than ten times the

total number of rods or plates.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

_______________________________________________________________________

-

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, apply to work of this

Section.

Bill of quantities

Related section

1. all section related to fire alarm interface with other system

(CCTV, HVAC, Elevators……etc)

2. Grounding

3. Conduit and fitting

4. Basic materials and methods

5. Cable trays

6. Wires and cables

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope shall include but not limited to the following

Supply system equipments according to approved list of materials

Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment condition

Install system devices according to system specification

Start up system

Programming system according to required function and specification

Test and commission all system according to related specification

documents

Put into operation all system components

Integrate all other system with fire alarm systems

Provide all other services as indicated in this specification

Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for obtaining

approval from authorities having jurisdiction

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The fire alarm system shall have Main Fire Alarm Central Panel MFACP at

Security Room.

There is separate network between all fire panels in ring configuration for

redundancy.

The system shall provide manual means of alarm initiation at every exit from

every level.

The system shall provide automatic initiation using intelligent addressable

detectors


_______________________________________________________________________

-

The system shall be interfaced to electromechanical system such as HVAC,

Fire fighting and Elevator.

The provided fire alarm system shall be suitable for the functions of the

premises as provided by the local fire authority and by the relevant

international codes. Alarm shall be selective using audiovisual alarm. Alarm

shall be also circuit, point and software defined for group annunciation.

Wiring and devices shall be supervised with all operations as described in

Specifications.

Extent of Work: The extent of work of the fire alarm system is indicated in the

documents (Drawings, single line diagram, B.O.Q, etc.). Work shall include all

labor, equipment and services to furnish and install a complete system.

1.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The fire alarm system shall consist of the following components:

- Intelligent addressable main Fire Alarm Control Panels (MFACP) with printer with auto dialer

- Intelligent addressable Fire alarm control panels (FACP) - Intelligent Addressable Manual pull station. - Intelligent addressable detectors – smoke type - Intelligent addressable detectors – heat type - Intelligent addressable detectors – multi sensor - Intelligent photo smoke detector with sounder base. - Fire alarm sounder with flashing beacon - Mounted flashing strobe. - Repeater panel (RFACP) - Conventional heat detector - Beam detector transmitter - Beam detector receiver. - Fire men's telephone jack - Control modules - Monitor module - GDT: graphical display terminal with GUI - Network including conduit cabling , pull boxes and all necessary

accessories

1.5 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

Equipment and installations shall be performed in strict accordance with the

following Local Standard and International Codes:


_______________________________________________________________________

-

National Fire Protection Association Standards

NFPA No.:

72A Local Protective Signaling Systems

72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems

72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems

72D Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems

72E Automatic Fire Detectors

72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems

72H Testing Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems

101 Life Safety Code

International Electro-technical Commission

IEC No.:

60331 Tests for Electric Cables under Fire Conditions – Circuit integrity

60754 Tests on Gases Evolved During Combustion of Material From

Cables.

61034 Measurement of Smoke Density of Cables Burring Under Defined

Conditions.

60228 Conductors of Insolated Cables.

60332 Tests on Electric Cables under Fire Conditions.

British Standard Specifications

BS No

6387 Specification for Performance Requirements for Cables Required

Maintaining Circuit Integrity Under Fire Conditions.

Local Standards:

Saudi Civil Defense Regulation and Approval

1.6 SUBMITTALS

System installer shall submit the following in accordance with Conditions of

the Contract and Division-1 Specification Sections:

1.6.1 General: System installer shall submit complete sets of documentation as stated

by the contract conditions indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number,

manufacturer's names, photos and/or catalog data sheets for all items to ensure

compliance with these specifications. This documentation shall be subject to

approval and no equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all

equipment and devices, which are shown on Drawings.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

1.6.2 Shop Drawings: System installer shall submit shop drawings showing

equipment/device locations, all boxes, back boxes (types, sizes) and connecting

wiring of entire fire alarm system including riser diagrams.

1.6.3 Product Data: System installer shall submit manufacturer's technical product

data, including specifications and installations for each type of fire alarm system

equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, operation and

maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

1.6.4 Maintenance Data: System installer shall submit maintenance data and parts

lists for each type of fire alarm equipment installed including furnished specialties

and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in

maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division-1 and other

relevant documentation.

1.6.5 Instruction Manuals: The System installer shall provide with the assistance of

the equipment manufacturer and its authorized, local representative complete

operating instructions, pertinent system orientation documents and system

service, testing, and alarm documentation in the fire control area (Fire Alarm

Control Panel) for the permanent use of the Employer and the Fire Department.


The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and

standards.

1.7.1 Manufacture Qualifications: Manufacturing firms should be regularly

engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems of type, size and electrical

characteristics and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar

services for not less than 5 years.

1.7.2 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factory-

authorized sale and service representative to perform the work of this section.

Installer shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience in

projects with fire alarm systems similar to those required for this project.

1.7.3 Training: Equipment's manufacturer and his authorized, local representative

shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to

selected Employer's personnel for at least two weeks.

1.7 Coordination

1. all interface protocols and required hardware and software needed to

submit and satisfy system operation shall be part of this contact 2. Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Public Address system ,

HVAC , Elevators , smoke managements and fire fighting systems


_______________________________________________________________________

-

and BMS

1.8 Spare Parts and Extra Material

The system shall have spare parts not limited to:

- 2 % of fire alarm detector

- 2 % of manual pull station

PART 2 PRODUCTS

All equipment and materials shall be designed to operate and provide maximum

continuous performance at temperature and humidity of the project location.

Provisions should be inherently provided in the equipment to protect them from

reduction in performance or damage at peak climatic conditions.

The system shall be complete, electrically supervised multiplex style fire

detection with intelligent analogue alarm initiation to device addressable and

annunciated as described and shown on drawings.

The system shall be extendable in capacity.

The system shall be based on a central architectural concept.

Devices connected to the signal line circuits shall be individually identifiable

at the control panel for alarm and trouble identification. Detectors shall be

monitored for sensitivity settings from the control panel and logged for

changes in sensitivity indicating need for changing.

The system shall include a self-diagnostic capability.

2.1 SYSTEM OF OPERATION

Alarm shall be initiated from an individual alarm initiating circuit(s),

device(s), manual switches, addressable device(s) and software defined group

of addressable devices reporting the alarm condition at the MFACP/FACP

equipment. This condition shall operate the alarms and counter measures.

Fire alarm signals shall be initiated automatically from the FACP and

transmitted to selected device circuits or to all of them. This condition will

sound an alarm signal together with a flashing LED.

Pressing the acknowledge key at the FACP shall silence the alarm sounders

and cause the LED to light continuously during the alarm condition. This

shall be repeated for any subsequent alarm condition.

All zones are manually re-settable from the MFACP/FACP after initiating

devices are restored to normal

One main Graphic User Interface (GUI) located in the Main Fire Station

shall control and monitor all fire alarm system points of the existing system


_______________________________________________________________________

-

and the new system specified herein. It shall have full control and monitoring

of the combined systems (existing + new) through 2-way communication. It

shall be possible to connect multiple GUI in the network if desired by the

Client to have backup.

Basics alarm performance requirement if activation fire alarm initiating from

devices (detectors, switches fire protection device through monitoring

modules) shall cause the following indication and action:

1- Activation of positive alarm sequencel at MFACP/FACP

a. Local alarm in the control panel for the period of a

Programmable time T1.

b. During this delay time (T1), a local (staff) alarm (stage 1)

Only is to be given. If the alarm is not acknowledged

Before timer T1 runs out , this is to result in notification-

Appliance operation (stage 2)

c. If the alarm is acknowledged while T1 is still running, T1 is

To be reset and a Programmable timer T2 is to be started.

T2 is to delay the notification- appliance operation (stage

2) Further, and so provide time for human Investigation of

The alarm cause.

d. If no reset action takes place before T2 runs out, notification-

Appliance Operation (stage 2) is to be given.

e- Display a drawing of the floor, location of fire and instructions to be

followed on GDT (graphical display terminal) with GUI (graphical

user interface).

2. Notification-appliance operation (stage 2).

a. Evacuation signal in zone of incident and adjacent zones;

Alert signal in remaining parts of building.

b. Evacuation signal throughout the building.

c. Activation of visual strobes.

3. Identification at the MFACP/FACP and the remote annuncitor(s) of the

Zone origination the alarm

4. Identification at the MFACP /FACP and the remote annunciator(s) of the

location and the type of device originating the alarm.

5. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Recall of elevators.

7. CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event.

8. Use PA system to broadcast the fire alarm evacuation/alert signals.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

9. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when

alarm was initiated.

10. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm

was initiated.

11. Recording of the event by the system printer.

The fire alarm system shall comprise of components capable of providing the

following features when appropriate and specified:

- All sectors alarm notification - Private alarm notification - Occupied/unoccupied notification - Voice alarm notification - AC shut down in case of fire - Smoke evacuation operation in case of fire - Fire fighting monitor

Private Alarm Notification: When allowed, the public alarm must provide

programmable time delay to allow time for investigation. The private alarm

must be audible and visual.

IF no response is made at the FACP within a set time, the public alarm must

sound, keyed override must be provided.

Occupied/Unoccupied Notification: When appropriate, the FACP must

provide an “OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED” control to allow the disabling of portions

of the public alarm to reduce panic hazard.

Voice Alarm Notification: The audible portion of the public alarm must be

voice and signals alarm using speakers & sirens.

HVAC Interface: The fire alarm system shall generate the necessary control

function to stop required HVAC equipment and operate other HVAC equipment

which keeps high pressure inside the path of escaping ladder.

Generator Room Procedure: In case of fire inside generator room, fire alarm

panel shall send a signal to solenoid valve to shut down fuel through a control

module and another control module to shut down the generator it self. Fire Fighting Monitoring: The fire alarm system shall monitor the flow and tamper switches of the fire protection Sprinkler system (zone valves) and give alarm when detect flow of water. The flow switch monitor module shall have a delay time to compensate for water surged without sending an alarm. The monitor module shall monitor the fire pumps (standby – fault - run).


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Fire alarm shall monitor also clean agent system (CO2 or FM 200) using three monitor module to connect fire fighting panel with fire alarm panel to monitor ( trouble, first alarm , supervisor) the fire fighting shall be double knock system zone with two zones. Electrical power shut signals shall be initiated according to the zone under fire. Sound system Interface: Fire alarm system shall supervise and control public address system using Monitor and Control modules for monitoring the operation feedback function of public address and control relay module to activate the digital pre-recorded massage module to announce the pre-recorded evacuation 3 messages (one fire and two warning for fire floor up and down level)

2.2 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

The fire alarm system shall consist of the following:

- Intelligent addressable main Fire Alarm Control Panels (MFACP) with printer with auto dialer

- Intelligent addressable Fire alarm control panels (FACP). - Intelligent Addressable Manual pull station. - Intelligent addressable detectors – smoke type - Intelligent addressable detectors – heat type - Intelligent addressable detectors – multi sensor - Intelligent Addressable photo smoke detector with sounder base. - Fire alarm sounder with flashing beacon. - Mounted flashing strobe. - Repeater panel(RFACP) - Conventional heat detector. - Beam detector transmitter. - Beam detector receiver. - Fire man's telephone jack. - Control modules. - Monitor module. - GDT: graphical display terminal. - Network including conduit cabling, pull boxes and all necessary

accessories. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP): The Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP) shall have intelligent addressable with no of loops as indicated on drawings

- Interfacing and Communication Circuits

- System Printer

- Emergency Power `Supply and Batteries.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

The Central Processing Unit (CPU):

CPU shall be programmable; intelligent micro-processor based and includes

programs, which support all functions of the fire alarm system.

CPU shall also include all necessary interfacing circuits, which enable it to

communicate with another FACP and addressable and non-addressable

devices and equipment pertaining to the fire alarm system as described in the

previous Clauses.

Event initiating functions shall be performed in accordance with stored logic

(firmware) in a non-volatile memory (PROM or EPROM).

The CPU shall also perform all communication-oriented tasks on digital error free

concept using addressable routines to manage all addressable devices.

The software programs, which operates and manage the system shall be

resident and have complete immunity against noise, interference and supply

fluctuations and failure. This software shall also be protected against intended

or by-mistake alterations.

All supervisory and trouble functions shall also be supported by the program

which runs the system including reporting routines which display all necessary

information and alarms.

Special Diagnostic program shall also monitor all vital functions such as

communication and data processing cycles of operation and run diagnostic

routines to detect errors and report it.

The MFACP shall have a capacity which can be able to handle all the devices

with 15% spare for each signaling line circuit.

The fire alarm control panel MFACP shall have the following features:

- Modular system to allow future extension

- LCD of minimum 80 character alphanumeric

- Automatic day and night sensitivity

- Automatic drift compensation

- Dirt detector reporting

- Ground fault detection

- Internal self diagnosis

- Minimum of 1000 history events


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Trouble Signals: Trouble due to the following faulty events shall activate

audio-visual display on the MFACP:

- Power and battery failure or loss

- Open or grounded Cable network, which interconnects devices and system

components

- Communication failure

- System software and hardware failure

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)

- All requirement specified in MFACP apply to fire alarm control panels

FACP.

- Capable of operating the system on a stand-alone basis

- Each panel maintains the statues and control of its own dedicated circuit

points

- The only difference between an MFACP and FACP is it an FACP does

not have any monitoring and controlling activity at other locations.

System Printer:

A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.

B. The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in

the main MFAC enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED,

other messages, such as a trouble, are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is

to receive power from the system power supply and shall operate via battery

back up if ac mains are lost.

C. The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the

system and shall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and

date. The printer is to be standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to

use standard pin-feed paper. The printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet

suitable for placement on a desktop or table. The printer shall communicate with

the control panel using an interface complying with Electrical Industries

Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.

D. The event and status printer shall be a 9 pin, impact, dot-matrix printer with a

minimum print speed of 200 characters per second at 10 characters per inch.

Printer parameters shall be set up with a menu drive program in the printer. The

serial cable connecting the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Printer shall be

supervised. The serial printer shall support short haul modems or Fiber-Optics

modules. The printers shall list the time, date, type, and user defined message for

each event printed. It shall be possible to support multiple printers per CPU. It

shall be possible to define which event types are sent to the printer(s) including


_______________________________________________________________________

-

alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor, and service groups.

Emergency Power Supply: The system shall be equipped with an Emergency

Power Supply system capable of supplying the necessary power of 12/24

VDC to run the fire alarm system for 24 hours on stand-by mode and for 30

minutes in case of alarm state. The emergency power supply shall include

battery of sufficient capacity, battery charger and non break change over

circuitry. Battery calculation sheet must be submitted by system installer.

Automatic Telephone Dialer (ATD): ATD shall provide the system with

automatic ability to dial a remote fire fighting location and deliver pre-

recorded emergency message through a dedicated line. Message length shall

be of four (4) minutes at least. Telephone dialer shall have the ability to store

and dial 4 different telephone numbers. Telephone dialer shall provide

message test speaker and a message test switch. The dialer shall be provided

with battery backup operation and programming facility.

Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Manual Stations shall be

documented compatible with control equipment. They shall be (break glass).

Manual station with normally open, single-pole alarm contacts

Each break glass plate shall include operating instructions in both Arabic and

English.

The addressable manual station shall contain addressable circuitry to

communicate with the FACP and shall report alarm or trouble status changes.

Addressable Intelligent Smoke (Photo) Detectors: Detectors shall be

documented compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected.

The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel

through the same supervised signaling detection loop.

To minimize nuisance alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression

techniques shall be employed as well as an insect screen. All detector designs

shall provide full solid-state construction and compatibility with other fire

alarm detection loop devices, (smoke detector, pull stations, etc.).

Each detector base or the detector itself shall have a flashing status indicating

LED for visual supervision. When the detector is activated, the flashing LED

will latch on steady and at full brilliance until it is reset by the reset switch,

from the control panel.

Detector has an on-board microprocessor that evaluates its Photoelectric

light scattering chamber activity and makes an

Intelligent decision based on light obscuration history as to whether an alarm

condition is present.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Detectors shall be plug-in lockable with separate base, including all addressable

circuitry.

The detector shall provide indication of the analog value corresponding to

detection of fire (smoke) to the FACP. The detectors shall be continually

monitored to detect any change in sensitivity due to dirt or environmental

conditions, which could be corrected from the control panel within certain limits.

The smoke sensitivity range 0.3%: 3.7% per foot and the air velocity range 0-

610 m/min

Detectors shall be intelligent microprocessor controlled and connected with

two wires class A type.

The detectors shall be sensitive to visible and invisible products of combustion.

Addressable Intelligent Heat Detectors

Detectors shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to

which it is connected. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from

the fire alarm panel through the same supervised signaling detection loop.









Thermal Detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 58°C and

have rate-of-rise element rated at 9.4°C per minute. It shall connect via two

wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling line circuit

The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions

caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to

the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements.

Addressable Intelligent multi sensor (smoke/heat) Detectors

Detectors shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to

which it is connected. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from

the fire alarm panel through the same supervised signaling detection loop.





_______________________________________________________________________

-






Multi sensors combine smoke and thermal detection

The detector shall provide indication of the analog value corresponding to

detection of fire (smoke//thermal ) to the FACP. The detectors shall be

continually monitored to detect any change in sensitivity due to dirt or

environmental conditions, which could be corrected from the control panel within

certain limits.

The smoke sensitivity range 0.3%: 3.7% per foot and the air velocity range 0-

610 m/min

The thermal range can be programmed from FACP as fixed temperature at 135o

F (57.2o C) or rate of raise at 15

o F (8.3

o C)

Electronic Horn with Strobe Light: The horn shall be electronic and it has

SPL up to 95 dBA or higher with strobe light flasher type with 15/75 candela

CD (ADA). The strobe light shall be wall or ceiling mounted.

Remote LCD Annunciator (repeater RFACP): LCD Annunciator allows you

to monitor and control compatible Fire Alarm Control Panels from anywhere

within your facility

Remote LCD shall be meet this specification:

80-character (4 x 20) backlit LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

Six common system status lights: Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow), Trouble

(yellow), Monitor (yellow), AC On (green), and Ground Fault (yellow)

Four system hotkeys for Ack, Silence, Reset, and Lamp Test

Access-controlled Silence and Reset hotkeys – require the key switch to be in the

“enable” position

Four sets of scroll keys for Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor

Conventional heat Detectors (Rate of Rise)

Detectors shall be two wires to connect to monitor module at parking area

the detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel

through monitor module

Heat detectors are used where property protection is desired and where life safety

protection is not required or is performed by other equipment


_______________________________________________________________________

-

The addition of rate-of-rise heat detector operation provides forms of heat

detection depend on fluctuate more quickly


LED for visual supervision. When the detector is activated

Monitoring Modules (MM) This device is intended for addressable

communication with non-addressable devices (fire protection etc.). They will

be installed in remote locations of devices or in tenant area to be supervised

by FACP on digital bases.

Control Modules (CM): The function of the control module is to provide

command signal to equipment of other system that should act in case of fire

Commands shall be relayed to the control module from the FACP through an

addressable and supervised communication link as a slave to it.

Interfacing circuits shall be included which generate the required actions

command signals in response to received information (i.e. relay modules).

Command signal shall be passive (i.e. open/close) contacts of sufficient rating

and shall be electrically isolated from the system.

Back Boxes: All fire alarm devices shall be mounted with galvanized steel

back boxes with all accessories.

Wiring: The wiring which interconnects detectors and devices with control

equipment shall be fire resistant low smoke zero halogen twisted pair and

shielded, 1.5 mm2 copper (solid) cables, constituting supervised class A circuit

(loops). Cross section area of wiring of high current devices such as speakers or

DC cables should not be less than 2 mm2 and should not cause more than 5%

voltage drop. All wiring shall be color coded and labeled. Pull and Junction boxes

shall be red colored and include wiring identification numbering.

Wiring system shall include all wires and cables necessary for complete fire alarm

system. It will interconnect all equipment and devices as described in specifications

and drawings. This wiring includes also the supervisory and control circuits

interconnecting the system with other systems as described before.

Connection with clean earthling is a part of the fire cabling.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm system shall be

installed. System installer shall not proceed with work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS

Install wiring, raceways or conduits and electrical boxes and fittings in

accordance with Section 16120 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"

Clauses "Raceways", "Wires and Cables" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings"

for wiring of non-power limited circuits.

Install wiring of power-limited circuits in raceways or conduits or exposed on

wall or ceiling where properly protected. Use conduit for runs through

floors or in shaft ways to height of 2.30 m above floor.

Install wires and cables without splices. Make connections at terminal strips

in cabinets or at equipment terminals. Make soldered splices in electronic

circuits in control cabinets.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's

written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the

greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise

pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet.

Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as

indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division Section

"Grounding and Bonding."

D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits,

minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode

returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide -ohm

ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground

resistance.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the

Contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

The equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to its

authorized, local representative to:

- Coordinate the selection of system equipment

- Generate the system software programming

- Supervise the installation of the complete fire alarm system

- Perform a complete functional test of the system

- Submit a written report to the Contractor attesting the proper operation of

the completed system.

Install fire alarm system as indicated, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of

local standards of installation.

Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color code

wiring and install per manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram.

Provide extra wiring or extra power supplies required to fulfill any

requirement for extra power such as in case of strobe lights. In addition,

provide extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops, which make

device, operate beyond voltage limits for which it was designed. Determine

above with manufacturer's representative while equipment is being installed.


3.5.1 Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under manufacturer's

supervision. Run wiring to main terminal cabinet located adjacent to main

fire alarm panel. Complete connections from this cabinet to panel utilizing

manufacturer's technicians.

3.5.2 System Test and Approval: System installer shall submit shop drawings for

function and operation only, pre-approved by authority having local jurisdiction.

Prior to final acceptance of system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence

of the Contractor, Employer's representative test each sensing or detection

and alarm device.

3.6 TRAINING

Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall provide,

in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to selected

Employer’s personnel for two weeks.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

3.7 WARRANTY

The FACP shall have a 2-year manufacturers warranty against product

defects. This warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor shall

be warranted for a period of 1 year or as indicated elsewhere in this

specification. Manufactures that do not provide a standard 2-year warranty,

must provide an extended warranty with their bid package.

END OF SECTION

SECTION ACCESS CARD CONTROL SYSTEM

________________________________________________________________________

-

PART GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,

including General Conditions, Conditions of Particular

Application and Division Specification Sections, apply

to work of this Section.

Bill of quantities

Related section

. All sections related to access control with other

systems (CCTV , BMS , fire alarm system)

. Earthing System section

. Conduit and fitting section

. Cable trays section

. Wires and cables section

SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of the work shall include but not limited to the

following

Supply system equipments according to approved list of

materials

Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment

condition


Start up system

Programming system according to required functions and

specification

Test and commission all system according to related

specification documents


Integrate all other system with access control system


Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for

obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction

. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The Access Control systems is a security system, which shall

control access in the parking , entrance, exit areas and give

alarm in case of unauthorized activities in order to achieve

maximum-security for the project.


________________________________________________________________________

-

The work shall cover all equipment, systems and power cable

networks, workmanship, software, programming, testing,

commissioning and all related activities.

The supplier/contractor is fully responsible for the delivery and

installation of totally integrated system in case of having multi

vendor equipment and interfacing between the different

components of the system and the other related systems.

The scope includes the interfacing and connection with the,

CCTV system, BMS, Fire alarm systems and any other related

systems.

The system shall use unified network IP Ethernet to connect

between main server and intelligent control panels using TCP/IP

protocols

The system shall be expandable for future extension of the

facility.

. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

The access control system shall consist of the following:

- Main Redundant access control server

- PC and connections

- Intelligent door control equipment

- Proximity card reader

- Electric strike /electromagnetic lock

- Printer

- Door sensor (magnetic contact)

- Card issuing unit.

- Identification cards

- Network for the system

- Badging Unit with camera

. REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the

drawings, specifications and stipulations of the KSA Codes, the

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), International

Electrical Commission (IEC), the Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

Listing.

Equipment and installations shall comply with the latest revision

of the current provisions of the following codes and standards:


________________________________________________________________________

-

- Standards of local authorities having jurisdiction

- Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying

with applicable requirements of NFPA "National Electrical

Code"

- CCIR Compliance: Comply with the relevant CCIR standards

or approved equal

- UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL and UL

A

- IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirement

standards pertaining to system and wiring

An equal standard could be accepted, which should be listed in detail

as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in

detail together with their equivalent IEC, CCIR, NFPA and UL. A

copy of the approved alternative standard shall be available for

submittal upon request, free of charge.

. SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the

Contract and Division Specification Sections:

. . General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation

indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer's

names, photographs and/or catalog data sheets for all items to

ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be

subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be

ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which

are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of Quantities.

. . Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and

device locations and connecting wiring of entire system,

including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be

limited to, the following:

- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and

the size, type and number of all conductors including signal

strengths and cable loss

- Pin to pin connection diagram

- Large scale drawing of the main address equipment

- Large scale drawing of control panels, and other devices

- Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and signal

strengths of the different equipment, the size of wiring and

signal loss.


________________________________________________________________________

-

- Provide installation instructions and installation manuals

- Complete description and data including UL listing, or

equivalent, for all system components

- Complete sequence of operations and functions of the

system

- Complete system wiring diagrams for components and

interfaces to equipment provided by others

- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local

representative responsible for installation coordination and

service

. . Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including specifications and installations for each type of the

equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams

and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the

maintenance manual.

. . Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

each type of the system equipment installed, including furnished

specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and

shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with

requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.

. QUALITY ASSURANCE

. . Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the security

system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of the system of

type, size and characteristics similar to those required for the project

and whose products have been in satisfactory service in similar

projects for not less than five ( ) years.

. . Installer Qualifications:

The installer firm shall have at least five ( ) years of successful

installation experience of the security systems similar to that

required for the project.

. COORDINATION

Coordinate layout and installation of system components

and suspension system with other construction that penetrate ceiling or is supported by them , including light fixture , HVAC equipments, partition assemblies

The contractor shall be responsible for coordination with other systems under this contract and the contractor


________________________________________________________________________

-

involved works

SPARE PARTS

The Contractor shall provide the following:

- No. of % Proximity card reader

- No. of Door Sensor (magnetic contact)

- No. of Proximity card

- No. of Electromagnetic door lock

PART PRODUCTS

GENERAL

The Access Card Control systems, which shall control access to

parking area and entrance/exit to give alarm in case of

unauthorized or any intrusion activities in order to achieve

maximum-security in the selected project areas Alarm shall be set

also in case of leaving the door open more than an adjustable

time.

The access control shall allow only those who are holding valid

cards, in accordance with a pre-determined security scheme to enter

the controlled areas.

The system will achieve maximum security in the project and allow

monitoring the activities in the covered areas through the Central

Control Equipment.

The system shall be programmed allowing access to areas during

specified periods according to pre-programmed security scheme.

The system shall permit entry only when valid access cards are

presented to a card-reader.

Every card shall have unique pre-programmed code.

Access Control System consists of network distributed intelligent

door controllers connected to Main Access Control server

equipment and access control redundant.

Door controllers shall be dedicated to each door and shall be

connected with the Proximity card reader, the electrical door

lock and the door sensor.


________________________________________________________________________

-

Communication of door controllers shall be done using a

dedicated network for the system.

This means using network type intelligent door controllers that

work together as one system (stand alone), having sustained

operation in case of failure of the Central Control equipment.

Programming and monitoring shall be done using a dedicated PC.

Full time/date, key/cardholder number based access control

continues, using the intelligence in the local controllers even if

the Central Control equipment is off line.

Any unauthorized attempt shall trigger alarm on the PC of the

system.

The main features are as follows:

- PC-based programming

- Ability to monitor multiple locations

- Ability to integrate multiple reader technologies

- Remote upload/download control

- Stand-alone intelligent card readers/controllers

- Computerized video imaging (Photo ID)

- Card Issuing system

- Employee Time Attendance

System Operation: The access control system shall be provided

to manage and control access of personnel to areas in accordance

with a pre-determined security scheme.

Proximity cards shall be used to activate Proximity card readers

connected to intelligent door controllers to give command to

door locks or vehicle gates to open and elevator microprocessor

to access the authorized floor according to access level.

This shall release the locking mechanism (electromagnetic lock

or electric strike) and allow entry. Whenever a door, equipped

with the system, is closed, it shall also be locked. The Central

Control Equipment shall constantly monitor the data concerning

all door events and status of all secured doors such as

(open/close) and the status of all locks (locked/unlocked).

The system shall be supplied via the UPS. The door locks shall

be released in case of system power failure.


________________________________________________________________________

-

The cards shall include cardholder data and his colored photo.

All data (cardholder ID, time of entering and exit, etc)

corresponding to access activities and emergency release shall be

recorded.

Central Control Equipment shall be used to program, operate,

control and produce reports using a dedicated printer.

Dedicated network shall be used to control communication.

PC connected on the dedicated network shall communicate with

the Central Control for management and reporting.

Special operating software under windows shall be used execute

all functions of the system.

Card issuing unit shall be programmed and controlled through

the Central Control Equipment and the PCs according to data

extracted from the database of the employees saved on the PCs.

Door controllers shall be connected to the Proximity card readers

and the doors shall be opened manually by exit push button

beside operator.

The system shall be work with antipass back function

Alarm shall be set in several cases, in case of trial from

unauthorized person to open a door, trial from a person to open

a door not the authorization time or days.

Fault in any of the system component, power failure, etc... Shall

report fault alarm.

The system shall be capable saving events for one year.

The system should be fully redundant and self-diagnostic.

Emergency supply shall run the system with appropriate UPS.

The system includes connection, hardware and software

interfacing and with the BMS, fire alarm systems, CCTV system,

security system and any other related systems.

The system shall be open ended and expandable for future

extension of the facility.


________________________________________________________________________

-

Equipment and Materials

- Main Redundant access control server with work station

- Network for the system

- Intelligent door control equipment

- Proximity card reader

- Electrical door lock

- Printer

- Door sensor (Magnetic Contact)

- Card issuing unit.

- Identification cards

The Central Processing Unit (CPU)- Main Access Control Server:

CPU shall be programmable, support all functions of the AC

system.

CPU shall also include all necessary interfacing circuits, which

enable it to communicate with devices and equipment pertaining

to the system with IP connectivity as described in this

specification.

The software programs, which operates and manage the system

shall be resident and have complete immunity against interference

and supply fluctuations. This software shall be also protected

against unauthorized intended or by-mistake alterations.

All supervisory and trouble functions shall also be supported by

the program which runs the system including reporting routines

which display all necessary information and alarms.

The CPU shall monitor the state of all the doors and set alarm in

case of unlocked door or unclosed door.

Special Diagnostic program shall also monitor all vital functions

such as communication and data processing cycles of operation

and run diagnostic routines to detect errors and report it.

The communication with the PC, Proximity card readers, door

controllers, the BMS systems and all other system devices shall

be done through the appropriate dedicated data network and

built in communication software.

System Printer: A desktop printer shall provide hard copies for

record of all the system activities in details. Print outs shall

contain the following information:


________________________________________________________________________

-

- Unscheduled events

- Normal events

- Operator commands and operator definition

- All alarms

- Time Attendance

- Faults and supervisory conditions

Print outs shall include the time of event, date and clear

description.

Emergency Power Supply: The system shall be equipped with

an Emergency Power Supply capable of supplying the necessary

power to run system for hours the emergency power supply

shall include battery of sufficient capacity, battery charger and no

break change over circuitry.

Software: Master program operating the system shall be under

windows using dedicated PC. The operating system shall include

report generation, printing and self-diagnostic capability. It shall

starts up, operate, control and check for errors in the integrated

system. The requirements of the software shall include but is not

limited to the following:

- Operating under windows, multi tasking environment

- Real time data exchange

- Interface with the other systems

- Install the system.

- Start up, manage and control the system functions and

activities.

- Control all the constituents as one unit and separately.

- Identify every unit for control and other purposes

- Database and search facilities.

- Up to assignable ID card No. expandable to be

- Up to doors shall be controlled

- Attendance time recording

- File creation generator for host connection

- Blocking of unauthorized repeated access

- Print out data reports.

- Employee time attendance

PC: The minimum requirements of the PC shall be latest version

including MB D.D. RAM, GB HD, Video capture camera

and card, communication and interface cards, etc.., or according

to the manufacturer’s requirements.

Operating software to allow it to manage all the system activities

Card Issuing Unit: This unit shall handle the adopted type of the

proximity cards and shall provide non erasable, color printing


________________________________________________________________________

-

technique including ID data such as code numbers, names,

occupation, colored photo etc.. The printing shall be on a double

side.

The unit shall be linked to the system through data network to

import the printing data from the database saved on the PC.

Intelligent Door Controller: Door control equipment shall be

used to communicate with the computer digitally in order to

relay the captured data to the central control equipment and to

control the door lock. Every door controller shall have its own

battery and power supply to feed the internal electronics and the

electronic lock as well.

Door controller shall contain network interface RJ to be

connected via IP Ethernet network to main Access control server

Proximity Card Reader: It shall be located at locations

identified on the drawings and connected, controlled by the Door

control equipment

Communication signals to and from the Central Control

equipment shall operate and control visual indicators.

The Card readers shall be proximity type readers and fully

compatible with the system equipment, and shall communicate

digitally with the system.

Units shall be equipped with integral LED’s (red, yellow and green)

to provide visual confirmation of access granted/denied and

prompting of card entry.

The sensitivity of the card reader shall be of min 50 mm with

reading, verification and activation maximum time of 5 sec.

Unit enclosures shall be designed to be tamper resistant and

visible element of the system.

The proximity card readers shall be linked to the system through

data network taking into consideration distance limitations.

Card readers at entrances shall be programmed for employee's

time attendance in connection with employee's database

Electrical Door Lock: The electrical door lock shall be electronic

strike with technique so as to push and release the door latch and

dead latch if exists.

The electrical door lock shall be operating at low level voltage.

The operating voltage shall be equal to the same value of the


________________________________________________________________________

-

other component of the system. The electronic lock shall have

status monitoring by means of micro contact single or double

pole, double through to be connected to the door controller, so

as to know whether the lock is opened or closed. In case of fire

the lock shall release the door latch to open the door. The size

and model of the electric door lock must be coordinated with the

door supplies. The electrical door lock shall be normal open to

release the door lock in case of power failure.

Electromagnetic door lock

Main feature

Dual Voltage Selectable ( VDC or VDC)

Low Current Consumption

Reliable Holding Force

Hall Effect Sensor Monitoring Output

Green/Red LED Indication for EM Lock Status

Durable and Silence Operation

Cosmeticize Anodized Aluminum Casing

Surge & Spike Protection PCB

Compact Size for Small Doors,

Full Range of Optional Brackets

Zero Residual Magnetism Design

Technical specification

Voltage Input: VDC / VDC

Current Draw: V / mA; V / mA ( )

Holding Force: Up to lbs ( kg)

Hall Effect Contact: SPDT rated A at VDC

Anti-Rust Surface Treatment: Blue Zinc Plating

Operating Humidity: ~ (non condensing)

Exit Push Button: The PB-EXIT control button is a spring loaded, square

green exit button mounted on a stainless steel plate. The SPDT contacts

switch when the button is depressed and return when released.

This button can be used for momentary release of fail-safe or fail-

secure electric locks. It may also be used to input an exit signal

to the access control system. In some areas, local building or fire

safety regulations may limit the use of exit buttons

Door sensor: surface mount magnetic contacts are designed for use in doors

to monitor status of doors (open /close) it consist of two parts

Switch and Magnet

Contact Configuration: N.O.


________________________________________________________________________

-

Electrical Configuration: Normally Open/Normally close

Maximum Current: A

Maximum Voltage: VAC/DC or VAC/DC

Proximity Cards proximity card reader with suitable format

shall be match this technical specification

- Dual encoded cards

- Wigand format (W )

- Read range up to omm

- Long-life passive card for unlimited number of reads

Dye-sub card, print directly to the front or back of the

Card with a direct image or thermal transfer printer

-Marks for vertical and horizontal slot punch

Emergency Power Supply: AC system shall be supplied

through an emergency power supply. Emergency power supply

shall be capable to keep the system fully operating for hours.

Batteries and battery chargers shall be supplied with the system.

CABLE NETWORK

This section covers the work of the signal, power, control and

earth cabling systems required for the security system.

Wiring shall be installed inside PVC and steel conduits according

to situation. Routs running inside walls, ceilings and under floors

shall be in PVC. Exposed routs shall run in steel conduits (false

ceilings, etc).

The networks shall comply with the requirements of the

manufactures of the equipment.

Cables shall be in accordance with the relevant codes and

standards and shall meet the manufacturer's requirements.

Maximum number of wires to run inside one conduit shall allow

for extra wires to be added in the future.

Connection between wires shall be in accordance with same

standards as mentioned before.


________________________________________________________________________

-

Extra earth wires shall be provided in all distribution networks

starting from the main to the last terminal box before the

equipment outlets

Grounding Considerations: Grounding systems are normally an

integral part of the specific signal or communications cabling system

that they protect. In addition to helping protect personal and

equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper grounding system may

reduce EMI to inform the communications cabling system. Improper

grounding can produce induced voltages and those voltages can

disrupt other communications circuits.

The system shall include connection with the ground.

Distribution Boxes: Shall be in accordance with the

requirements of manufacturer(s) of the equipment.

All boxes shall be flush mounted and shall be fitted with anti

corrosion treated brass metal terminals. The boxes shall be

constructed in a way to facilitate maintenance.

All boxes shall be tamper proof by means of micro switch.

Covers shall be provided with the numbering scheme for all

wiring fitted to it and their destination, to facilitate service.

Cable Conduits: Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel

conduits (false ceilings, etc). Routs running inside walls, ceilings

and under floors shall be in rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in

steel conduits

Steel conduits shall be used for installations outside structure and

shall be painted with corrosive resistant paints. Clamps and

collars shall be used for installing conduits. Conduits shall be

inspected before installation to be free from any internal defects,

which may oppose or damage the cables during installation,

provided with metal wire to easily extend the cables.

Standard ELL (L) or TEE (T) conduit fittings shall be used instead

of bending conduits more than -mm diameters. A distance

separation of mm minimum shall be kept with other power

cables.

PART EXECUTION


________________________________________________________________________

-

EXAMINATION

Examine conditions, in the presence of the installer, for

compliance with the requirements and other conditions affecting

the performance of the AC system work.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

INSTALLATION

General: Install systems in accordance with codes and standards.

Install equipment and wiring in accordance with manufacturers

written instructions.

Appropriate measuring equipment shall be used (signal strength

voltage, current, etc.), for the network adjustment and trouble-

shooting.

Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway/conduit except

within consoles, desks and counters, and excepts in accessible

ceiling plenums where cable wiring method may be used. Cables

used in environmental air space shall be listed for this use.

Conceal cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors wherever

possible.

Surge Suppressors Installation: Where AC power-operated

devices are not protected against voltage transients by integral

surge suppressors, install surge suppressors at the devices' power

line terminals.

Wiring Method: Conceal cable in accessible ceilings, walls, and

floors wherever possible

Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train the conductors

to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use placing bars and

distribution spools.

Pulling Cables: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

pulling tensions Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed,

or abraded cable Do not splice cable between indicated

termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable

where damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface

contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer

Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers.


________________________________________________________________________

-

Make final connection to equipment in the presence of the

equipment manufacturer's representative.

Installation of the Equipment: The installation of this

equipment shall cover the following:

- Installation of all central & distributed equipments

- Internal signal, power, and control wiring

- External signal, power, and control wiring related to the

system

- Adjustment, testing and putting into operation of the

equipment, and other related equipment to achieve the

specified performance.

Installation of the Cable Network: The cable network shall

include the communication, power, and control cables required

for the whole system and shall be installed taking into

consideration the following:

- Laying the cables which shall connect the equipment

including the installation of connectors, junction boxes, and

matching/splitting units if exists.

- The installation shall include any necessary ground loop

corrector.

- Installation of signal cables and control wiring of the

equipment.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factory-

authorized service representatives to supervise the field assembly

and connection of components and system presetting, testing,

and adjustment.

Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled

and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

Presetting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all

components, wiring, and functions to verify they conform to

specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged

items with new items. Retest until achieving satisfactory

performance schedule.

Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system

tests to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of


________________________________________________________________________

-

system operation. Methodically test for proper system operation

in all functional modes.

CLEANING

Clean all system components. Use methods and materials

recommended by manufacturer.

ADJUSTMENT

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of date

of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting

the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up till

requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose without

additional cost.

. TRAINING

Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative

shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site

training to selected Employer’s personnel for two weeks.

. WARRANTY

The system shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against

product defects. This warranty shall be for material only.

Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period of year or

as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do

not provide a standard -year warranty, must provide an

extended warranty with their bid package.

END OF SECTION

SECTION SECURITY SYSTEM

_______________________________________________________________________

-

SECURITY SYSTEM

Page

PART GENERAL

Related Documents

Description of Work

Reference Codes and Standards

Submittals

Quality Assurance

Delivery, Storage and Handling

As-Built Drawings

Spare Parts

PART PRODUCTS

General

Cable Network

PART EXECUTION

Examination

Installation

Field Quality Control

Cleaning

Adjustment


_______________________________________________________________________

-

PART GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including

General Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and

Division Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The security system shall include walk through metal gate

detector, X-ray detector and hand held units. These units shall

be located and installed at the main entrance gate, staff entrance

gates and new cataract building entrance.

The work shall cover all equipment, systems and power cable

networks, workmanship, software, programming, testing,

commissioning and all related activities.

The supplier/contractor is fully responsible for the delivery and

installation of totally integrated system in case of having multi

vendor equipment and interfacing between the different

components of the system and the other related systems.

The system shall be expandable for future extension of the

facility.

REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the

drawings, specifications and stipulations of the Local Building

and safety Codes, the National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA), International Electrical Commission (IEC), the

Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Listing or other equivalent

international standards.

Equipment and installations shall comply with the latest revision

of the current provisions of the following codes and standards:

- Saudi Electrical Standard

- Saudi Safety Standard


- Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with

applicable requirements of NFPA "National Electrical Code"


_______________________________________________________________________

-

- UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL and UL

A

- IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirement standards

pertaining to system and wiring

An equal standard could be accepted, which should be listed in detail

as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in

detail together with their equivalent IEC, NFPA and UL.

SUBMITTALS



General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation

indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers


ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall

be subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall

be ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices,

which are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of

Quantities.

Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and

device locations and connecting wiring of entire system,

including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be

limited to, the following:

- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and

the size, type and number of all conductors including signal

strengths and cable loss



- Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system

- Complete system wiring diagrams for components and


- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local representative

responsible for installation coordination and service

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including specifications and installations for each type of the

equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams

and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the

maintenance manual.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

each type of the system equipment installed, including furnished

specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and

shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with

requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the security

system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of the system of



projects for not less than five ( ) years.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a

factory-authorized sales and service representative to perform the

work of this section.


installation experience of the security systems similar to that

required for the project.

1.5.3 Training: Equipment's manufacturer and his authorized, local

representative shall provide, in depth, equipment service and

programming on site training to selected Employer's personnel

for one week.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry,

closed space in original containers. Protect products from fumes.

Handle very carefully to avoid shocks or damage.

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in

writing all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning

any suggested alterations from the shop drawings in wiring

routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise from

coordination between the system and other activities.

No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving

written approval from the Engineer.

All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractors

and extra copies shall be submitted to the involved parties

(Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.).


_______________________________________________________________________

-

A complete as-built draft set of drawings and equipment

schedules shall be prepared days after completion of work for

approval of the Engineer. The draft as-built shall include all

previously approved alterations. Final originals and copies of as-

built drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division ,

Section "Submittals".

SPARE PARTS

The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all the spare

parts for a period not less than ten ( ) years

PART PRODUCTS

GENERAL

The security system shall give an alarm in case of there are any

weapons or explosive materials in guest luggage in order to

achieve maximum-security in the building area.

The security system shall consists of but is not limited to:

- Hand held units.

- Metal gate detectors.

- X-ray machine.

System Operation: The security system shall be provided to

manage and detect any unsafe materials through X-ray machines,

walk through metal gate detectors and hand held units.

Equipment and Materials

- X-ray machines

- Walk through metal gate detectors

- Hand held units.

X-RAY Machine:

X-Ray machine shall be used to enable security persons to screen

guest and staff luggage to detect weapons, explosive materials

..etc.

The X-RAY machine shall be located as indicated on drawings.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Machine shall have but not limited to the following features:

- Tunnel Size: ” wide ( cm) ” high ( cm) L-shaped

detector for package screening.

- Contrast Sensitivity: Over million color tones standard.

- Processing: -bit color processing with minimum Mbytes

memory;

MHz or GHz processor.

- Conveyor Speed: feet per minute; cm per second.

- Standard conveyor pictured on reverse.

- Extended conveyor length

- Fully reversible. Toggles for easy belt changeover.

- Minimum Pulling Weight: kg ( lbs)

- Full auto-sensing without photo-sensors, Reduces downtime and

assures all magazines, envelopes or moving parts, or footpad.

- Items to be scanned, no matter how thin, or of bag already in

tunnel

- Enhances radiation safety.

- X-ray tube head: Self-contained, shielded tank

- High voltage rating: kV, kV Operating Voltage

- Duty cycle: with sealed oil bath cooling

- Beam orientation: Diagonal

- Maximum Dose rate: m R.

- X-ray Detectors :Surface mounted, multi-layer, fully integrated,

high frequency, solid state detectors using high speed processors,

and Pentium image processing with Single Energy or optional

Multi-Energy (M) Color.

- Video Standard with color ” SVGA monitor. High resolution,

flicker-free, . dot pitch, low rad. monitor, x . Multi-

Energy color with available second flat monitor

- Displays organics in orange and in organics in blue, both

overlapping in green and very dense objects in black, and includes

Organic and Inorganic Stripping.

- Real Clear

- Auto-Cal

- High density


_______________________________________________________________________

-

- Auto Dens alert

- Dark & Light enhance A

- Auto Tracking

- Density Scan

- Fast initial warm-up ( max. second)

- AutoSensing

- Color; Reverse B/W

- Threat Image Projection (TIP)

- Weight: lbs ( kg) or lbs ( kg) crated

- Construction: Uni-body heavy gauge, epoxy painted steel

- Construction with stainless steel and aluminum trim and

accessories.

- Center keypad mountable on top, or on side or table.

- Environmental Temperature range : to C & Humidity

- ,

- Electrical Power Consumption: < . kVA, volts Hz

Walk Through Metal Detector:

The walk through metal detector shall be used for security

purpose to enable security persons to screen guest and staff

personnel to detect weapons, explosive materials ..etc.

The walk through metal detector shall be located near each X-ray

unit at the main entrance gate, staff entrance gates and the guest

entrance of new cataract building.

It shall have but not limited to the following features:

- Dual antenna construction.

- DSP circuitry eliminates spikes, noise, and two-way radio

interference with detection circuitry is continuously active.

- Bright and large squared LED indicators for power and

alarm status.

- LCD display indicates settings, diagnostic functions and

operational menus.

- Diagnostics are built in and circuits are constantly

monitored for faults.

- 100 Standard programs, ferrous and nonferrous metal

detection.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

- Sensitivity range settings are selectable from 1 to 99 for

target detection.

- Remote alarm relay and data output connector.

- Synchronization for adjacent unit operation with four audio

tone selections

- Microprocessor computer controlled circuitry with digital

keypad entry control, LCD display, large LED barograph

meter, LED indicators and audio/visual alarm.

- Left-to-right, right-to-left, center, top-to-bottom, and

optimize the archway in busy locations. UnitP

- POWER: 220 VAC, 50 Hz

- Overall Loop Housing : - 87”H x 24”D x 35”W

- Passage Clearance - 79.5”H x 28”W.

- Detectors shall be equipped with an automatic diagnostic

program, which indicates the fault code on the control

panel.

- Equipment shall be safe for heart pacemakers and

magnetic recording media according to international

standards.

Hand Held Metal Detector

The hand held metal detector shall be used for security purpose

to enable security persons to screen guest and staff personnel

itself to detect weapons, explosive materials ..etc.

Contractor shall provide the number of hand held metal detectors

as required in the BOQ and in accordance with the specification

of the same supplier of the walk-through metal detectors,

previously mentioned in Item .

Selective operation for organic/inorganic/common material.

Operating environment: minimum C, maximum C at

RH.

CABLE NETWORK

This section covers the work of the signal, power, control and

earth cabling systems required for the security system.

The networks shall comply with the requirements of the

manufactures of the equipment.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

The connections shall be done in close coordination with

manufacturer’s requirements of the constituents of the system as

described in this specification and connection with other related

systems.

The network shall use cables in compliance with the requirements

of the equipment manufacturers.

Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel conduits.

Routs running inside walls, ceilings and under floors shall be in

rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in steel conduits

Maximum number of wires to run inside one conduit shall allow

for extra wires to be added in the future.

Connection between wires shall be in accordance with same

standards as mentioned before.

An earth wires shall be provided with equipment.

The system shall include connection with the ground.

Grounding Considerations: Grounding systems are normally an

integral part of the specific signal or communications cabling

system that they protect. In addition to helping protect personnel

and equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper grounding

system may reduce EMI to inform the communications cabling

system. Improper grounding can produce induced voltages and

those voltages can disrupt other communications circuits.

Distribution Boxes: Shall be in accordance with the requirements

of manufacturer(s) of the equipment.

All boxes shall be flush mounted and shall be fitted with anti

corrosion treated brass metal terminals. The boxes shall be

constructed in a way to facilitate maintenance.

All boxes shall be tamper proof by means of micro switch.

Covers shall be provided with the numbering scheme for all

wiring fitted to it and their destination, to facilitate service.

Cable Conduits: Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel

conduits (false ceilings, etc). Routs running inside walls, ceilings

and under floors shall be in rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in

steel conduits


_______________________________________________________________________

-

Steel conduits shall be used for installations outside structure and

shall be painted with corrosive resistant paints. Clamps and

collars shall be used for installing conduits. Conduits shall be

inspected before installation to be free from any internal defects,

which may oppose or damage the cables during installation,

provided with metal wire to easily extend the cables.

Standard ELL (L) or TEE (T) conduit fittings shall be used

instead of bending conduits more than -mm diameters. A

distance separation of -mm minimum shall be kept with other

power cables.

PART EXECUTION

EXAMINATION



the performance of the AC system work.


corrected.

INSTALLATION

General: Install systems in accordance with codes and

standards. Install equipment and wiring in accordance with

manufacturers written instructions.

Appropriate measuring equipment shall be used (signal strength

voltage, current, etc.), for the network adjustment and trouble

shooting.

- Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway/conduit except within

consoles, desks and counters, and excepts in accessible ceiling

plenums where cable wiring method may be used. Cables used in

environmental air space shall be listed for this use. Conceal

cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors wherever possible.

- Surge Suppressors Installation: Where AC power-operated

devices are not protected against voltage transients by integral

surge suppressors, install surge suppressors at the devices' power

line terminals.

- Wiring Method: Conceal cable in accessible ceilings, walls, and

floors wherever possible.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

- Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train the conductors

to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use placing bars

and distribution spools.

- Pulling Cables: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored,

deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between

indicated termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and

discard cable where damaged during installation and replace it

with new cable.

- Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface

contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer.

- Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers.

- Make final connection to equipment in the presence of the

equipment manufacturer's representative.

Installation of the Equipment: The installation of this

equipment shall cover the following:

- Installation of all main equipments

- Internal signal, power, and control wiring

- External signal, power, and control wiring related to the system

- Adjustment, testing and putting into operation of the equipment,

and other related equipment to achieve the specified

performance.

Installation of the Cable Network: The cable network shall

include the communication, power, and control cables required

for the whole system and shall be installed taking into

consideration the following:

- Laying the cables which shall connect the equipment including

the installation of connectors, junction boxes, and

matching/splitting units if exists.

- The installation shall include any necessary ground loop

corrector.

- Installation of signal cables and control wiring of the

equipment.


- Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factory-


and connection of components and system presetting, testing, and

adjustment.


_______________________________________________________________________

-

- Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and

interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

- Presetting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all





- Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system tests

to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of



CLEANING

Clean all system components. Use methods and materials


ADJUSTMENT

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting

the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up till

requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose without

additional cost.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16735 DATA NETWORKING

ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-1

PART 1 GENERAL

MOI IP DATA NETWORKS

Project shall be Part of Whole Civil Defense Data Networks: Which consider three-

layer Architectural Model to Achieve High Performance, Availability and Scalability

of the MOI Complexes backbone.

In this model, there are three networks which will be physically separated from the

layer two edge switches, and virtually separated through the distribution and core

layers modular switches.

Network-1: Secure network.

Network-2: IP Telephony and Internet Network.

Network-3: IPTV, CCTV and Light-Current Systems Network.

Low Current rooms shall aggregate access points of the network (outlets) to redundant

Modular Distribution switch and then consolidate all links to redundant core switches.

The Core Switches shall be connected to one data center that will host all services and

systems head ends.

The centralized Data Center solution will facilitate networks management and will

simplify the operation and maintenance of all included systems. In the same time it

will maintain the needed separation of the Networks for security and administration

purpose.

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.1 The purpose of this document is to define works to be performed under this

section, installations regulation for data network equipment.

1.1.2 This section covers the local area network active components & define the

general requirements for switching.

The term active components here is mainly concerned with network switching

equipments (core & edge switches).

1.1.3 This section details the description of the works to be carried out by the

contractor concerning the following items:

- Core switches

- - Edge switches.

- Network management platforms.


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-2

1.1.4 Related works specified elsewhere

This section shall be closely coordinated with other related sections & general

requirements sections:

- Grounding bonding.

- Building management system.

- IP CCTV

- IPTV

- Security systems

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Data Network: It is the switching network that will perform all switching and

routing functions for voice ,video and data services. The network shall serve all

IP based services such as voice over IP ,IP CCTV ..etc.

1.2.2 Core Switches: The Core Switches will be located at the heart of the network

and shall provide very fast switching ,intelligent high performance platform for

deploying numerous concurrent intelligent services without degrading the overall

performance of the network. The core switches shall perform various functions

using various service modules for wan interfaces ,security firewalls…etc.

1.2.3 Edge Data Switch: Edge Switches will be located at the wiring closets

(telecommunication closets) ,they will provide users with access to the network.

The edge switches shall support power over Ethernet on all ports. Each Edge

switch/edge switch stack shall be connected to distribution switch via two uplinks

each one is 1GbE (1000 Base LX) .each link shall be on different module in the

distribution switch.

1.2.5 Network Equipment Management Software: The management software main

function is to enable remote and centralized configuration of the different

parameters and functions of switches and routers of the Data Network.

1.3 INTEGRATED SYSTEMS USING DATA NETWORK EQUIPMENTS

All voice, data, and video system supported by IP networks shall be able to be

integrated in Building Data Network, such as IP Data Devices, Voice over IP,

CCTV over IP etc.

The local area network shall provide the unified IP infrastructure required to

provide the necessary bandwidth for the different running applications.


The following standards form the frame work of the related standards to be

considered


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-3

ISO/IEC 11801 latest edition for their physical interfaces

IEEE 802.3x standards related to the following either upon twisted pairs or

optical fibers:

- Ethernet

- Fast Ethernet

- Gigabit-Ethernet

- 10 Gigabit-Ethernet

IEEE 802.3ad Gigabit-Ethernet channeling

IEEE 802.1q VLAN Ethernet.

IEEE 802.1p Classes of Services (CoS).

IEEE 802.1d Spanning-Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning-Tree Protocol (Layer 2 load sharing on redundant links)

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning-Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet

IEEE 802.1x network security standards

- Core Data Switches must also comply with:

ATM Forum standards

Frame Relay standards

1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 The network shall be capable of recovering from failures and topology changes

quickly and in a predetermined manner. The network should be scalable and

easily support future expansions. The network shall be capable of classifying and

marking data packets at the network edge, minimizing congestion and allowing

traffic to be prioritized.

1.5.2 The traffic has to flow efficiently through the network, to prevent bottlenecks.

Also the traffic must be controlled in an efficient way to make it easy to cope

with the changing requirements and priorities as network grows and evolves.

1.5.3 The network must be secured to ensure only authorized users can gain access to

the network, to restrict access to sensitive network areas, and to prevent data and

voice traffic from traveling to the wrong stations.

1.5.4 The network must be high available include high performance IP routing, Layers

load balancing, bandwidth aggregation technology, multicast management.

1.5.5 Support for cryptographic methods.


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-4

1.5.6 The network shall be able to accommodate future expansion in terms of hardware

& the impact on the expected traffic pattern.

1.5.7 The network must provide a convergent unified infrastructure to support voice

video & data .

1.5.8 The network must accommodate any IP Ethernet device, through wired or

wireless links.

1.5.9 The network shall provide the sufficient bandwidth to support IP video streaming

with broadcast & multicast data flows.

1.5.10 The network shall demonstrate high level of redundancy on various levels from

physical redundancy by using dual core design concept, using dual power

supplies at core switches & other redundancy features.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

The contractor shall submit the following prior to installations:

1.6.1 Workshop drawings illustrating full details of rack elevations along with all

related network drawings, in addition to the physical and logical diagrams of the

proposed network illustrating the following:

- Type of physical links and interfaces

- Type and rate of each logical link.

- Number and type of each port of each proposed equipment, power over Ethernet

ports shall be specified.

- Manufacturer references of each equipment.

1.6.2 The contractor has to show the maximum number of ports that can be provided by

the core and edge switches against the number actually used ports for the current

situation.

1.6.3 The installer reference with similar projects.

1.6.4 Certificates from the Manufacturer illustrating that the installer has the qualified

personnel to perform design, installation and configuration for the provided

equipments. Personnel certificates from the manufacturer must be submitted. The

certificates must be appropriate with the requirement with the required

configuration & maintenance expected tasks.

1.6.5 Proposed schedule for installations and configurations

1.6.6 Complete set of manuals and software for each switch illustrating the installation

and configuration processes along with the periodic maintenance procedures.


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-5

1.6.7 The standard warranty shall be provided and shall be completed to achieve three

years warranty.

1.6.8 Hands on Training schedule illustrating the studying hours along with the

materials .The training shall include installation and configuration detailed steps

along with the maintenance strategy.

1.6.9 VLAN and Addressing plan foreseen for the proposed network.

1.6.10 Proposed Quality of Service policy.

1.6.11 Technical Data sheets of all proposed supplied equipments.

1.6.12 At the end of each working phase, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of

as built document including:

- All prior documents requested for execution and completed in accordance

with the real executed works.

- Management software configuration with managed domains and user rights of

each operator using management software.

- Technical data sheets, references and catalogues of installed equipment and

software manufacturers.

- The configuration files will be given to the Client Representative Technical

Consultant for validation.

1.6.13 The contractor will be notified to re-examine without delay, any error, omission

or non-conformity, which would be identified by the consultant at this stage.

1.6.14 Any anomaly or non-conformity raised on these document omission will be

subject to a notification.

1.7 NETWORK CHARACTERISTICS TO SUPPORT VOIP

1.7.1 The proposed solution must be able to function with a variety of different

manufacturers of IP-PBX and integrate seamlessly with various communication

platforms.

- Generally the network must satisfy the following requirements.

- The LAN/WAN must support QOS and 802. 1P/Q.

- The LAN/WAN must be switched Ethernet.

- Switches must be managed to provide the required prioritization for

voice packets.

- The IP phones shall be connected to 10/100/1000 Base T ports

(supporting POE)


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-6

- IP addresses will be derived using DHCP on an integrated DHCP

server or from an external DHCP server.

- Static IP addresses must also be accommodated.

- IETF standard DIFFSERV QOS architecture shall be supported to

ensure end to end QOS.

- The administrator shall be able to police the amount of traffic that

each user is able to transmit. Policing shall be performed according to

the traffic filter profile assigned to the traffic flow. Policing is

required to ensure that traffic flows conform to criteria assigned by

network administrator.

1.8 NETWORK DESCRIPTION

1.8.1 The network design shall be modular in nature. The telecommunication closets

are distributed all over the project various floors and areas.

1.8.2 The telecommunication closets contain the communication racks, the racks contain

the access layer edge switches that provide the user with the network access.

1.8.3 The facility main cross connect shall contain the network core switches. The

LAN will contain IP based data center switches to serve the server farm.

1.8.4 Broadcast storms must be prevented from reaching the core layer. The network

shall be divided into several broadcast domains to guarantee the optimum

performance. Multicast / broadcast protection is a mandatory feature on the

backbone layer.

The core switches & data center switches shall be fully redundant and in load sharing mode.

1.8.5 The backbone design and architecture must be fully resilient and Load-Sharing

(switching fabric/management modules, power supply, modules, Fans, etc…) in

order to eliminate any single point of failure with highest performance. Two core

switches shall be used to provide Load-Sharing.

1.8.6 The backbone switches shall be modular with enough backplane throughput or

bandwidth that can deal efficiently with the connected traffic. Free Slots (at least

25% of chassis slots) should be available per each chassis in order to provide

future expansion.

1.8.7 The proposed design should avoid any kind of traffic bottlenecks in the backbone

or the data center. The switch shall support hot-swap for easy dynamic

expansions.

1.8.8 The servers shall be connected to the data center switches with fully Load-

Balanced Gigabit Ethernet Links suing standard IEEE 802.3ad. 10 Gig Ethernet

shall be utilized to interconnect the data center to the core backbone switching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-7

2.1 CORE SWITCHES

2.1.1 The network will have two core switches The core switches shall be optimized to

provide convergent network for voice, video and data.

2.1.2 Each core switches shall have various redundant features including two switching

fabric cards, two power supplies…etc.

2.1.3 The core switches must be modular. each chassis shall include slots supporting

wide range of switching and service modules.

2.1.4 Contractor shall provide bandwidth calculations indicating the appropriate

required backplane switching fabric in Gbps along with required forwarding rates

in Million packet per second for core switches .In general The Core switches shall

have two 720 Gbps Switching fabric cards forming 1.44 Tbps , with L2-L7

capabilities . the core switches shall have extra slots to support 25% expansion of

ports capacities.

The following features are currently desirable & should be available in the provided

equipment. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions/additions/equivalent

features & indicate which are the standard & proprietary supported protocols.

- High Availability Requirements:

Primary and secondary switches must fail over to one another using virtual

router redundancy protocol(VRRP) to achieve <1second fail over.

Hot Swappable Switch Fabric, Power Supplies and fan trays and Switching

modules.

Dual switch software and configuration file images on processors.

Active Alternate locations for switch software and configuration file

images (Flash, PCMCIA, Network Drive)

The switch’s operating system or application-specific software(s) should

not at any time affect of operation by causing a system to: crash, reboot,

enter a state of Denial of Service (DoS), fail to respond to any type of

user/network traffic, fail to respond to any type of management traffic, use

built-in user name/passwords to gain illegal access to the switch.

- Operational Management:

Weight Round Robin/Weighted Fair Queuing on all ports with 8 queues per

port. All ports on the core switches shall support full Quality of Services

without any additional hardware / software for future usage.

Per VLAN rate limiting.

Per port Ingress & Egress port limiting

SNMP v1, 2, 3


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-8

L2/3/4 Traffic classification in hardwired Application Specific Integrated

Circuits (ASICs) at wire speed where applications are defined by their

TCP/UDP/IP information.

Equal Cost Multiple Routing policy filters (ECMP) (RFC 2992) to provide

link redundancy and load sharing across multiple paths to the same

destination, and rapid convergence to the alternate path if a path becomes

unavailable due to a network event.

Layer 3 load balancing on both backbone switches

IP policy-based routing.

Port/MAC-based VLANs IP routing

Remote port mirroring (multiple hops away) - Allow the user to mirror

traffic on a certain port to a remote switch (multiple hops away).

Guarantees that a receiver in a multicast group either receives all data from

transmissions and retransmissions, or is capable of detecting unrecoverable

data packet loss

- Supported Protocols

IPv4

IPv6

BGP(Border Gateway Protocol )

OSPF (Open Shortest path first)

IP RIPv1/2 (Routing Information Protocol)

ICMP (Internet Message Control Protocol)

SSH (Secure Shell)

IGMP(v1, 2, 3) (internet Group message Protocol)

Multicast in Hardware

PIM, including Bi-directional PIM (Protocol Independent Multicast)

ECMP (Equal Cost Multi-Path routing)

- Advanced Security:

Port security with MAC-based security and IEEE 802.1x EAP (Extensible

Authentications Protocol). The Switch shall provide the ability of

integration with End-Point Security Policy Enforcement agents and

interface using Standard 802.1x EAP.

Network Address Translation (NAT)

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) intercept hardware acceleration

IEEE 802.1x EAP

ACL (Access Lists)

SSH v1/2 (Secure Shell)

Denial of Service (DoS) attack prevention


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-9

VRRP response mode

OSPF MD5 encryption authentication

Discard Unknown MAC Security

- Connectivity Options

802.3ad link Aggregation, across modules with all ports active and load

sharing traffic at the same time. The Switch shall allow groups 10/100/1000

Mbps ports either fiber or copper on different I/O modules to act as in a

single trunk.

Ability to Cluster core switches to provide a single virtual Switch facing

the Servers and the distribution switches. Thus all links between the (core

switches – distribution switches), (core switches – Servers) shall be active

and Load-Sharing using Standard 802.3ad.

Ethernet

IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T

Fast Ethernet

IEEE 802.3u, 100BASE-TX

IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-FX

Gigabit Ethernet

IEEE 802.3z

IEEE 802.3x

IEEE 802.3ab

1000BASE-SX

1000BASE-LX

1000BASE-XD/ZX

10 Gigabit Ethernet

IEEE 802.3ae

ATM OC-3

ATM OC-12

- Firewall:

The firewall shall be performed in hardware using firewall module to be plugged into

the core switches or a separate firewall box to be connected to the network.


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-10

- Wide Area Networking communication:

The communication with service providers shall be achieved using communication

modules (or separate routers). adequate number of E1 lines shall be supported for

every core switch (except the server farm switches) .

The cards/routers shall provide the required integration of VOIP gateways ,analog ,

digital ,conferencing and transcoding features shall be supported allowing for remote

management. The cards shall be field upgradeable and hot swappable.

2.2 EDGE SWITCHES

The following features are currently desirable & should be available in the provided

equipment. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions/additions & indicate

which are the standard & proprietary supported protocols. The required protocols shall

be complied with the latest versions of related parameter/protocol. :

2.2.1 General features

- The edge switches shall be 24 port auto negotiating 10/100/1000 Base-TX

supporting POE (power over Ethernet 802.3af.) in addition to at least two

GBIC/SFP modular slots .each edge switch stack shall be connected to the

distribution layer switches via 2x1GbE (1000 Base-LX). The uplinks shall be

upgradeable to 10GbE .

- Edge switches shall have the ability to be connected to external redundant

power supply.

- The switching capacity /switching fabric shall not be less than 64 Gbps per switch.

- Packet classification at Layers 2/3/4 at wire speed to provide security, filtering,

and quality of service at the edge of the network.

- Ability to aggregate ports from different switch stack members and operate in

Active/Active load-sharing mode either Fiber/Copper.

- Wires peed performance .

- IPv6 &IPv4 support.

2.2.2 LAYER 2

- 802.1Q (Virtual LAN support)

- 802.3ad (Link aggregation)

- Voice VLAN

- 802.1D (Spanning tree protocol-STP)

- 802.1w (Rapid spanning tree protocol-RSTP)

- 802.1s (Multiple spanning tree protocol-MSTP)

- BPDU (bridge protocol data unit ) protection

- IGMP (Internet grouping management protocol) version 1,2,3

- Filtering for multicast groups

2.2.3 LAYER 3


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-11

- RIPv1/v2 (Routing information protocol support)

- Support static routing

- Hardware based routing

- Support routing policies

2.2.4 Security

- DHCP snooping

- Support access lists at layers 2,3 & 4

- 802.1X

- TACACS+/RADUIS

- Port security based on MAC address

- MAC and IP based filters

2.2.5 QoS (Quality of service ) Features

- QoS Architecture to assure End-to-End QoS with the edge for all traffic types and

not only VoIP.

- Per-Switch/VLAN/Port QoS templates for granular control

- 8 hardware queues per port

- 8 hardware queues, essentially providing 8 different levels of emission priorities,

or 8 different levels of QoS to support for the QoS architecture

- Strict & weighted round robin queuing on all I/O ports

- Strict queues are allocated for delay-sensitive traffic types (VoIP) and any

streaming media, afterwards, the weighted queues are allocated to other traffic

patterns, where weights are set according to traffic/application importance.

- Internal QoS level 802.1p bits, MAC, port, VLAN QoS level, Differentiated

services code point (DSCP)

- Packet Classification in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports

- Filtering in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports

- Policing and Rate Metering in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports

- Standards 802.1p and DSCP to QoS mapping at Ingress/Egress ports

- Minimum roundtrip latency for time sensitive applications like (VoIP, Video

conferencing and streaming media applications) shall be indicated.

- Non-IP bridged/routed traffic QoS based on port, source-MAC, and protocol

VLANs

2.3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The proposed NMS shall include a suite of applications to provide tools for

multi-layer topology support, fault and performance management, network

visualization, and statistics gathering. The fault and performance management

tools shall enable multi-device alarm and event correlation; proactive base lining

and threshold; and RMON performance management. It Shall include the ability

to aggregate faults and provide detailed descriptions and solutions for faults. The

visualization tools shall provide insight into the Internet, intranet, and the


ACTIVE COMPONENT

___________________________________________________________________________

16735-12

physical network, enabling users to better organize network resources.

The offered NMS shall be able to manage larger and more complex Ethernet

networks. It shall have the flexibility to grow as the network grows. The key

requirements for the NMS are:

- Ease of managing and troubleshooting Ethernet networks

- Automated discovery and display of Ethernet topology and devices

- Consolidation and correlation of network faults

- Powerful diagnostic functions for multicast, unicast, and WAN protocols

- Real-time performance analysis

- Scalability and security for managing large networks

END OF SECTION

SECTION IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM

___________________________________________________________________________

-

PART GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,

Conditions of Particular Application and Division Specification Sections, apply

to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

This section covers the work of the IP telephone system as required for the project.

The provided IP telephone system shall be used to establish internal and external

telephone communications within the project.

IP telephony is the utilization of data network infrastructure (LAN, MAN, and

WAN) to transport telecommunication transactions including, telephone calls,

faxes and messages.

EXTENT OF WORK

Extent of work of the IP telephone system is indicated on Drawings, in schedules

and on riser diagram of the project. It covers the following:


All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications

and stipulations of the following codes and standards:

Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

IEC

EN

AS/NZS

EN Class B

AS/NZ Class B

EN

EN

EN

EN

ITU-standards (H. , H. )

TIA (TSB )

TIA

Saudi Telecom Practices and Regulations

Other related standards could be accepted.


___________________________________________________________________________

-

SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division

Specification Sections:

General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation indicating type,

size, rating, style, catalog number, Manufacturers names, photographs and/or

catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with Specifications. This

documentation shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment

shall be ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which are

shown on documents (drawings, BOQ, etc). Any document submitted by the

contractor during the tender stage shall not be considered as technical submittal, it

shall be used only to approve the manufacture name. During technical submittal

stage, contractor shall submit all required technical document for study and

approval. This study may drive to reject a vendor had been previously approved

during the tender stage.

1.5.2 Technical submittal: Technical submittal shall include the following:

Complete point by point comply sheet with highlighted cross reference on related

data sheets, indicating deviations – if any – reasons for such deviations, also

indicate any extra features / specifications.

Manufacturer's technical product data sheets, including quantities and

specifications of every module, specification of every device, system component,

quantities, software and installations for each unit of equipment. Pin to pin riser

diagram showing all system components and interconnection between IP telephony

and all other related systems.

Planes indicating exact location of system components. Provide calculations to

support the traffic of the network, required storage capacity, required number of

telephone lines and required bandwidth for data (LAN / WAN connection)

Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system.

Contractor shall submit a list of the Manufacturer's authorized, local repre-

sentative responsible for installation coordination and service, pre qualification

for the system provider and installer

Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and device locations and

connection including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to, the

following:

Complete pin to pin one-line riser diagram(s) showing all approved equipment,

size, type and number of all conductors, interconnection between IP telephony

and all other related systems.

Installation details for raceways, racks and all the other components of the

system. Installation details drawings shall show all accessories used in


___________________________________________________________________________

-

installation such as back boxes, glands, washers, etc. Drawings shall indicate

exact location of every single component of the system in coordination with all

other systems (Electromechanical, Arch., Civil, etc.). Submitted shop drawings

must include signature of all involved engineers representing different

disciplines (Electromechanical, etc) to confirm their approval of such locations

installations and coordination.

Complete description and data including related standards for all system

components.

Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system.

A listing of the Manufacturer's authorized, local representative responsible for

installation coordination and service.

Commissioning, Testing Procedures and Testing results: Submit testing and

commissioning procedures including required test equipment for the following:

Passive cabling, Active equipment, its traffic and performance

Close out Documents: Required documents shall include but not limited to the

following:

As-built drawings: During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in

writing all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested

alterations from the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices

which arise from coordination between the system and other activities.

No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written approval from

the Engineer.

All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies shall

be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.)

A complete as-built draft set of Drawings and equipment schedules shall be

prepared fifteen ( ) days after completion of work for approval of the Engineer.

The draft as-built shall include all previously approved alterations. Final originals

and copies of as-built Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division ,

Section "Submittals".

As-built drawings shall include; Planes indicating the exact location of every single

component of the system in coordination with the other systems, As built (up

dated) pin to pin connection riser diagram indicating type, model , part number of

every used unit , device, etc., As built rack/s configuration and connection

diagram.

Operation and maintenance manuals including; Up dated data sheets for use

equipments, operation instructions, programming procedures Electronic circuits for

every device and equipment, troubleshooting repair guide, required spare parts list

for years of operation data, circuit diagram


___________________________________________________________________________

-

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the system shall be

regularly engaged in manufacturing of same systems and whose products have

been in satisfactory service in similar projects for not less than five ( ) years.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a factory-authorized

sales and service representative to perform the work of this section.

The Installer firm shall have at least five ( ) years of successful installation

experience of similar systems for similar projects.

Training: Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall

provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to selected

Employer’s personnel for two weeks.

DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry, closed space in original

containers. Protect products from fumes. Handle very carefully to avoid shocks

or damage

PART PRODUCTS

IP telephone system shall include active devices required for IP telephony service.

Scope of work shall not include data switches / data servers.

The following features / specifications are just for guidance as a minimum technical

requirement, other alternatives with different / higher specifications could be

approved.

The contractor shall be fully responsible for the arrangement &coordination

(administration and financial) with STC to feed the project with telephone lines or

number of digital E ’s

SYSTEM FEATURES

The IP Telephony system shall have the following features and facilities:

IP extensions, referred to as Directory Number (DN)

Music on Hold service

Background Music

Call Conferencing service


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Operator Console

PSTN Digital trunks connectivity

Flexible DID services

Corporate Directory

Call Waiting Notification

Voice Mail Box

Auto Attendant

Scheduled Access Restriction

Automatic Line Selection

Call Party Name Display

Caller list

Toggling

Hot-line features

Text messages

Advisory messages

Call Features: hold, conferencing, transfer, forward, redial, speed dial, Do Not

Disturb (DND), etc.

Enhanced telephone set features: Ring tone and volume control, call log for

received, dialed and missed calls, hands-free, Microphone mute, etc.

Flexible Call Restrictions

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL

Equipment and materials shall be new and unused. Systems and components shall

be designed and installed for uninterrupted duty.

Scope of work of IP telephone system shall cover all building areas such as service

room, equipment room etc.

External lines shall be terminated on the distribution frame of Saudi Telecom (MDF ). Connection between MDF and IP telephone frame (MDF ) inside main data room shall take place. The system shall include but not limited to:

Control and signaling equipment

Basic IP phone set.

Executive and office-type IP phone

Voice Gateway

Voice mail system for all extensions with capacity of 5 messages X 30 second

per extension.


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Attendant console

Analogue terminal adaptor for faxes connectivity

Software

SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

General

The system shall offer converged voice and data using the same underlying

technology as the Internet (TCP/IP), with voice being transmitted over local area

networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs) for IP phone calls. The

solution must be comprised of control elements, media gateway elements,

applications, IP telephone sets and IP soft-phones, as well as voice mail.

The system must use a switched IP Core that is highly scalable and delivers reliable,

robust switching, routing and call control – fully leveraging IP – while providing access

to the PSTN using TDM, ISDN, DSL, etc. technologies.

For IP-device-to-IP-device communications, e.g., calls between Ethernet IP

phones, switching must be provided via the enterprise’s IP network. For TDM

circuit communications, e.g., a call between an IP phone and the PSTN, or

between the PSTN and voice mail application.

The ability to use two different switching techniques means that conversion (or

gateway/gatekeeper functionality) is only required between IP and TDM calls.

The architecture must package the traditional circuit-switched bus, call server,

gateway/gatekeeper and real time applications resources within a ” rack.

Applications must include:

Voice mail.

Network management.

Web-based management application tool.

The system must be able to support both digital and analogue trunks for

connection to the PSTN or for connecting multiple sites or systems together.

Networking systems together must be achieved using traditional circuit switched

technology or the IP infrastructure.

The system must be able to be used as a standalone application, e.g., Voice Mail

System, or a mobility solution.

Complete solution for IP telephone system software and hardware to be from one

manufacturer.


___________________________________________________________________________

-

IP Phone Server

The server shall be of brand name products

IP phone server shall be used for control and switch signals. IP Phone server shall

have but not limited to the following features:

Support related software.

Two Intel 5140 Xeon 2.33-GHz processors, and 4 MB of Level 2 cache

4-GB PC2-5300 667-MHz double-data-rate 2 (DDR2) memory with online spare

capabilities, extendable up to 32 GB

Smart Array P400 Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) Controller

with 256-MB cache (Hot-swap hard drives configured using RAID 1 at least).

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet controller

Support for up to 8 small form-factor hot-plug hard drives

Redundant hot-swap power supplies

Redundant hot-swap fans

Capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings

Support 5 universal-serial-bus (USB 2)

Support Digital Audio Tape (DAT) through USB 2.0

Ethernet connectors Two RJ-45 connectors (10/100/1000 ) , support EIA

Category 6 A.

Operating Temperature 10° to 10° to 35°

Relative humidity: 10 to 90%, 28°C

Automatic call distribution (ACD) and interactive voice response (IVR) systems

(to Deliver notification to users through e-mail, fax, pager, short message

service

Enable customers to retrieve the information they require through voice

commands without ever speaking with an agent

Software: Required software shall have but not limited to the following features:

Collects information about a user's availability status and communications

capabilities, including whether he is using a communications device such as a

phone at a particular time or have Web collaboration or videoconferencing

enabled on the system. Based on information captured, applications can improve

productivity by helping users connect with colleagues more efficiently by

determining the most effective avenue for collaborative communication.

Presence information can be incorporated in applications developed.

Supports Microsoft Office Communicator click-to-dial and phone monitoring

functions, as well as integration with Microsoft Outlook Calendar and Meeting

Notification to help users maintain their availability and status information

automatically


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Centralized, replicated configuration database and distributed Web-based

management viewers

Date and time display format configurable per phone

Device groups and pools

Device mapping tool—IP address to MAC address

Dialed number translation table (inbound and outbound translation)

H.323-compliant interface to H.323 clients, gateways, and gatekeepers

QoS statistics recorded per call

Time zone configurable per phone

Gateway: Gateway shall be based on H. technology, H. Associated with the

PSTN-side provides voice, fax, and remote-access services over IP (as TDM

switching). It shall provide high-density packet voice digital-signal-processor

(DSP) modules and universal port. It shall support Frame Relay, Point-to-Point

Protocol (PPP), and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC).

The Gateway shall support but not limited to the following:

Trunk package

Dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) package (supports H.245 Alphanumeric, H.245

Signal, RFC 2833, H.323)

Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)

FXR package for fax transmissions

Announcement server package

Script package

Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) package (QoS)

Standards-based T.38 Real-Time Fax Relay and T.37 Fax Store and Forward.

Standard call detail records (CDRs) for accurate billing

Voice XML and IVR applications.

Voicemail, fax, and e-mail

V.92 and V.44 Support

Security Management: multilevel password protection; user authentication such as

Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake

Authentication Protocol (CHAP); access control lists (ACLs); IP address

spoofing prevention and logging; support of the industry-standard

Regional and Branch-Office Connectivity

10/100/1000 BASE-T auto sensing Gigabit Ethernet ports


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Serial ports

Accepts and consolidates all types of traffic with required ports, including voice,

fax, dial-in analog, digital ISDN, T1 / E1, etc.

Hot-Swappable Cards and Redundant Fans

Supported protocols:

LAN protocols: IP, IPX, AppleTalk, DECnet, Q, etc.

WAN protocols: Frame Relay, PPP, HDLC (leased line)

Routing protocols: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and RIPv , OSPF,

IGRP, BGPv , IS-IS, AppleTalk EIGRP, IPX-EIGRP, Next Hop Resolution

Protocol (NHRP), AppleTalk Update-Based, Routing Protocol (AURP)

QoS protocols: IP Precedence, P, etc.

Access protocols: PPP, Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), TCP Clear,

IPXCP, ATCP, NetBIOS over TCP/IP …etc

Bandwidth optimization: Multilink PPP (MLPPP), TCP/IP header compression,

Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol (BACP)

Voice codecs and fax protocols: G. mu-law, G. a-law, G. a, G. ab,

G. K, K, K, G. , G-Clear, Adaptive Multirate: AMR-NB K, K,

. K, K, K, K, K, K, SID

Voice codecs and fax protocols -High-density packet voice/fax DSPs : G.

mu-law, G. a-law, G. a, G. ab, G. K, K, K, G. , G-Clear,

Adaptive Multi-rate: AMR-NB K, K, K, K, K, . K, K, K,

SID, G. K, K, G. A K, K, iLBC, T. Real-Time Fax Relay,

Super Group fax interoperability, Fax detection, Fax pass-through, T. Store

and Forward Fax, Modem Relay, modem pass-through, RFC , H and In

band DTMF Relay and SIP NOTIFY …etc

Voice compression and fax protocols: Universal DSPs, G. , G. ( and

KB), G. , G. ab, G a, G-Clear, and GSM-FR, T. Real-Time Fax Relay,

T. Fax Store and Forward, Fax pass-through, Modem pass-through, Fax

detection, RFC , H and In band DTMF Relay and SIP NOTIFY and

SUBSCRIBE,

DSP voice features: G. , G. ( -KB and -KB), G. , G. ab, G a,

GSM-FR Echo cancellation, DTMF …etc

Voice signaling protocols: H. v , SIP, MGCP , TGCP , Voice XML,

RTSP, and ESMTP, Fax out (transmission) Group , standards EIA Class

and EIA Class , at modulations

V. , V. , V. , V. ter, and V. Open Settlements Protocol (OSP), Media

Recording Control Protocol (MRCP) …etc


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Other protocols such as: Network security, Virtual private networking, ISDN

protocols, Modem protocols, Wireless protocols, TDM clocking Direct inward

dialing (DID) , Voicemail , Voice XML , TDM switching, etc.

Executive and office-type IP phone: Required telephone set shall have the

following features:

Display: 5.6-inch (14 cm) graphical TFT color touch screen display, 16-bit color

depth, 320 x 240, effective pixel resolution, with backlight. Display also supports

localization requiring double-byte Unicode encoding for fonts.

Audio: Support for wideband including handset / headset, and speakerphone

Codec Support: G.711a, G.711, G.729a, G.729ab, G.722, and iLBC

Speakerphone: Full-duplex speakerphone with acoustic echo cancellation.

Directories Key: Ready access to missed, received or placed calls (plus

intercom history and directories). Incoming messages are identified and

categorized on the display, allowing users to quickly and effectively return calls

using direct dial-back capability. Corporate directory integrates with the

Lightweight Directory

Settings Key: Allows user to adjust display brightness, select background

images (if available), and select ringer sounds through the User Preference

menu. Network Configuration preferences also can be set up (usually by the

system administrator). Configuration can be set up either automatically or

manually.

Services Key: Allows users to quickly access diverse information such as

weather, stocks, or any Web-based information using XML.

Help Button: Online Help gives users information about the phone keys,

buttons, and features.

Speakerphone includes Speaker On/Off, Microphone Mute, and Headset

buttons that are lit when active.

Four-way navigation cluster allows users to scroll vertically and horizontally. At

the center of the cluster is a ‘Select’ button that can be used for selection of an

in-focus item

Display Button Indicates when phone is in power-saving sleep/inactivity mode

(button is lit), and can be used to awaken the display. Inactivity period is

configured by the system administrator.

Internal 2-port Ethernet switch allows for a direct connection to a 10/100/1000

BASET Ethernet network through an RJ-45 interface with single LAN

connectivity for both the phone and a PC. System administrator can designate

separate VLANs for the PC and phone, providing improved security and

reliability of voice and data traffic.

Headset Port Dedicated headset port eliminates the need for a separate headset

amplifier and allows the handset to remain in its cradle, making headset use

simpler. Both wideband (G.722) and narrowband headsets are supported.


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Volume Control provides easy decibel-level adjustments for the speakerphone,

handset, headset, and ringer. The handset is hearing aid-compatible.

Adjustable Foot-Stand Stand is adjustable from flat to 60 degrees to provide

optimum display viewing and comfortable use of all buttons and keys. The foot-

stand is keyed to match standard wall-jack configurations for wall mounting. .

Expansion Module Support An optional add-on module provides 14 additional

buttons for programming directory numbers or speed dials. Up to two

expansion modules may be used

Multiple Ring Tones: Minimum 24 defined user-selectable ring tones to be

provided. Ring tones may also be personalized.

Support Quality of Service standards.

Language Support: Built-in support for more than 5 languages

Power Requirements: The phone is interoperable with PoE (IEEE 802.3af

PoE). 48 VDC is required; it can be supplied locally at the desktop using an

optional AC-to-DC power supply

. Basic IP Phone Set: Required IP telephone set shall have the following features:

Display: 5 .6-inch (14 cm) high-resolution graphical 4-bit grayscale display (320

x 222) grayscale pixel-based LCD The display provides features such as date

and time, calling party name, calling party number, and digits dialed. The crisp

graphic capability of the display allows for the inclusion of higher value, more

visibly rich Extensible Markup Language (XML) applications and double-byte

languages.

Messages: Access to voicemail.

Directories: Identification of incoming messages and categorizes them on the

screen, allowing users to quickly and effectively return calls using direct dial-

back capability integrated with the corporate directory

Setting Key: The Settings feature key allows the user to adjust display contrast,

select background images (if available), and select from a large number of

unique ringer sounds through the User Preference menu.

Services: IP telephone set allows users to quickly access diverse information such as

weather, stocks, or any Web-based information using XML

Help: The online Help feature gives users information about the phone keys,

buttons, and features. The pixel display allows for greater flexibility of features

and significantly expands the information viewed when using features such as

Services, Information, Messages, and Directory.

Display Button Indicates when phone is in power-saving sleep/inactivity mode

(button is lit), and can be used to awaken the display. Inactivity period is

configured by the system administrator.

Ethernet Switch Internal 2-port Ethernet switch allows for a direct connection


___________________________________________________________________________

-

to a 10/100/1000 BASET Ethernet network through an RJ-45 interface with

single LAN connectivity for both the phone and a PC. System administrator can

designate separate VLANs for the PC and phone, providing improved security

and reliability of voice and data traffic.

Headset Port Dedicated headset port eliminates the need for a separate headset

amplifier and allows the handset to remain in its cradle, making headset use

simpler. Both wideband (G.722) and narrowband headsets are supported.

Volume Control provides easy decibel-level adjustments for the speakerphone,

handset, headset, and ringer. The handset is hearing aid-compatible.

Adjustable Foot-Stand Stand is adjustable from flat to 60 degrees to provide

optimum display viewing and comfortable use of all buttons and keys. The foot-

stand is keyed to match standard wall-jack configurations for wall mounting. .

Expansion Module Support An optional add-on module provides 14 additional

buttons for programming directory numbers or speed dials. Up to two

expansion modules may be used

Multiple Ring Tones: Minimum 24 defined user-selectable ring tones to be

provided. Ring tones may also be personalized.

Support Quality of Service standards.

Language Support: Built-in support for more than 5 languages

Power Requirements: The phone is interoperable with PoE (IEEE 802.3af PoE). 48 VDC is required; it can be supplied locally at the desktop using an optional AC-to-DC power supply

Analog Interface: Analog interface shall be used to allow regular analog telephones / faxes to operate on IP-based telephony networks. It shall have RJ port for LAN connection and RJ for analog devices connection. Analog interface shall support the following protocols:

G.711 G.711A-law G.723.1 G.729 H.323 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 802.1Q VLAN tagging Domain Name System (DNS) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Internet Protocol (IP) Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

Analog interface shall provide but not limited to the following features: Anonymous Call Rejection


___________________________________________________________________________

-

Call forward—on busy Call forward—on no answer Call forward—unconditional Call hold Caller ID Calling Line Identification Presentation Calling Line Identification Restriction Call return Call transfer—Blind Call transfer—Consultation Call waiting Call waiting Caller ID Distinctive ringing Message-waiting-indication (stuttering dial tone) Speed dial

Voice mail

Main Distribution Frame (MDF): MDF shall be used to terminate incoming

PSTN lines – if needed. It shall provide the following facilities:

Possibility of connection, dismantling and isolation of the lines

MDF shall have 110 block wiring

Protection modules shall be installed on the trunk lines’ connectors.

Possibility of tracing faults, testing of all connections and maintaining telephone

network.

Protection of lines from any overload or failure in the lines

The MDF shall be of modular design allowing for extension in blocks having all

the mentioned features.

The capacity of the MDF shall be as indicated on drawings.

Possibility of grouping and cross connecting the lines for trouble shooting and

maintaining of the wiring of the network.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16750 STRUCTURE CABLING SYSTEM

___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

PART 1 GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions,

Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply



This section covers the specifications of the Structure cabling system (SCS)

required for the project to achieve a complete integration for several services over

the same structure cabling system such as Voice, Video & Data in addition to all

other low current systems.

This specification defines the data transmission network requirement provided for

the project. Generally the structured cabling system shall serve the whole project.

Telecommunication closets/cabinets will be distributed all over the project as

indicated on the drawings. Every telecommunication closet will be connected via

fiber optic cables to the intermediate telecommunication closet as indicated on

system riser diagram. The intermediate telecommunication closets will be

connected to the main cross connect cabinet which will be located at the Main IT

room. The main cross connect will include fiber optic patching cabinets and will

provide the required patching to the project core switches.

Generally the cables that will be used will be Cat 6A (500MHz) and single mode

(9/125 ) µmeter, all cables shall be low smoke zero halogen . plenum rated cables

shall be used in plenum areas .

1.3 EXTENT OF WORK

The extent of work covers the SCS as described by the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings, riser diagrams and Bill of Quantities of the project.

Work shall include but is not limited to all labor, equipment, cable networks, connection, testing, training, etc to furnish and install a complete system.

The Contractor shall establish a complete structure cable system including

conduiting, cable tray system, wiring, outlets ,management panels ,cable

organizers ,patch panels, etc. and as shown on the drawings.

The contractor is responsible for pulling cables (horizontal and backbone),

making the appropriate terminations at both ends of the cables at outlets

,consolidation points and in the patch panels telecommunication closets and

provide a complete labeling system along with testing documents for each node

and backbone connection.

The conduit and trunking installation shall be in accordance with the requirements

detailed elsewhere within the specification.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

The provided SCS shall be suitable for type of occupancy as defined by the local

building code and as required by the local authority and by the international

codes.

The contractor is requested to provide all the required equipment, material, component, etc.

which makes the system work as required without any extra cost. The contractor is

responsible for providing even those equipment, and material which are not mentioned in

specifications, and drawings, but necessary for system perfect operation and perfect

interfacing with other systems.


Equipment ,components and installations shall comply with the latest issues of the current provisions of relevant Egyptian Local and State Building Codes in addition to the following international standards and all subsequent addendums ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10 & ISO/IEC 11801 :Ed. 2.1 ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces. EIA/TIA-TSB72: Centralized Optical fiber cabling guidelines.

UL Listing: The system and all its components shall be listed by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. or approved equal.

All System components should be passed the tests as mentioned in the standards.

Certificate of these tests should be submitted.

The relevant Local Building Codes. Standards of local authorities having

jurisdiction shall be considered

SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and

Division-1 Specification Sections:

General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by the contract

conditions indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers

names, photos and catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with

these specifications. This documentation shall be subject to approval and no

equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all equipment and devices,

which are shown on Drawings and those not shown and necessary for system


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

operation and integration

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and

connecting wiring of entire structure cabling system including riser diagrams. Shop

drawings shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all telecommunication closets

indicating U heights, racks dimensions.

- Racks elevations for all telecommunication closets and details for

consolidation points.

- Provide calculations to provide filling ratio of cable trays and conduits .the

filling ratio shall not exceed 40% of cable trays conduits cross sectional area.

- Installation manuals

- Complete description data including UL listing or any equivalent standards for

all system components

- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local representative responsible for

installation, coordination and service

- Compliance sheet item by item providing a comparison between each item

specifies herein and each item submitted and deviations justifications if there

is any.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including

specifications and installations for each type of the structure cabling system.

Include standard or typical riser diagram, operation and maintenance instructions

for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of

system component installed including furnished specialties and accessories.

Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in

accordance with requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.

Instruction Manuals: The Contractor shall provide with the assistance of the system

manufacturer and its authorized, local representative. In addition, one approved copy of

the structure cabling system submittal, complete installation & maintenance

instructions; pertinent system orientation documents and system service, testing, for the

permanent use of the Employer.

Prior Installations Submittals: The Contractor shall submit the following prior to

installation.

- Workshop drawings illustrating the full details of the outlets/ consolidation

points locations, conduiting, and trunking routes

- Documents illustrating the intended termination methodology along with the

used termination tool and cut sheets for both copper and fiber optic cables.

- Certificates from the structure cabling Manufacturer illustrating that the

Installer is certified to perform design, installation and testing for the structure

cabling system.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

- The installer reference with similar projects.

- Proposed schedule for installations along with the used manpower.

- Sample testing documents along with the cut sheet of the cable analyzer,

OTDR and any other testing tool.

- All related technical submittals of cables, patch panels, outlets, modular jacks,

patch cords and connectors for both copper and fiber optic systems along with

the technical cut sheets illustrating the part number of each component and

related testing parameters performance sheets

- Racks details indicating rack size, and all housed equipment sizes.

- Proposed labeling strategy.

After installations Submittals: Upon completion of the installations the contractor

shall provide complete set of documentation including the following

- As-Built drawings indicating the whole structured cabling system pathways

conduits illustrating all details regarding sizes and cable types, Backbone

(riser) & horizontal diagrams, technical description, labeling, color coding, and

the locations for all the Telecommunication closets, indicating any changes

from the workshop drawings (any changes during execution phase shall be

submitted for approval prior installations).

- Testing documents for every node in both hard and soft copies.

- Racks elevation illustrating the housed components illustrating the filling ratio

of each cabinet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and

standards.

The Cat 6A cabling will be considered as the minimum performance

specifications for the horizontal cabling system ensuring a band width of at least

500 MHz.

Special consideration shall be given to higher performance cables in terms of

alien Near End Cross Talk.

Fiber optic cables jackets shall be low smoke zero halogen and suitable for

similar applications and for cable trays installations.

The structure cabling system must satisfy the following objectives:

- Backward compatible to previous categories.

- Open standard that allows products from different vendors to work together.

- Patch cord plug and jack interoperability for modular (RJ type)

connections.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

- End-to-end total solution from single manufacturer.

General Requirements

The structure cabling system products specified in this document shall be

supplied and produced by a single manufacturer.

Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacture of structure cabling products and not

custom designed especially for this project.

The proper installation practices must be considered regarding the bending radius,

pulling strength, appropriate cable ties and length of untwisted conductors…etc.

Manufacture Qualifications: Manufacturing firms should be regularly engaged

in manufacture of Structure cabling systems of type, size and whose products

have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than years. The

manufacturer shall provide performance and component warranties for the

installed structure cabling system for year.

Installer Qualifications: The Installer must have at least years of experience in

installation of similar projects. Installer should be certified from the

manufacturer to design, install and troubleshoot the provided structured cabling

system.

Training: The system manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall

provide, in depth, training to selected Employer's personnel for one week.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Handle the structure cabling system components carefully to prevent damage,

breaking and scoring. Do not install damaged components, replace with new.

Store system components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,

water, construction debris, and physical damage.

RELATED SECTIONS

- General Electrical Requirements

- Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

- Grounding and Bonding

- Raceways, boxes and Cabinets

- Light Current Raceways, Boxes and Cabinets

- Wires and Cables

- Cable Trays

- Electrical Identification


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in writing all his

remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from the

shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise from

coordination between the system and other disciplines.

No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written approval

from the Engineer.

All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies

shall be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.).

A complete as-built draft set of drawings shall be prepared 15 days after completion of

work for approval of the Engineer. The draft as built shall include all previously

approved alterations. Final originals and copies of drawing shall be submitted

according to Division-1, Section "Submittals".

SPARE PARTS

The system shall have the following spare parts:

- 5% of patch panels and consolidation points and fiber optic enclosures.

- 5% of outlets (face plate &modular jacks)

- 5% of patch cords (fiber and copper)

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The structure cabling system supplier shall be responsible for coordination and

exchange information with Suppliers of other systems and equipment which shall

communicate with, in order to achieve the required specified functions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The Structured cabling system design will be based on the requirements, facilities

drawings and documents which will be properly studied complete with this

specification.

The system shall comply with all of the performance requirements for the current and

proposed applications such as Gigabit Ethernet, and achieve complete convergence

between different applications for data, voice, video etc.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

The structured cabling system will be composed of both horizontal copper cables in

addition to fiber optic cables for the backbone of the network.

The Structured cabling system shall mainly be consisting of the following

components:

- Patch panels (for copper and fiber optic cables)

- Telecommunication closets (Racks).

- Management panels

- Horizontal cables (copper cables)

- Backbone cables (fiber optic cables)

- Outlets RJ /Consolidation points

- Patch cords (copper and fiber optic)

The above components shall be provided with the appropriate numbers and

capacities to serve the whole building. The locations of the telecommunication

closets locations are shown on the drawings.

The following general requirements shall be fulfilled in the provided structure

cabling system. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions or additions from

the desired specifications.

2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING STRUCTURE

The horizontal cabling system represents the copper cables running between the

various work area outlets & consolidation points and the corresponding

telecommunication closet.

The work area will contain the outlets including face plates, RJ-45 jacks, the back

box and patch cords.

The horizontal cables shall run horizontally along the floors and ceilings. The

horizontal cabling system shall include conduits, trays, wires, cables and all

necessary accessories for constructing complete network. Patch panels will be

provided to provide the appropriate termination of the horizontal cabling.

Cat /Class E Cables: The cables shall be shielded UTP Category cables and

shall meet the ISO/IEC requirements for Class E supporting Gigabit

Ethernet .the following points shall be considered

- The cables jacket must be low smoke zero halogen.

- Horizontal cabling shall be -pair independently verified for compliance.

- Insulation colors shall be blue, orange, green, brown & white with Color code.

- Each cable must be clearly labeled at both ends.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

- The maximum allowable distance for each horizontal cable must not exceed

m.

- The cable must be suitable for different high speed applications using

simultaneous transmission over four pair such as Gigabit Ethernet

( BASE-TX) Horizontal cables shall be terminated according to the

TIA/EIA wiring pattern requirements.

- Sequential meter marking is required with illustration of the aggregating

length, cable category and the AWG.

Patch Panels: Shielded Category patch panels shall meet ISO/IEC

requirements for CAT component performance to allow the structure cabling

system to comply with all of the performance requirements for current and

proposed applications such as Gigabit Ethernet, BASE-Tx, GbE ,digital

video, analog and digital voice & VOIP applications. The panel must have

universal wiring label to permit field installation to either T A or T B

wiring.

- Cat Patch panels shall be provided at each telecommunication closet to

provide the termination for the horizontal cabling and also patching process to

all outlets and provide the required flexibility.

- The patch panels must be of the same category as the cables those will be

terminated over these patch panels.

- The patch panels shall be inch width rack mounted located in the

Telecommunication Closets and the Main cross connect.

- The patch panels shall be rack mounted standard ’’ with suitable number of

RJ ports.

- The connector shall provide colour code identification for the pins at the rear

of the connector. Patch panel outlets must have each connector, connected

separately. The termination is to be in accordance with the colour code.

Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.

- The installer must avoid any risk of cable pinching or compression during the

installation or termination of the cables

- The installer shall locate the cables in the cabinet with enough slack to enable

the termination of the connectors.

Patch cords:

- Patch cords shall be RJ to RJ cables achieving UTP Cat channel

performance at both ends.

- These patch cords will provide the connection between the patch panel RJ

ports and their corresponding active device port.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

- Patch cords shall be twisted pair UTP Cat .

- Patch cords shall be required to provide the connection from the patch panel

ports to its specified electronic device port and also the connection between

the work area outlets and workstation.

- Patch cords must be of the same category as the horizontal cables to enhance

the overall performance.

- Patch cords must be manufacturer tested and certified Category . Patch cable

assemblies shall be wired to the T wiring pattern.

- Patch cords must be stranded to provide the required flexibility at the cabinet

for high density environments.

- Other copper patch cables shall be provided to interface the incoming outer

services with the active components. Types of interfaces and cables types shall

be coordinated according to equipments manufactures requirements.

Data Outlet:

- The outlets will be located at the work area side and shall be wall mounted low profile angled face plate icon able in addition to the back box along with the RJ jacks.

- RJ jacks will be housed into the outlet, those jacks must be STP Cat A and accept termination wiring according to both T -A&T -B.

- Modular jacks shall be color coded.

- Modular jacks shall be -pair and shall meet the Category performance requirements.

- Consolidation points shall be and port and shall be mounted in corridors . each consolidation point port shall serve two inline retails in general. For big boxes port consolidation point will be used.

Cable Management: Cable management panels shall be provided at the cabinets

with the appropriate numbers to provide a neat management for the cables and

patch cords.

Both horizontal and vertical cable managements must be provided for proper

cable management inside the cabinets along with cable ties.

Cabinets (telecommunication closets): Cabinets will be located at each telecommunication closet and will enclose the patch panels/consolidation points for both the horizontal and backbone cables. The cabinets shall be 19” width and of an appropriate U height to accommodate

the number of the patch panels ,management panels and the switches.

The Telecommunication cabinets shall be wall/floor mounted in such a way to

provide access and easy management.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

Cabinets shall be supplied with power strips, fan kits and earthing kits.

The cabinets must be supplied with the appropriate vertical cable organizers to

provide neat routing for the cables inside the cabinet.

2.3 BACKBONE STRUCTURE

The backbone is represented by the fiber optic cables connecting the various

Telecommunication closets with the main cross connect at the main IT room. The

backbone structured cabling system components shall consist of fiber optic

cables, fiber optic patch panels along with the fiber optic connectors and fiber

optic patch cords.

Fiber Optic Cables: The backbone fiber optic cables shall be Multimode mode

( ) cables that meet or exceed all of the performance requirements for

current and proposed applications such as Ethernet (including Gigabit

Ethernet), ATM, Fiber Channel, FDDI and others, and shall conform to the fiber

performance requirements of the TIA , ISO .

The Multimode cables shall be 50/125 µm core/cladding ratio and having

maximum attenuation of 0.5dB/km @ 850 & 1310nm wavelengths.

All fiber optic cables shall be LSZH. Outdoor cables shall be suitable for indoor /

outdoor applications ,all dielectric construction including water blocked buffer

tube for water penetration .

For distribution cables ,they shall be tight buffered suitable for in building

installations through shafts, cable trays…etc. number of cores are as indicated on

drawings.

Fiber Optic Patch Panels: Fiber optic patch panels shall be provided at the

telecommunication closets and the main cross connect to provide the appropriate

termination for the fiber optic cables.

The fiber optic patch panels shall be LC type, rack mounted.LC/LC couplers

should be installed in the patch panel according to the number of cores terminated

at the patch panel.

The patch panels must be drawer-style, with all steel construction, cable strain

reliefs, cable entries and management rings.

Fiber Optic Patch Cords: Fiber optic patch cords will provide the connection

between the fiber optic patch panels and the corresponding fiber optic port in the

switch.

Patch cords shall be LC duplex from the patch panel side and the other side will

be depending on the switch interface connector type.

Patch cords shall be of the same type of the fiber optic cable.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

2.4 TESTING

Cat Testing: The cables shall be tested & verified to fulfill the ISO/IEC

edition ,TIA/EIA -B. Class E/ CAT requirements. The contractor

has to provide the proposed testing procedure including along with testing

equipment.

The contractor must provide documents illustrating the last date of calibrating the

tester at the manufacturer factory.

The required parameters to be tested according to the TIA/EIA are as following:

- Wire map

- Cable length

- Delay skew

- Propagation delay

- NEXT

- Attenuation

- Return loss

- ACR

- ELFEXT

- Power sum NEXT

- Power sum ACR

- Power sum ELFEXT

Testing results will be provided in both soft and hard copies for 100% of the

nodes. Randomly selected 20% of nodes shall be tested in the engineer presence

and results will be verified with the previously provided results.

Testing shall be performed under normal operation conditions for the building i.e.

in the presence of ambient Electromagnetic interference sources.

Each testing sheet shall indicate the following:

- Cable ID

- Date/time

- Selected testing limits

- Cable type

- Operator name

- Software version

- Limits version

- Used NVP (Nominal Velocity of Propagation)

Model and S/Ns of the main and remote units along with the used adapter type.

Test summary whether it is pass or fail along with headroom result.

Site name along with other details regarding the patch panel ,cabinet and floor

labels.


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

Curves for different parameters for the different pairs.

Fiber Optic Testing: The testing will be required to provide measurements of

the installed condition and overall performance of the entire cabling system.

Testing will be performed taking into consideration Tier of the TIA/EIA

TSB by performing the following measurements for all backbone links

Performing OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) testing regarding

irregularities such as severe bend and assuring uniformity of cable attenuation

and connector insertion loss.

The tester shall have integrated OLTS along with OTDR functions to perform

loss/length certification measurements, OTDR auto analysis and end face

inspection.

Documentation for all end faces is a must, the connector end face has to be shown

on the testing sheet.

Power budget calculations shall be provided with testing documents

Testing shall be performed at 1310 & 850 for Multimode mode

Testing results should include the following:

- Date of Calibration

- Cabling link

- Test wavelengths

- Fiber identification.

- Fiber length

Fiber attenuation

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions under which the network shall be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an

acceptable manner.

INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

Install electrical identification in accordance with requirements of Section

"Electrical Materials and Methods".


___________________________________________________________________________

16750 -

INSTALLATION OF THE STRUCTURE CABLING SYSTEM

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work of the Contract

shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trade.

System manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to this authorized

local representative to:

- Coordinate the selection of components

- Supervise the installation of the complete network.

- Perform a complete functional test of the system.

Install the system as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions and complying with referenced standards of installation.

Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Color code

wiring and install per manufacturer’s point-to-point wiring diagram.

Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the Engineer.


Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment panel under

manufacturer's supervision.

System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation

only, pre-approved by the Engineer.

Prior to final acceptance of the system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence

of the Contractor, Employer's representative and Engineer's representative, test

each extension device.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16755 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM

__________________________________________________________________________

16755-1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General

Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1

Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

Bill of quantities

Related section

1. Grounding section 16452

2. conduit and fitting section 16110

3. Basic materials and methods section 16050

4. Cable trays section 16114

5. wires and cables section 16120

.

1.2 scope of work





Start up system

Programming system according to required function and

specification


documents






This section covers audio visual systems working at Conference Room

The system shall be consisting of:-

Audiovisual sources

Main distribution equipment including cross-point

matrix

main display screen LCD type

Touch screen main control system

The system shall be used intelligent control system to distribute Audio/ Visual sources

to main LCD displays and manage them by touch screens


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-2

1.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Equipments at conference room shall consist of:-

Audio/ visual sources

1. DVD player

2. Double auto revere cassette

3. AM/FM tuner with antenna

4. multi CD player

Intelligent control and distribution system

1. Matrix controller 16 inputs X 16 outputs cross

point with built in scalar

2. Touch screen with main controller

Display units

1. LCD 64" Monitor

Audio system

1. Mixer Preamplifier

2. Power Amplifier

3. Feedback Suppresser

4. Digital Equalizer

5. IR audio conference system


Equipment and installations shall comply with the current stipulations of the local

authorities in the KSA and the standards of:

- Consultative Committee International for Radio CCIR.

- Electronic Industries Association EIA

- International Organization of Standardization ISO

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1

The Vendor should indicate specifically the country of origin of every piece, connector,

cable, software and any part of the solution

General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation indicating the type,

size, rating, style, manufacturers' names, photos, catalog and data sheets for all items

including specifications and installation instructions to ensure compliance with

Specifications.

Submit detailed riser diagram for the system indicating all quantities, models etc..


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-3

Submit Rack details indicating rack size, and all housed equipment sizes.

Submit Instruction Manual: This documentation shall be subject to the approval of

the Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all equipment

and devices, which are indicated by the documents (Drawings, BOQs, etc..).

Shop Drawings: After receiving letter of acceptance with two weeks, the contractor

shall provide detailed shop drawings indicating equipment/ device locations and

connecting wiring of network, detailed drawings of the network and complete wiring

diagrams of all the system constituents, cable size, type and numbers

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of network

equipment installed, including ancillary equipment and furnished specialties and

accessories. Includes standard product maintenance manual


The products specified in this document shall be supplied and produced by a single

manufacturer/supplier, with the exception of Data racks, Floor boxes, conduits, labels,

and trays.

Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience and shall be ISO 9001

and ISO 14001 (Environmental Management) Certified. The entire system component

should be European or American manufactured.

1.7.1 Installer Qualifications: Installer firm shall have at least 5

years of successful installation experience in similar projects.

Installer should be certified from the manufacture for design,

install and maintain the provided system.

1.8 COORDINATION

All interface protocols and required hardware and software needed to submit and satisfy system operation shall be part of this contact

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Provide complete and fully functional Main Audiovisual Distribution System using

materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings and performance as indicated.

Main Audio visual system at conference room shall permit direct connection to RF

audio conference system and touch screen


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-4

Audio visual system shall combine matrix controller to distribute audio/ visual sources

to main LCD's (63" or 17")

Touch screen system shall be used to permit full access and control for all system

components with Graphic user pages

Touch screen controller system shall be interfaced with Lighting Control and HVAC

system

The contractor is responsible of all other related work to have the system work as

specified and to have the required signal level at each IR microphone The scope

includes also all the required equipment and material even though which is not

indicated in the documents. Contractor shall provide all these material to have complete

work without any extra cost.

Design, installation and maintenance shall be carried out by the contractor according to

international standards and instructions in order to complete the work with high

standard and to avoid missing information or maintenance problems.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

2.2.1 Multi CD Player:

CD player Type: rack mounted, high quality, capable of operating

continuously and having the following functions:

1. Direct access to the disks

2. Track programming capability.

CD player Programming: it should be possible to program the CD player

to select from any CD at any order for continuous play

Frequency response 20:20000 HZ

Total harmonic distortion 0.003%

Signal to noise ratio 106dB

Dynamic range 96dB

Power requirement 110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ

2.2.2 Double Auto Reverse Cassette:

Track system 4 track two channel stereo

Heads /deck (1) erase / (1) record

Tap speed Dual speed 4.76 cm/sec 9.52 cm/sec

Pitch control approximately +/- 10%

Frequency response 63 HZ: 16 KHZ +/- 3dB

Signal to noise ratio >79dB Dolby C. CCIR arm

>69dB Dolby B. CCIR arm


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-5

WOW and Flutter >15% WRMS

Distortion <2.5%

Line RCA Input -10dBV, 0.3V

Line RCA output -5dBV, 0.3V


2.2.3 AM/FM tuner with antenna:

Radio Tuner AM/FM: rack mounted high quality, shall be of the latest

design and have digital frequency display, 10 memories minimum and auto

scanning. The tuner shall be of the stereophonic type.

Frequency response FM 87: 110MHZ

AM 540:1600KHZ

Sensitivity FM 2 uV AM 4.5 uV

Noise level FM 60dB AM 45dB


2.2.4 DVD Player / Recorder:


General

Power requirement 110-220 VAC @50/60 Hz

TV format PAL

Audio frequency response 4HZ :44 KHz

S/N ratio 118 dB

Dynamic range 105 dB


WOW and flutter +/-0.001%

Recording

Recording format DVD-video

Recordable discs DVD-recordable

Sampling frequency 3.5MHz

Compression format MPEG


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-6

2.2.5 Matrix Controller:

Matrix switchers used for video and audio routing applications,

including command and control centers at conference room support

multi format output HDTV ,S video and composite video .

Technical Specification:

Video Input / output 16/16

Gain unity

Bandwidth 150 MHz

Crosstalk -50dB @ 5HZ

Switching speed 200ns

Nominal voltage 1Vpp

Impedance 75ohm

Return loss <-30dB


2.2.6 Touch Screen main controller:

Control System shall utilize a Motorola processor at no less

that 257 MIPS.

Control System shall include [3] RS-232/422/485 Ports.

Control System shall include [8] IR/Serial Ports for IR probes.

Control System shall include [8] Isolated Relay Ports

Control System shall include [8] I/O Ports.

Control System shall include [1] Cresnet Port.

Control System shall include a 10/100 Base T Ethernet Port

that supports TCP/IP connection

Control System Processor shall utilize a real time, event

driven, multitasking,

High speed processor shall communicate directly with

Ethernet, control

ports and proprietary control network utilizing high-speed,

parallel bus

Infrastructure .Control processors that communicate via a

serial bus shall not be accepted.

Control processor shall contain 36 MB of memory.

Support internal communications speed via two, independent

Communications busses First control bus speed shall be at

least b/s, second control bus speed shall be at least 300 mb/s.

Full API (Applications Interface) directly to control system via

TCP/IP for

Patent pending Network Analyzer to continuously monitor the

integrity of the Cresnet network for wiring faults, marginal

communication Performance, network errors

Support RS-485 token passing network with data

communication for a minimum distance of 5000 feet.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-7

Allow proprietary network expansion via Ethernet or RS-232

ports, which can allow for high-speed network acceleration.

Control system shall support object-oriented logic based

programming

Programming types are supported to run simultaneously and

integral to each other.

Control system manufacture shall supply Windows-based

graphical

Programming software for drag and drop object oriented

programming for the control system operation.

Programming software, which is self-documenting in that it

generates a symbolic flow diagram printout from the system

program.


2.2.7 Touch Screen:

Touch panel must have a minimum resolution of 640x480

pixels; lower resolutions shall not be accepted.

Touch panel shall have a 10.4” active matrix LCD display

with 65,536-color palette and 16 bit non-palette graphics.

Passive matrix displays or touch panels with less than a

64,000 color palette, and not supporting 16 bit non-palette

graphics, shall not be accepted.

Touch panel and associated programming tools, by same

manufacturer, shall provide a native/onboard graphic library

supported by a Synapse image rendering algorithm feature,

which shall provide for improved/high-resolution graphics

(such as native anti-aliased 3D buttons, graphics, and text,

with embossed, beveled and fringed features) without the aid

of 3rd

Party graphic development software.

Touch panel must support memory of 8MB for flash and 8MB

for DRAM.

Touch panel must support graphic animation on a variety of

object styles.

Touch panel shall have stereo audio input supporting balanced

or unbalanced signal formats. Touch panel shall allow line-

level audio mixing, amplification, and volume control, with

playback through built-in speakers, or through a built-in

headphone jack.

Touch panel shall have built-in microphone with line level

balanced audio output.

Touch panel shall display NTSC/PAL/S-VIDEO video inputs.

Video Input connections shall support balanced or unbalanced

signal formats. Video inputs shall display full screen or in user

defined windows (scaled video).

Touch panel shall be an integrated unit.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-8

Touch panel shall automatically detect/synch NTSC/PAL

video formats

Touch panel shall display S-VIDEO inputs separated into

luminance and chrominance components.

Touch panel shall have built in Time-Based Correction for

increased stability of video/graphics display.

Touch panel shall have RS-232 Port for touch-coordinate

transmission

2.2.8 LCD Main Display Unit:

LCD 63" technical specification

Screen size 64" diagonal

Type TFT type

Pixel count 1366 X 768

Contrast ratio 10,000:1

Display colors 1.07billion color

TV standard support PAL

Video input Video X 1,S-terminal X 1,

Components X 2

RGB mode VGA,WVGA,SVGA,XGA

Brightness 1000 cd/m2

Computer inputs RGB 15 pin connector

Antenna input F-type connector

External speaker output MAX output 10W+10W

Audio inputs RCA terminal

Audio outputs Stereo RCA type analog

Power sources 110-220Vac@50/60 Hz

2.2.9 Mixer Preamplifier:

Flexible 2 mono & 4 stereo inputs and 1 stereo & 2 mono output.

Each input signal can be assigned to each of 3 outputs.

Stereo output can be divided among two mono output channels.

Depending on level reading, mono input may be selected as either

mic or line.

Built-in limiter circuit prevents damage from overloads.

Selectable internal hi-pass filter (HPF) switch.

Peak indicator prevents signal clipping.


Frequency response 20Hz: 20KHz (+1, -2 dB)

Total harmonic distortion less than 0.01 %


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-9

Noise level MIN stereo output >-105dB

Noise Level MIN Mono output > 98dB

Noise Level Max stereo output < -94dB

Noise level Max Mono output < 95dB

2.2.10 Power Amplifier:

The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the

following facilities:-

Rated output power : 2 X 60W

Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter,

Mains ‘on’ indicator lamp,

Input sensitivity : <0.77 V

Frequency response : 50: 20000 HZ

Total harmonic distortion : <0.5% at range between 50:20000 HZ

Input protection against overload,

Volume, bass and treble controls,

Balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker

connections,

Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply

connection,

AC and DC fuse protection,

Standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each

input and terminals for loudspeaker output.

Rack mountable

2.2.11 Equalizer:

14 filters on ISO 2 / 3 octave centre frequencies from

40Hz to 16 kHz.

Continuously variable independent 6dB or 12dB boost

or cut at each channel's centre frequency.

Active band-pass / band-reject summed in parallel filters

with minimum phase shift.

Noiseless centre detent slide controls with precision

calibrated linear scales.

Continuously variable high-pass filters with wide

control range.

EQ In / out switch for manually bypassing equalizer.

Automatic EQ bypass circuitry activates at power loss.

LED peak indicator monitoring of input and output

levels, for proper gain structuring.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-10


1- Performance

Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz (+1.0, -2.0dB)

Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 0.01% at 1kHz, all

sliders at 0 position, rated output

Hum and Noise -98dB (EQ in, IHF-A, all sliders at

0 position).

2-Input & Output

Input Input Impedance: 30k Ω (Input level control

set at 0 position)/ Rated Input Level;

+4dB* (Input level control set at 0

position)/ Maximum Input Level; +32dB

(Input level control set at -12dB)

Output Output Impedance: 1k Ω/ Rated Output

Level; +4dB"/ Maximum Output Level;

+20dB*.

3-Power

Power Requirements AC mains 220 VAC , 50Hz

Power Consumption 13 watts (220-240V version)

2.2.12 IR Audio Conference System:

1- Main control unit

The configuration of the unit shall be facilitated by an easily readable

LED display and status lamps. The display shall be backlit. An easy-

to-use button and rotary switch panel provides access to the unit.

The unit configuration shall be able to protect using a PIN

Code With proper installation configuration, the unit shall be able to

provide intended functionality without end-user

Assistance The unit shall provide the connection of up to eight High

Frequency Infra-Red transmission units.

The wire-less transmission of audio shall be in full duplex using

analog FM modulation with carrier frequencies in the

2 to6 MHz range Line-level audio in- and outputs shall be provided for

the transmission of audio to external equipment and the reception of

audio from external equipment. Balanced audio in- and outputs are to

be facilitated using industry standard XLR connectors. Unbalanced

audio in- and outputs are to be facilitated using industry standard 1/4”

Tele connectors.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-11

An Insert connector shall be provided for external audio processing of

the delegate microphone signal.

The unit is to be powered by a safe, low level, direct current voltage

using an external power converter with input range (220-240VAC).

System power shall be operated using a single switch on the unit front

panel.

Unit functionality should be easily fielded upgradeable via firmware

updates. The unit shall provide an activation time of microphones to be

less than 1 second (Delegate Unit dependent), support up to three

simultaneously active microphones, and provide an automatic first-in-

first-out speaker list in the situation of no available speaking channels,

and provide chairman override functionality.

By means of a built-in RS-232 serial port, the system shall be able to

be remote controlled in all major aspects of the system functionality.

Audio feedback reduction functionality shall be built-in.

The unit case shall be of steel, black color and suitable for

Standard 19” rack mounting

2- IR Transceiver unit

Transceiver Unit is an Infra- Red light transmitter and receiver unit.

Designed for ceiling flush mounting it acts like an Infra-Red antenna,

receiving the signals sent from the Delegate Units and transmitting the

signals to the Delegate Units.

The unit is intended for vertical transmission and reception of Infra-

Red light with an 875nm wavelength. Emission power shall be of

harmless nature.

The unit shall transmit two channels and have a broadband Receiver

for analog, FM modulated signals in the 2 - 6MHz

Carrier frequency range

The unit shall be connected to the system using industry

Standard CAT 6, S-STP grade network cables.

3- IR Delegate/Chairman Units

The Delegate/ Chairman Unit are to comply with all relevant CE

regulations.

Chairman unit shall be have priority function to release all delegate

units when it activated


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-12

The unit is to be designed for independent use by a single person and

shall be able to transmit and receive audio in full duplex.

It shall have a built-in speaker and a 3.5mm stereo min tele- connector

for optional headphones use. The volume levels should be

independently pre-settable for speaker- and headphones and the

speaker audio should be automatically shut off when a headphone is

used.

The unit should be fully Wireless using harmless, eavesdrop safe,

infra-red light as transmission media. Infra-red light is to be

transmitted vertically relative to operator's position. Audio and data is

to be transmitted using analog

Frequency Modulation and use carrier frequencies in the range 2 to

6MHz and use infra-red light with 875nm wavelength

The unit power source shall be a rechargeable, maintenance free

battery of industry standard type and be able to be replaced by the end

user. The operating time of a fully charged battery shall be minimum

20 hours of listen only and 8 hours of effective speaking time. The re-

charging time of a fully discharged battery shall be no longer than 14

hours. A low battery indication shall be included using an LED lamp

indicator. The unit should power down automatically 2 minutes after

the loss of the main audio carrier.

Unit functionality should be easily upgradeable via wireless firmware

updates. Operation of the unit shall consist of a clearly organized

buttons operator panel with many LED lamps showing power status,

microphone activity. A volume knob should be easily accessible for

speaker and headphones level setting. The microphone shall contain an

LED lamp for activity indication.

The activation time of the microphone should be less than 1 second

using a single button press. In the situation of no available speaking

channels, the unit should clearly indicate that it has been placed in a

speaker queue using an LED lamp status indicator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions under which the network shall be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable

manner.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-13

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

Install electrical identification in accordance with requirements of Section 16050

"Electrical Materials and Methods"

3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work of the Contract shall be

closely coordinated with the appropriate trade.

Equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to this

authorized local representative to:

- Coordinate the selection of system equipment.

- Supervise the installation of the audio visual equipment.

- Perform a complete functional test of the networks.

- Submit a written report attesting the proper operation of the

completed networks.

Install the network as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer’s written instructions and complying with referenced standards of

installation.

Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Color code wiring

and install per manufacturer’s point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine exact number

of wires for each device installed. Connect each device with sufficient wiring to

complete its intended operation.

Where there are number of power requiring devices, provide extra or larger size wiring

to alleviate voltage drops which makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which

it was designed. Determine above with manufacturers representative while equipment

is being installed.

Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the Engineer.

Wall mounted equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer

recommendations.


Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment panel under

manufacturer's supervision.

System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation only,

pre-approved by the Engineer.


__________________________________________________________________________

16755-14

Prior to final acceptance of the system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence of the

Contractor, Employer's representative and Engineer's representative, test each extension

device.

3.5 TRAINING

Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall provide, in depth,

equipment service and programming on site training to selected Employer’s personnel for

one week.

3.6 WARRANTY

The system shall have a 2-year manufacturers warranty against product defects. This

warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period

of 1 year or as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do not

provide a standard 2-year warranty, must provide an extended warranty with their bid

package.

END OF SECTION

SECTION PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

_____________________________________________________________________

-1

PART GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including

General Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and

Division Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

Bill of quantities

Related section

. All section related to Public address system with fire alarm

system

. Grounding

. Conduit and fitting

. Basic materials and methods

. Cable trays

. Wires and cables

SCOPE OF WORK





Start up system


specification


documents


Integrate with fire alarm system




DESCRIPTION OF WORK

All areas are used for sound shall have loudspeakers.

Locations of speakers shall be at positions, which make them cover the

intended fields of hearing.

System will be used as evacuation system in case of emergency to

activate digital recording massage to the specified fire alarm zones and

has priority function to override any music sources


_____________________________________________________________________

-2

There are call stations at receptions and information with appropriate

number of zones to be used for paging

Equivalent digital system with main and sub controllers can be used to

achieve higher level of sound intelligibility and quality.

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIALS

Matrix Controller

Power Amplifier

Double auto reverse cassette unit

Multi CD player ( cartridge)

AM/FM tuner

Digital pre-recording massage

Ceiling Loudspeaker

Emergency Power Supply

Equipments cabinet and rack

Cables and accessories


National Life Safety Codes

Electronic Industries/Telecommunications Industries

Associations (EIA/TIA) RS (Sound System)

SE A (amplifier for sound equipment) SE

(Speaker for sound equipment)

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

National Fire Protection Association

NFPA National Electric Codes

NFPA National Fire Alarm Codes

NFPA Life Safety Code

SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract.

General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by the

contract conditions indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number,

manufacturers' names, photographs and catalogue data sheets for all items

to ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be

subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered

without this approval for all equipment and devices

1.6.2 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and device

locations and connecting wiring of entire public system, including riser


_____________________________________________________________________

-3

diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and the size, type

and number of all conductors including signal strengths and cable loss


- Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and signal strengths

of the different equipment, the size of wiring and signal loss


- Complete description and data including UL listing, or equivalent, for

all system components

- Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including

specifications and installations for each type of equipment. Include

standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, operation and maintenance

instructions as inclusion of the maintenance manual.

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type

of equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories.

Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in

accordance with requirements of Division and other relevant

documentation

Calculations:

. Backup battery calculation.

. SPL at typical locations. Include worst case locations. Coordinate

with the Engineer

. Amplifiers: power rates calculations

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.7.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the sound shall be

regularly engaged in manufacturing of system of type, size and

characteristics similar to those required for the project and whose products

have been in satisfactory service in similar projects for not less than five (5)

years.

1.7.2 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factory-

authorized sales and service representative to perform the work of this

section.


installation experience of systems similar to that required for the project.


_____________________________________________________________________

-4

COORDINATION 1. Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with various

system under this contract such as fire alarm system 2. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and

suspension system with other construction that penetrate ceiling or is supported by them , including light fixture , HVAC equipments, partition assemblies, fire alarm equipments

PART PRODUCTS

GENERAL

System Functions: System shall be used for broadcasting background

music and fire alarm notification signals as well as voice

evacuation messages

System shall include the following:

1. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal source. .

2. Sound sources shall be routed and amplified through amplifiers,

etc., as shown on the drawings.

3. Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded

over all speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.

4. Pre-recorded messages via the permanent digital record system

are to be automatically switched in, and are to have automatic

priority over the external source introduced previously.

5. Reproducing high-quality sound from source that is free of noise

and distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment

operation including standby mode with inputs off; and output

free of non uniform coverage of amplified sound.

6. By using the microphone, operator is to have priority over audio

or message cassette inputs within the system.

7. Standby amplifiers takeover.

B. Expansion Capability: Increase number of loudspeakers in the

future by 25 percent above those indicated without adding any

internal or external components or main cable conductors.

DESIGN PARAMETERS

System is to be designed for background music and voice evacuation,

with uniform and acceptable level of speech intelligibility. Design

shown on the Drawings is based on system design criteria below, which

are to be checked for performance before implementation. Alternative

system design is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval, with

specification, characteristics, aiming and mounting positions of


_____________________________________________________________________

-5

loudspeakers and full particulars of calculations and equipment

selections. System design is to be based on the following criteria:

1. Average sound pressure level: 80 to 85 dB with respective

amplifiers set at 50% of maximum volume.

2. Intelligibility STI: better than 0.5.

3. Sound diffusion level: 10 to 15 dB (A) above ambient noise level.

4. Total harmonic distortion.

a. electronic: less than 1% at specified output level

b. acoustic: less than 3% at specified output level

5. Sound pressure level: 80 to 90 dB A.

6. Frequency response: +/-3 dB over 300 Hz to 10 kHz.

7. Uniformity of coverage: +/- 3 dB (0.5, 1, 2 and 4 kHz).

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

2.2.1 Matrix controller

Main matrix controller shall be modular type with facility to expansion

and modified by modular cards for zones and input sources, matrix

capacity shall be adequate to project requirements. The matrix built in

DSP (digital signal processing) with parametric equalizer with

following specification:

Input Voltage : 110-220V@50/60HZ

Audio Input : shall be adequate to project

Requirements

Module Slot : analog input /digital input / mix output /digital

output

Frequency Response : 20:20000 HZ

Total Harmonic Distortion : 0.008%

S/N ratio :90dB

Crosstalk :over 64dB

Control input/output : RS-232C-control input - control output

Control input not less than 4 dry inputs

Control relay output not less than 4

Remote volume control

2.2.2 Power Amplifier

The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the

following facilities :-

Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter,

Output power: more than speakers power rating sum by at least

25%


Input sensitivity : <0.77 V



_____________________________________________________________________

-6

Total harmonic distortion : <0.5% at range between 50:20000

HZ

Input protection against overload,

Volume, bass and treble controls,

Balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker

connections,

Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply

connection,



input and terminals for loudspeaker output.

Rack mountable

2.2.3 CD Player

CD player Type: rack mounted, high quality, capable of operating

continuously and having the following functions:

1. direct access to the disks

2. Track programming capability.

CD player Programming: it should be possible to program the CD

player to select from any CD at any order for continuous play

Frequency response 20:20000 HZ


Signal to noise ratio 106dB

Dynamic range 96dB

5 cartridge at least

2.2.4 Radio Tuner AM/FM

Radio Tuner AM/FM: rack mounted high quality, shall be of the latest

design and have digital frequency display, 10 memories minimum and

auto scanning. The tuner shall be of the stereophonic type.

Frequency response FM 87: 110MHZ

AM 540:1600 KHZ

Sensitivity FM 2 uV AM 4.5 uV

Noise level FM 60dB AM 45dB

2.2.5 Double Auto Reverse Cassette :

Rack mounted high quality, auto-reverse/auto-stop, 4-track,

mono/stereo type with speed tolerance of 10%, complying with IEC

94 or other approved standard and accepting standard cassettes

through front panel selector switch.


_____________________________________________________________________

-7

Recorder Heads And Motors: recorder is to have separate heads for

play, record and erase functions, three motors (two for fast winding in

two directions and third for record/playback at two speeds), and noise

reduction system.

CONTROLS: recorder is to have fast wind and re-wind, playback,

record and stop controls, two illuminated peak level indicators, pause

control, resettable digital counter, level controls for recording and

play-back, on-off switch, microphone/headphone sockets and radio

sockets and radio and line inputs.

Minimum requirements Characteristics are to be as follows:

Signal/tape noise ratio at highest speed 65 dB

Crosstalk attenuation at 100 Hz better than 50 dB in stereo

Better than 65 dB in mono

distortion (max.)from recording amplifier: 0.2%

frequency response : 20 : 20000 HZ

2.2.6 Digital pre-recording Massage Module

Digital massage recorder can store massage not less than 4 messages

stored in the internal EEPROM, without the need for data retention

battery backup. Each message can have any length within the total

available capacity. A PC uploads messages and configurations via RS-

232 to the unit, which can then operate without a PC. The standard

WAV-format is used for messages

The unit has 12 contact closure trigger inputs for announcements.

Each can be configured for a sequence of up to four messages from

those available. In this way messages can be used in combination with

other messages, optimizing flexibility and storage space usage.

In case of fire the FACP send fire signal from output relay module to

activate the digital recording massage to evacuate the stored massages

to all zones and return feedback signal indicate status of system

2.2.7 Ceiling Loudspeaker

Ceiling loudspeaker comprise a 100 V line matching transformer, high

quality loudspeaker, metal front grille and mounting plate with locking

clamps.

power rating 6/3/1.5 watts

frequency response 80 Hz to 20 kHz

sound pressure level at 6w 90dB

rated voltage 100V


_____________________________________________________________________

-8

maximum insertion loss <0.5dB


_____________________________________________________________________

-9

2.2.8 EQUIPMENT RACK

A. Equipment Rack: House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment in

standard 19-inch racks.

1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by

side, and arrange controls symmetrically.

2. Power-Supply Connections: Approved plugs and receptacles.

3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they

are accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with

each item removable from rack without disturbing other items or

connections.

4. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front

of rack is occupied by panels.

5. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use

louvers in panels to ensure adequate ventilation.

6. Finish: Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting

primer.

7. Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master

power on/off switch and pilot light; and with socket for 5-A

cartridge fuse for rack equipment power.

8. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.

9. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 300 mm o.c. the full

height of rack, to supply rack-mounted equipment.

10. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied

independent of vertical plug strip and located in front and bottom

rear of rack.

2.2.9 Mixer Power Amplifier (at sub sound system rack at restaurant,

cafeterias, training center ,club and housing departments )

The mixer power amplifier shall be fully solid-state, and provided with

balanced floating outputs of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker

connections.

As a minimum requirement, the mixer-power amplifier shall be

provided with the following facilities: -

Power on/off switch,


Rated output 180 W

Microphone input sensitivity :<0.5mV/output impedance

200:600 ohm

High level input sensitivity : <400mV


Total harmonic distortion : < 2 % at range between 50:20000 HZ

Independent mixing volume control for each input,

Master volume, bass and treble tone controls,


_____________________________________________________________________

-10

Three-core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains

supply and earth connection,



input and terminals for loudspeaker output

2.2.10 Cables and accessories

Sound cables shall be shielded type and fire resistance to

consider public address system as life safety systems with all

needed accessories, connectors and junction boxes

PART EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions under which public address System shall be

installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles,

desks, and counters. Conceal cables and raceways except in

unfinished spaces.

B. Equipment installations and cabling shall be complying with fire

codes.

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or

exposed structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure

and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so

designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at

intervals not exceeding mm and not more than mm from

cabinets, boxes, or fittings.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to

terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.

E. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as

recommended by system manufacturer for control functions

indicated.

F. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level,

speaker-level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate

raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate

conductors at least mm for speaker microphones and adjacent


_____________________________________________________________________

-11

parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other

intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by

equipment manufacturer.

G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal

strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and

equipment enclosures.

H. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal

interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

I. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and

apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables

so they identify media in coordination with system wiring

diagrams.

J. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.

K. Floor-Mounting Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles

through outlet covers. Secure outlet covers in place. Trim with

carpet in carpeted areas.

L. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit

conductors from racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than

No. AWG and conductors from microphone receptacles to

amplifiers not smaller than No. AWG.

M. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in

damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install consistent

with requirements of weatherproof rating.

N. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial

connections using tap settings indicated on Drawings.

GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and

to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,

cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate

from power system and equipment grounding.


Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-trained and authorized

service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled

components and equipment installation, including connections,

and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.


_____________________________________________________________________

-12

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test

reports:

. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test

performance.

. After installing public address and music equipment and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with

requirements.

. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program

and page messages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program

inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routing and volume levels

and that system is free of noise and distortion.

. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of

complete system at normal gain settings as follows:

a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and

replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a -Hz

signal. Replace all other microphones at corresponding

connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to

microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.

b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.

c. Minimum acceptance ratio is dB.

. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and

rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of , , ,

and Hz into each preamplifier channel. For each frequency,

measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs.

Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is percent

total harmonics.

. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves

centered at and Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-

band filters to measure level at five locations in each zone. For

spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissible variation in

level is plus or minus dB. In addition, the levels between

locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent

zones must not vary more than plus or minus dB.

. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each

power amplifier at normal gain settings of , , and Hz.

Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies must

not exceed plus or minus d

. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic

address equipment signal ground. Comply with testing


_____________________________________________________________________

-13

requirements specified in Division Section "Grounding and

Bonding."


_____________________________________________________________________

-14

TRAINING

Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall

provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to

selected Employer’s personnel for two weeks.

WARRANTY

The system shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against product

defects. This warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor

shall be warranted for a period of year or as indicated elsewhere in this

specification. Manufactures that do not provide a standard -year

warranty, must provide an extended warranty with their bid package.

END OF SECTION

SECTION IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-1

PART GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,

including General Conditions, Conditions of Particular

Application and Division Specification Sections, apply


Bill of quantities

Related section

. All section related to CCTV with other

system(Voice and data system , fire alarm system ,

Access control)

. Earthing System section

. Conduit and fitting section

. Cable trays section

. Wires and cables section

SCOPE OF WORK


Supply system equipments according to approved list of

materials

Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment

condition


Start up system


specification

Test and commission all system according to related

specification documents


Integrate all other system with CCTV system


Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for

obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction

. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The CCTV System shall be part of Security System to monitor

entrances, exists, lobbies and parking areas.


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-2

The system controls and Monitors shall be located at security

room and to be interfaced with fire alarm system, access control.

The configuration and operation computer shall be used with

video management software.

CCTV will cover main building and shall have number of NVR's

(Network Video Recorder) each can record at least G and

shall communicate Via LAN.

The contractor is required to perform band-width calculation

with framing requirements to assure enough storage capacity for

all the camera.

All areas are used for security surveillance shall have IP color

video cameras, as indicated on the drawings:

Locations of video cameras shall be at positions, which make

them cover the intended fields of vision.

System will be IP Based network so all devices shall contain

RJ interface and working with TCP/IP protocol

Contractor is required to perform bandwidth calculations and

allocation to assure covering all system requirements without

congestion.

INTERFACES

The IP Surveillance System shall be integrated and interfaced to

the following systems:

. Security and Access Control System: The interface with

the Access Control System shall allow the control and the

local surveillance of entrances, gates…. etc. Any breaking

or violation of access provided with an IP camera will

automatically pop up a window on the operator’s screen

. Fire Alarm System: The interface with the Fire Alarm

System shall allow the local surveillance of each fire alarm

zone. The system shall be able to display images as pop up

window from the zone in alarm on the screen of the

System operator. The interface shall be compliant with

NFPA requirements. The PTZ cameras shall automatically

switch to the location of a fire alarm initiation.

. Building Management System: The interface with the

Building Management System shall provide the following

information:


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-3

a. Main System ON,

b. Main System OFF,

c. Main System in Default.

. Structured Cabling Network: The system shall be

interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network to allow

the communication between the Security and Access

Control System, work stations, recording and storage

servers, Network Management System, and all other

interfaced systems through the network backbone

Equipments and Materials

Indoor IP fixed color cameras

Outdoor IP fixed color cameras

. IP P/T/Z ceiling mounted dome color cameras

. CCTV server with Digital Video management system with GUI

(Graphic User Interface) with workstation

. Network Video Recorder

. LCD ” & ”

. Network including conduit cabling, pull boxes and all necessary

accessories.

. REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

Standards to be used is the IEC or other equal and approved codes,

taking into account that network cables with fitted accessories and

connector and wiring have to be of fire rated type in accordance with all

NFPA requirements codes (NFPA and extensions).

. Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards,

which have been developed and published by Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers (IEEE) for data communications industry, but not

limited to:

a. – Network Management Group,

b. – Optic Fiber Technical Advisory Group,

c. – Integrated Voice and Data LAN Working

Group,

d. – LAN Security Working Group,


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-4

1.4.3 Electrical Component Standard: Provide work

complying with applicable requirements of NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code"

1.4.4 CCIR Compliance: Comply with the relevant CCIR

standards or approved equal

1.4.5 UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL

50 and UL 486A or other equivalent standards

1.4.6 IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable

requirement standards pertaining to system and wiring

SUBMITTALS



1.5.1 General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation

indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers'


ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be

subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be

ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which

are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of Quantities.

1.5.2 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment

and device locations and connecting wiring of entire CCTV

system, including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include,

but not be limited to, the following:

- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment

and the size, type and number of all conductors including

signal strengths and cable loss



- Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and

signal strengths of the different equipment, the size of

wiring and signal loss


- Complete description and data including UL listing, or

equivalent, for all system components


system

- Complete system-wiring diagrams for components and



SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-5

- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local

representative responsible for installation coordination and

service

1.5.3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including specifications and installations for each type of CCTV

equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring

diagrams, operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in

the maintenance manual.

1.5.4 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

each type of CCTV equipment installed, including furnished

specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop

drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of

Division-1 and other relevant documentation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the CCTV

shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of CCTV system of



projects for not less than five (5) years.

1.6.2 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a

factory-authorized sales and service representative to perform the

work of this section.


installation experience of CCTV systems similar to that required

for the project.

1.7 COORDINATION

1. Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with

various system under this contract 2. all interface protocols and required hardware and

software needed to submit and satisfy system operation shall be part of this contact

SPARE PARTS

The system shall have the following spare parts for each building:


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-6

- No.2%of fixed IP color cameras c/w lens and power

supply

- No.2% of IP P/T/Z ceiling mounted dome color cameras

PART PRODUCTS

GENERAL

The closed circuit television system CCTV shall be used for

security and operational surveillance using IP color video

cameras.

The CCTV system shall display live color video pictures for

security and operation surveillance in areas indicated in drawings

The CCTV systems shall allow for future extension in number of

cameras and monitors.

Each cameras shall be displayed on monitor according to

conditional events such as motion detection or alarms ….etc

monitoring so as to have all cameras monitored by events .

The operator also may record scenes from any camera by related

IP NVR for periods up to hours per day for days, and shall

retrieve recordings of any past time using time search technique.

It is also possible to select specific camera at specific time to be

displayed on the close monitoring screen.

All cameras shall be equipped with back light compensation

(BLC), automatic bright light limiter and light intensity control

(CCD auto-iris lens), adjustable motion detection.

All fixed cameras shall be supplied through special power supply

adapter or via POE (power over Ethernet).


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-7

Sensitivity of cameras shall fit for clear reproduction of pictures

in maximum and minimum light intensity conditions of each

location.

Lens shall be selected to provide the required field of vision

according to location as indicated on the Drawings.

The Contractor is responsible for selecting the fixing location for

best results.

Monitoring stations of the system shall be supplied from the

project secured source to ensure uninterrupted operation in case

of supply failure.

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

Indoor IP fixed color Cameras:

Color CCTV cameras for indoor use, low voltage AC operated

and supplied through special power supply, equipped for CS lens

mount

The cameras shall have the following minimum characteristics

. image sensor " progressive scan RGB CCD

. angle of view o horizontal

. lenses vari-focal lens auto iris mm

. minimum illumination LUX at F

. video compression MPEG

. resolution variable from x to x

. frame rate frame /s

. shutter time sec to sec

. Image Buffer MB

. IP Address static IP Address as provided by DHCP

. alarm and events event triggered by built in motion

Detection

. network connector RJ for Ethernet

BaseT/ BaseTX

. alarm connector terminal block for alarm input

. power input VDC

2.3 .2 Outdoor IP fixed color Cameras:


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-8

Outdoor fixed camera shall be as indoor fixed camera but shall be

housed in outdoor weatherproof housing

The cameras housing shall provide full protection for

environmental conditions (dust, sun, rain, temperature, etc.) and

shall include sun hood, automatic fan and shall house all attached

accessories of the cameras including the lens.

Housing shall not cause any loss in quality or sensitivity of

pictures

Color CCTV cameras for outdoor use, low voltage AC operated

and supplied through special power supply, equipped for CS lens

The cameras shall have the following minimum characteristics


. angle of view o horizontal

. lenses vari-focal lens auto iris mm



. resolution variable from x to x


. shutter time sec to sec


Detection


BaseT/ BaseTX


. Image Buffer MB


. power input VDC

. Indoor Movable IP color Camera (PTZ):

Movable camera shall be integrated Dome camera have the

following features:


. lenses x zoom auto focus mm : mm




SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-9

. resolution CIF/ CIF / CIF/QCIF


. Pan +/- o.

max speed o /sec

. Tilt o :

o max speed

o/sec

. Zoom Optical X : Digital X total ( X)

. shutter time sec

. Image Buffer MB



Detection


BaseT/ BaseTX


. power VDC W

. . NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND GUI (Graphic user Interface)

The network management system shall be full-featured video management

system allowing users to view and control each camera in the system from

different NVR within the network.

The system shall include built-in video loss detection and system

diagnostic features. Video loss detection alerts operators of a camera

failure. Diagnostic monitoring assists in set-up, programming, and

troubleshooting.

Software shall allow for the activation of specific applications such as

incremental switching mode (cyclic) and connection of alarms, event-

actuated sub-routines, and for preventing or permitting various outputs.

The system shall be equipped with suitable and efficient backup

mechanisms including backup management for archiving and restoring

information.

The system shall provide a Graphical User Interface (GUI) that shall

satisfy the following requirements:

1. A user-friendly operator interface for monitoring and controlling the

system through a Windows environment through the use of a computer

mouse.

2. Multiple, linked graphical maps including site and building floor plans.

Icons placed on graphical backgrounds shall be used to select, control,

and monitor each camera in the IP Surveillance System.


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-10

3. Simple and logical navigation between graphical maps.

4. A master graphic to direct operators to more detailed graphics. The

GUI shall allow the operator to select the master graphic from any other

graphic. Each map shall include camera and monitor icons located within

the graphic area, and shall include icons to allow the operator to navigate

between other areas near the current map.

5. Import of graphics generated by other drawing programs. Include a

conversion program with the system to convert DXF files from CAD

programs into the format used by the system.

6. Graphical map with high quality showing floor details including all

partitions, doors and other major built-in structures.

7. Overview of all incoming alarms, including filtering possibilities and

control of multiple users handling the same alarm.

The system shall provide multi-level password protection and logging

facilities that:

1. Grant and/or deny rights to individual users or groups of users.

2. Restrict the ability to modify the system configuration.

3. Restrict access to video from specified cameras.

4. Restrict access to alarm events.

5. Restrict access to troubleshooting tools such as remote control

functions.

The system shall allow playback and recording of cameras simultaneously.

The system shall allow simultaneous audio recording and playback.

The system shall allow playback with high speed date/time searching, skip

searching, index searching, alarm list searching, and multi-screen option.

The system shall allow playback digital zooming it shall allow the

operator to zoom into a selected area of the image during playback and

video authentication.

The software shall have the flexibility to be programmable for any

recording or playback sequence.

The system shall provide remote P/T/Z camera control through web

server.


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-11

The system shall be capable to notify users about its status and alarms by

sending e-mails to a predefined address using SMTP.

The system shall allow for recording of up to 25 frames per seconds when

connected to PAL cameras.

The software shall provide the ability to limit storage of recorded video

by automatically deleting recorded contents when the information reaches

a pre-defined duration or date. The setting of these parameters shall be

available on a per camera base, allowing for different settings for each

camera.

To secure recorded video from being lost, the system shall allow an

authorized user to manually “lock” recorded material from being erased or

overwritten.

Recording shall be done using standard motion JPEG format without any

modification of the pictures.

The system shall allow a recording quality: JPEG up to 1280 x 1024

pixels, other PAL resolutions include 320 x 240, 352 x 288, 640 x 480

or 704 x 506 depending on the Network Video Recorder.

The system shall allow the export of video recordings in JPEG or AVI

format and any other standard base format to the approval of the

Employer Representatives.

The system shall provide an ability to export single video pictures to JPG

files as well as video sequences to AVI files.

The system shall allow search on time, date or activity/alarm with instant

playback in real time with audio.

The system shall provide the ability to send operational and technical

information using a standard SMTP mail server. To ensure availability, a

minimum of two different mail servers must be definable.

To avoid improper use and configuring, the system shall provide the

ability to define users and passwords for a minimum of three different

types of users.

To ensure availability of video related to an alarm, the system shall

provide a freely selectable pre and post-alarm recording. The duration of

the pre-alarm time shall not be limited.

The system shall provide the ability to link events to selected time only,

i.e. during out-of-office hours.

The system shall be able to select cameras to be recorded including date

& time, title, update rate (real time and/or time lapse).


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-12

Protocols supported, as a minimum: TCP/IP, HTTP and BOOTP.

2.3.4 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER

2.3.4.1- The network video recorder with Internet Protocol (IP) design

shall be a microprocessor-based video processor

2.3.4.2- the network video recorder records video and audio data streams

received over Ethernet networks using the TCP/IP protocol

2.3.4.3- all data of camera received can be storage in internal hard disk or

external hard disk

2.3.4.4- full integration with video management system

2.3.4.5-The unit shall provide operator-definable live filters to record and

trigger alarm events when the light level changes, motion are detected,

The unit shall provide operator-definable filters to search the image

database for light changes, motion, as well as camera, date/time and filter

settings, then display a list of matching video segments.

-The unit shall provide for simultaneous recording, playback, transmitting,

database searching and archiving. Channel of audio and text inputs shall

be supported with required hardware properly installed and set up

according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The network video recorder system must meet the following operating

requirements

. Video recording MPEG /MPEG

. recording frame rate at least frames /sec per

Camera

. Internal Storage at least GB

. extended storage extension hard disk

. Image Quality Super, Normal, Extended Record

. Resolution CIF/ CIF/ CIF

. Video stream at least Mbs

. Video format PAL /NTSC

LCD " & ” technical specification

Screen size " & ” diagonal

Type TFT type

Pixel count X

Contrast ratio

Display colors billion color

TV standard support PAL


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-13

Video input Video X ,S-terminal X ,

Components X

RGB mode VGA,WVGA,SVGA,XGA

Brightness cd/m

Computer inputs RGB pin connector

Antenna input F-type connector

External speaker output MAX output W W

Audio inputs RCA terminal

Audio outputs Stereo RCA type analog

Power sources Vac@ Hz

PART EXECUTION

EXAMINATION



the performance of the CCTV system work.


corrected.

INSTALLATION

General:

. Acceptance of works will be restricted to the

equipment and installations complying with the

approved submittals, approved shop drawings, and the

Employer site Engineer agreement.

. The Contractor has to carry out any site works under

direct supervision of qualified technicians who are to be

well trained with qualified Manufacturer experience.

. Site workmanship of any network component has to

be limited to the layout and fixation, and inter-wiring of

various items of the ready made equipment.

Examination


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-14

. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check

raceways, cable trays, and other elements for

compliance with space allocations, installation

tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other

conditions affecting installation. Proceed with

installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

Wiring Methods:

Install wiring in raceway/conduit except within

consoles, desks and counters, and except in accessible

ceiling plenums where cable-wiring method may be used

Cables used in environmental air space shall be listed for

this use. Conceal cables in accessible ceilings, walls and

floors wherever possible.

GROUNDING:

Grounding Considerations

General

Grounding systems are normally an integral part of the

specific signal or communications cabling system that

they protect. In addition to helping protect personnel

and equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper

grounding system may reduce EMI to inform the

communications cabling system. Improper grounding

can produce induced voltages and those voltages can

disrupt other communications circuits.

Requirements of the EIA/TIA shall be followed.

3.3.1.2 Considerations

a. Ensure that the installation conforms to proper practices and

requirements.

b. Ensure that each cabinet and rack has an appropriate grounding

bus bar that is connected to the dedicated building ground by a

mm ground wire.

c. Ensure that grounding is available for all system equipment and

components and equipment required for maintenance and testing.

d. Ensure that all metal cable trays shall be bonded to ground. Cable

tray shall not be used for a ground path.


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-15

. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factory-


and connection of components and system presetting, testing,

and adjustment.

Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled

and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

Presetting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all





Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system

tests to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of



CCTV Camera Location Test: Support each camera

temporarily at the location indicated and connect to monitor.

Adjust camera location and mounting and substitute fixed lens as

approved to provide required performance at monitor. Adjust

within feet ( m) of those indicated with no change in contract

cost.

Record results of tests.

Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations

and retest until specified requirements are met.

. CLEANING

Clean all system components including camera housing windows,

lens, and monitor screens. Use methods and materials


. ADJUSTMENT

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of

date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in

adjusting the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide

up till requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose

without additional cost.


SYSTEM (IP CCTV)

_______________________________________________________________________

-16

. TEST EQUIPMENT

Shall include the necessary test equipment, on his expense

require for voltage, signal strength video transmission and

reception monitor, bar pattern generator etc.

. TRAINING

Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative

shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site

training to selected Employer’s personnel for two weeks.

. WARRANTY

The FACP shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against

product defects. This warranty shall be for material only.

Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period of year or

as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do

not provide a standard -year warranty, must provide an

extended warranty with their bid package.

END OF SECTION

SECTION INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION

_____________________________________________________________________

-

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract.


IP TV (Internet Protocol Television) is a system where a digital television

service is delivered via Internet Protocol over a network infrastructure,

which includes delivery by a broadband connection.

IP TV system includes unicasting/multicasting system of pay

satellite channels, video on demand, music on demand, video

clips, advertising center and supporting services.


All works including Equipment, workmanship and

installations shall be performed in strict accordance with the

drawings, specifications and latest stipulations of:

- Egyptian Electrical Standard

- EIA/TIA 568 B Performance specification for 4- pair

100 ohm category 6 cabling.

- EIA/TIA 569 Commercial building

telecommunications pathways and spaces.

- EIA/TIA 606 Administration standard for the

telecommunication infra-structure of commercial

buildings.

- EIA/TIA 607 Commercial building grounding and

bonding requirements for telecommunication.

- EIA/TIA-TSB72 Centralized Optical fiber cabling

guidelines.

- EIA/TIA –TSB75 Additional horizontal cabling

practices for open offices

- EIA/TIA-526 Fiber optic system

- The relevant Egyptian Building Codes

- Egyptian safety Standard


- All System components should pass the tests as


_____________________________________________________________________

-

mentioned in the standards.

- Certificate of these testes should be submitted.

The engineer may accept other equivalent international

standards according to a written instruction.

1.4 Submittals


Contract and Division-1 Specification Sections:

General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by

the contract conditions indicating type, size, rating, style,

catalog number, manufacturer's names, photographs and/or

catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with

Specifications.

This documentation shall be subject to the approval of the

Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered without this

approval for all equipment and devices, which are shown on

Drawings and in Bill of Quantities.

Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment

and device locations and connecting wiring of entire television

distribution system, including riser diagrams.

Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

- Complete one-line riser diagram(s)

- Pin to pin connection diagram.

- Provide calculations to support type of cables, system

gain and overall signal loss, in all cable routes from

start to end including network accessories, in order to

prove the adequacy of the proposed equipment to

provide signal strength at outlets.

- Include instructions and installation manuals.


system.

- Complete system blocks diagrams.

- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized local

representative responsible for installation coordination

and service.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including specifications and installations for each type of

equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring


_____________________________________________________________________

-

diagrams, operation and maintenance instructions for

inclusion in maintenance manual.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and

maintenance data and parts lists for each type of equipment

installed, including furnished specialties and accessories, and

circuit diagrams. Include this data, product data, and shop

drawings in operation and maintenance manual; in accordance

with requirements of Division-1 and other relevant

documentation.


Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of IPTV

system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing IP

Television Distribution Systems of type, size and

characteristics similar to those required by the Contract for

this project and whose products have been in satisfactory

service in similar projects for not less than two (2) years.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer

who is a factory-authorized sales and service representative to

perform the work of this section. The installer firm shall have

at least five (5) years of successful installation experience of

TV distribution projects, with at least one project similar the

IPTV required for this project.

Training: Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local

representative shall provide, in depth, equipment service and

programming on site training to selected Employer’s

personnel for one week.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver products in factory original, unopened containers.

Store in clean, dry and shaded space in original containers.

Handle carefully to avoid damage.

1.7 RELATED SECTIONS

The following sections include requirements, which relate to

this section:

Electrical Identification.

Cable Trays


_____________________________________________________________________

-

1.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall put in writing all his remarks, during the

progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from

the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or

devices which arise from coordination between the system and

other activities.

- No execution of alterations is allowed before receiving

written approval from the Engineer.

- All alterations shall be registered and filled by the

Contractors and extra copies shall be submitted to the

involved parties (Engineer, Project manager, Site, etc.).

A complete as-built draft set of drawings and equipment

schedules shall be prepared 15 days after completion of work

for approval of the Engineer.

The draft As-built shall include all previously approved

alterations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

IPTV is received by the viewer through the technologies used for

computer networks.IPTV is often provided in conjunction with Video on

Demand and may be bundled with Internet services such as Web access

and VoIP. IPTV shall be supplied using the closed network infrastructure

(corporate LAN).

Using set-top boxes at end users, TV channels shall be streamed to users

more efficiently than current coaxial cable.

Prefare separate switch for IPTV system .

Network shall allow higher speeds and multiple high definition TV

channels.

IPTV also allows significant opportunities to make the TV viewing

experience more interactive and personalized. The system may include an

interactive program guide that allows viewers to search for content by title

or actor’s name, or a picture-in-picture functionality that allows them to

“channel surf” without leaving the program they’re watching.

System may also include Video on Demand (Void) service allowing a

customer to browse an online movie catalogue, to watch trailers and to

select the movie he wants to watch.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Picture-in-picture


_____________________________________________________________________

-

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

As with a digital satellite television system, an IPTV service

requires a video head end. This is the point in the network at

which broadcast TV and video on demand content is captured

and formatted for distribution over the IP

A head end takes each individual channel and encodes it into a

digital video format, like MPEG 4 which is the most prevalent

encoding standard for digital video.

After encoding, each channel is encapsulated into IP and sent

out over the project Local Area Network (LAN).User shall

install set top box before routing TV channels into his TV

receiver, or can use PC screen directly.

These channels are typically IP Unicast in which only the

selected channel(s) are distributed to the individual connected

users. Also multicast streams could be sent such as

advertisement broadcast service for lobbies, food courts and

open areas.

The IP TV services cabinet will be located in the satellite

headend in the project data center.

IPTV system is made up of following major elements:-

- Satellite and terrestrial reception Head End:-

- Streamer

- Encoder to encode channels to (Pay TV).

- Layer 3 switch and Gigabit Ethernet switch

- Access Network(By others)

- User network(By others)

- System management

N.B: contractor has to co-ordinate with project Local Area

Network for integration.

2.3 System Features

- Easy to use PC based interface

- Auto scheduling

- Auto formatting

- Auto multiple bit rate encoding

- Viewer GUI (graphic user interface)


_____________________________________________________________________

-

- Fully customizable - to fit corporate broadcasting look

- Full controls for the viewer

- Manual and automatic viewer adjustments

- Set top box integration

- Full reporting - audience and media reports - over 180

full - real time reports

- Program Management to create programs from multiple

packages such as an Identification, Content,

Advertising.

- Advertising insert manager

- Video on Demand creation and serving

- Delivery to multiple targets and multiple delivery

speeds from Mobile to Set Top Box at high bit rates on

private multicast networks.

- Payment Gateway for Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Annual

for channels and programs

- Subscription management.

Receiving Dishes

Group of receiving dishes three (3) shall be used.

Dish Antennas shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy

with positive locking of all elements in position. All mounting

and fixing materials shall be protected against corrosion by

heavy anodic coating or corrosion resisting compound.

The antennas shall be fixed to a mast mounted on the roof of

the building. Masts shall be heavy-duty hot dipped galvanized

steel securely fixed to the roof so as to ensure resistance to the

strongest winds encountered in the locality.

Dish antennas shall comprise of the following minimum

specification:

Mount with Azimuth/Elevation adjustment

1.2m Fixed C/Ku solid Antenna

Dish Diameter 120cm

Focal Length 33 (68.2cm)

F/D Ratio 0.37

Frequency Range 1.0 ~ 12.75 GHz


_____________________________________________________________________

-

Gain at 4.2 GHz 36 dBi

Gain at 12.2 GHz 44.9 dBi

Efficiency 70%

Reflector Material Galvanized Steel

Finish Electrostatic Power

Coating

Feed Prime Focus

Mount Polar

Max Wind Speed 90 Km (Operational)

LNB Converters

LNB shall comprise of the following minimum specification:

Band: Ku

No. of Inputs: 4

Polarity: V-Hi, V-Lo, H-Hi, H-

Lo

Freq.Range Low band:10.7~11.7

GHz

Highband: 11.7~12.75 GHz

Noise Figure at 20Deg. C: 0.3

Input VSWR: 2.5:1

Input RF level: -100 to -55 dBm

Image Rejection Ratio: 45dB

Output Frequency: Low band:950-1450

MHz

High band: 1100-2150 MHz

Power Gain: 56~65 dB

Output Impedance: 75 ohms

Operating Temperature: -40Deg.C to + 50Deg.C

Relative Humidity: 100%

VHF/UHF Multi-band Antenna

Elements VHF/UH

F, UHF

(48)

VHF UHF


_____________________________________________________________________

-

Reception

Range/Channels

E5-12 21-69

L05-10

174-230 MHZ

470-862 MHZ

Maximum Gain –

dB

10 15

Back/Front Ratio -

dB

22 220

Half Power Beam

Horizontal

49º 38º

Wind Loading 260 260

Cable Connection 75/300 Ohm

HEADEND Equipment

Programmable modular IP-Streamer units for Digital Satellite

Free-to-Air channels shall be used in the head end equipment

in addition to one Satellite Multiplexer unit for each four

Satellite Signal inputs.

IP GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Products REE Channels ncrypt Encode

Total Streams 10TV 20TV 1 analogue

Clear Streams 10 20 NA

Encrypted Str. 0 20 NA

Transponders 2 4

Technical Parameters

System Linux

Network 100 Base-T Ethernet interface

Output format MPEG2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP

Output bandwidth 50 Mbit/s Average (10 TV Channels)

Multiplexing/ ISO/IEC 13818-1 and ETSI 300 468 compliant

Networking protocols Unicast & multicast with IPv4 or IPv6 protocols

Format DVB

Modulation QPSK


_____________________________________________________________________

-

Technical Specifications

FREE/MXC/MXP ENC

QPSK demodulator MPEG2 encoder

LNB F type input Composite RCA and SVIDEO input

C & Ku band support Formats :PAL/SECAM

RF input level: -65 to -25 dBm MPEG2 format:720x576

25 pictures/sec; 24 bits

input frequency: 950 to 2150 MHz

Symbol rate: 1 to 45 MS/s, SCPC and MCPC support

Supports LNB 14/18V / OFF max 400 mA; 22 KHz,

band switch control (DiSEqC 1.0)

Size: 2U Rack

Power 100-220V/50 Hz

Decryption

Only for IP Stream MXC and MXP

Decryption methods for VIAACCESS, MEDIAGUARD, CRYPTOWORKS,

IRDETO

Support for PCMCIA Consumer modules allowing for the decryption of 4 ES

i.e. 2 TV streams (IP stream CS-MXC)

Support for PCMCIA Professional modules allowing for the decryption of 20

ES, i.e. 10 TV Streams (IP Stream CS-MXP)

Software

The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements

for all software related to all parts of the project:

- Contractor shall supply original software media. No

copies shall be accepted or installed at any time.

- Contractor shall supply original software licenses from

software supplier. No licenses issued by the contractor

shall be accepted.

- All software license agreements shall be in the name of

The Commercial Real Estate Company.

- Configuration: It is recommended that if changes are


_____________________________________________________________________

-

required, to be done

- Through software configuration and not customization

or new development.

- In case the contractor chooses to offer specific feature

through new software

Development. The contractor must provide the software media

for all customized software if any.

IP-Stream: Broadcasts digital streams without signal recompression decryption of

encrypted steams

IP-Supervisor: Web Interface for stream monitoring

IP-Admin: Web Interface for the management of TV and radio

channel specifications.

Distribution System

The system shall comprise of the following items

A. COAXIAL

CABLES

Inner Conductor 1.13 mm

Characteristic Impedance 75+3 Ohms

Max. Attenuation (20 C): 14.6 dB/100m

(at 600 MHz)

Screen:

Copper/Aluminum Foil and

tinned copper

braid

Screening Efficiency >90 dB

Dielectric: Foam

Polyethylene

Loop Resistance Ohm/Km. 30.5

Propagation Factor 0.85

Cable Connectors

75 ohms connectors, joining connectors, Coaxial cables,

Outdoor Splitters

IP Distribution


_____________________________________________________________________

-

IP Streams will utilizes the Data Network to transport the

streams from IP headend system to Interactive cards (STB) at

end users.

Grounding: To prevent accumulation of static charge on

antenna supporting structure, it shall be grounded by

connecting a heavy ground wire to the system earth (metal

stake driven into the earth). Grounding of the mast is also

essential.

Accessories: The cable networks shall include all necessary

accessories.

All accessories shall operate at the system frequency range

which covers the required band of frequencies.

Accessories shall have the minimum gain loss and shall

provide sufficient isolation on return loss characteristics.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions under which Television

Distribution System shall be installed. Do not proceed with

work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

Install electrical identification in accordance with

requirements of Section 16195 " Electrical Identification".

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM

MATERIALS

Install wiring, raceways or conduits electrical boxes, cables

and fittings in accordance with Section 16100 "Raceways,

Boxes and Cabinets”.

Install wiring of signal circuits and power limited circuit in

raceways or conduit or exposed on wall or ceilings when

properly protected. Use conduits for runs through floors or in

shaft ways to a height of 2.3 m above floor.

Install cables using special stripping tools which do not harm shields

and insulators. Use special gripping tools and do not use solder type

fittings and connectors.


_____________________________________________________________________

-

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEM

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other

work of the Contract shall be closely coordinated with the

appropriate trade.

Equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance

to his authorized, local representative to:

- Coordinate the selection of system equipment.

- Execute field strength tests for all frequency bands to be

received by the system (VHF, UHF, Ku, C, etc..) .

- Perform complete functional tests of the system at all

outlets including signal strength, reflection coefficient, etc.

- Submit a written report attesting the proper operation of the

completed system.

Install Television Distribution System as indicated on

Drawings in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and comply with the standards of

installation.

Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's

requirements. Color code wiring and install per

manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine

exact number of wires for each device installed.

Connect each device with sufficient wiring to complete its intended

operation.

Where there are number of power requiring devices, provide

extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops which

makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which it was

designed.

Determine above with manufacturers representative while

equipment is being installed.

Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the

Engineer.

Equipment cabinets shall be installed in a special room for the

Television Distribution System and shall be arranged to

permit easy servicing of the different parts.

Cable bearers shall be installed on walls wherever needed.

Wall mounted equipment shall be installed according to the

manufacturer recommendations.


_____________________________________________________________________

-

Power supply distribution board shall be installed in an

arrangement, which does not affect the safety of equipment

and cause no interference with the telecommunication system.

Air-conditioning shall be provided to the room if the

Television Distribution System stable operating conditions

and design considerations, stated by the manufacturer, require.

Fresh air supply to the room shall be highly filtered to prevent

the dust from entering equipment.

Powerful and even distributed illumination for the room of the

switching equipment shall be provided to permit easy view of

all components.

Equipment room shall be fitted with dustproof doors and

windows.

Ambient conditions shall be considered in the design of this

room.


Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment

panel under manufacturer's supervision. Complete

connections between cabinets and panels utilizing

Manufacturer's technicians.

System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for

function and operation only, pre-approved by the Engineer.

- Prior to final acceptance of the system, the manufacturer of

system shall, in presence of the Contractor, Employer's

representative and Engineer's representative, test each

extension device.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16900 CENTRAL CONTROL &

MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS)

_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. The Central control and monitoring system (CCMS) specified under this section shall

be totally electronic solid-state, employing 100 digital pulse transmission of all signals

and using computer oriented digital technology to ensure long life and low

maintenance costs to be consistent with the projects life cycle costing concepts. The

system must be a standard with the manufacturer to ensure ongoing parts availability

and trained technical support.

B. The installation must include all push buttons, indicators, switches, pilot indicators,

digital and analogue value displays, transmission line interface equipment and software,

etc., to make up a completely operable system. The installation shall have the capacity

to handle the points specified in the input/output summary plus 25% additional. CCMS

must be designed in a modular fashion to ensure future expansion capability whether it

be additional data gathering panels (DGPs) or central console function capability. The

CCMS is specified herein to help ensure proper and efficient utilization of the

mechanical and electrical systems.

C. The CCMS shall be tolerant of power failures up to one hour duration. On power

restoration, the systems shall automatically come-on-line without operator intervention

or execution of manual re-start procedures. After outages exceeding one hour

duration, the system shall be resettable by the operator who shall be instructed on

procedures to be followed.

D. The CCMS shall be located within the control room at the Generator Building

Allowance shall be made to provide an interface module later on in the future next to

the CCMS CPU in order to transmit selected fire alarm points and security CCTV

points to the Central Monitoring System.

E. The systems shall be equipped to handle all of the requirements for the various

buildings.

F. For each of the various building areas in the project as designated on the drawings and

herein specified, there shall be a mini or micro-computer sub-system consisting of a

central processor unit with man-machine interprogrammable software having assigned

local intelligence to provide the specified control and monitoring functions for the

respective area of the project.

G. The individual area sub-systems shall operate independently on stand-alone on-line

basis to accomplish their respective area control and monitoring functions as specified.

A common data-bus shall interconnect all sub-systems to the central operations

console, to provide central management report logs specified herein, and to permit

central management penetration through the central operations console keyboard of all

sub-system address points for specific data acquisition upon request, for corrective

commands, reassignments, of alarm parameters, re-direction of sub-systems tasks, and

other command, interrogation, monitoring, and alarm functions as specified.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-2

H. The manufacturer of the CCMS shall furnish and install the entire system which shall

include all hardware, firmware, software, and all components and including the entire

wiring system required for a complete operating system as herein specified.

J. The system shall consist of standard components of CCMS manufacturer, regularly

manufactured and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and

components shall have been thoroughly proven in actual use.

K. The CCMS manufacturer shall have officially authorized representation in the

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The manufacturer shall have a factory trained staff to

provide local job-site technical assistance and spare parts availability.

L. The CCMS manufacturer shall maintain a staff of technicians skilled in all phases of the

CCMS system including installation of components, wiring requirements, interface

with sub-systems, system check out and start-up, and implementation of all system

functions as herein specified, for a completely automatic and inter-active system.

M. The manufacturer’s trained staff shall be readily available and shall be fully capable of

system engineering, supervision start-up, commissioning, owner training and

emergency service. Bidder shall manufacture at least 80% of all equipment required to

meet the specification requirements.

N. At the time of bid, the manufacturer shall include in his proposal form a list of at least

four other similar distributed computerized control systems with stand-alone self-

reliant sub-systems, which the bidder shall have manufactured, supplied and installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS:

A. The operating and monitoring functions for each of the “area” sub-systems, and for the

central operations console, shall be as required and as described in this specification

and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Generally the following shall be included.

1. Building environment control including seasonal changeover control.

2. Mechanical equipment operation and malfunction alarms.

3. Electrical switchgear on-off indications and alarms.

4. Fire alarm system status and alarms.

5. Intercommunications between individual equipment areas.

6. Automatic control of selected items of equipment by pre-set program.

7. Electrical energy consumption control of selected equipment.

8. Timed start-stop operation of selected items of equipment.

9. Real-time adjustment of set-point levels.

10. On-off status and alarms from standby generators.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-3

C. For the description of control functions and required signal refer to the design

drawings for Control Sequence Equipment layouts and Schedules.

D. Two separate CCMS systems shall be provided for the following:

1. Switchgear, generator and medium voltage system.

2. HVAC System, pumps and Storage Tanks.

2.02 AREA SUB SYSTEM HARDWARE:

A. All “area” sub-systems consoles shall have identical processor units, operator’s

terminals, power supply units, translator units, floppy disc loaders, standby batteries,

battery charger and cabinetry. Software shall differ only as to individual “area”

applications and their input/output programs.

2.03 SENSORS:

A. All temperatures shall be measured by high precision resistance elements. The sensors

shall be accurate to + 2C in a laboratory-type constant temperature bath. They shall

require no field recalibration.

B. Pressure signals shall be transmitted to the CPU in digital form. Signal conversion from

pressure to digital form shall take place at the pressure sensor or the DGP.

C. Electronic relative humidity sensing shall be provided to ensure fast and accurate system

response for control and indication.

D. The system shall be designed to take standard industrially available transducers of all

types that have 0 to 50 millivolt and 4 to 20 milliamperes outputs. The system shall have

the capability to scale, offset and display the proper analogue value.

E. Digital Sensors: The DGPs shall be designed to accept sensing inputs from devices

with isolated, dry type contacts (no grounds and no voltage) of either the normally

open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) configuration.

F. Differential pressure of air flow switches shall be provided to prove fan operation.

Positive operating status and alarm conditions hall be provided for all 0.75 Kw fans and

larger. Fractional Kw fans may use auxiliary contacts for proof of system operation.

G. Waterflow or differential pressure switches shall be provided to prove operations of all

pumps per the Input/Output summary herein.

H. The system shall have capability of not only alarming abnormal OFF conditions of fans

and pumps but shall also indicate abnormal ON conditions of the same equipment. If a

start command has not been issued from the central console and a piece of equipment is

turned on, the central processor shall alarm an abnormal ON. This abnormal ON shall

also sound the audible alarm and display the alarm ON condition.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-4

2.04 POWER SUPPLIES:

A. A power supply of 127 volt single phase 60 hertz at 20 amps shall be provided by the

Electrical Contractor at operator’s terminal in the respective area control room. A

similar power supply shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor at each of the “data

gathering panel” locations in each specified building.

2.05 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE:

A. The CCMS shall be a completely installed fully operating totally integrated system

consisting in general of a number of “intelligent” micro or mini computer independently

operating sub-systems serving the respective groups of buildings. A central operations

console at the location shown in the service building, all necessary wiring within the

buildings to the respective area console and a system of digital-pulse serial data signal

transmission data-bus trunk cables, installed within underground conduit to interconnect

all area consoles to each other and to the central operations console.

B. The CCMS shall be of distributed computerized control design with 100% digital pulse

type transmission of all signals, distributed software residing in the respective area

consoles to provide completely independent on-line control and monitoring functions in

the respective areas, and permitting overall access to the area consoles through the

central operations.

C. Systems having monolithic type central software design in lieu of the distributed

software design herein, will not be accepted.

D. The sub-system for each area shall include but not be limited to:

1. Micro or mini-computer central processing unit.

2. Operator’s terminal, man-machine interface.

3. Intercom.

4. Floppy disc memory loading and dumping.

5. Standby batteries and automatic charge.

6. Translator to data-bus.

E. Central Operations Console: The central operations console (C.O.C.) in the Services

Building shall include but not to be limited to:

1. Micro or mini-computer peripheral processor unit.

2. Cathode ray tube terminal with keyboard, man-machine interface.

3. High-speed printers of 120 characters per second.

4. Management report log high speed printer.

5. Graphic display projector.

6. Operations software.

7. Floppy disc memory loading and dumping.

2.06 AREA CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT (CPU)



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-5

A. The area central processor unit shall contain the computer, programs and associated

hardware, to perform all the specified functions for the respective area in a fully

integrated and non-interfacing manner.

B. The CPU input/output bus software shall be integrally designed to communicate with

the specified peripherals and data groups. The initial installation shall include all push

buttons, indicators, digital and analogue value displays, transmission lines interface

equipment software of all accessories to make a completely operable system. The initial

installation for the respective area shall have the capacity to handle the address points

specified in the input/output summary or described herein, and 30 percent additional

future points. Future points shall require no executive software program modification

and no hardware modification. Re-assignment of operator terminal data shall be easily

accomplished in the field via single entry at the keyboard.

C. Each DGP and peripheral device connected to the CPU shall be continuously scanned

for proper operation. Data transmission between CPU and peripheral devices shall be

dual transmissions, and failure of any DGP or peripheral device to respond to an

interrogation shall be annunciated. The CPU shall be designed to perform all the data

gathering and processing functions, communicate with all peripherals and exercise the

application packages specified. All data output and program input (keyboard) shall be

direct decimal values with no requirement for operator to have any knowledge of

binary, octal, binary coded decimal arithmetic, or look up table methods.

D. Provide an on-line data base generator to accomplish all data file entry, application

program assignments, group and point assignments, data point deletions, data point

changes, alarm perimeter assignments and peripheral assignments. All assignments shall

be made directly on the keyboard specified hereinafter. Systems requiring remote or

factory programming for these functions will not be acceptable. All programming

specified herein to be keyboard performed shall include direct read and write operation.

Changing program or application package parameters, adding data points, or deleting

data points shall not interfere with data processing. Alarms shall be annunciated and

control programs executed during all keyboard program modes.

E. A digital grade floppy disc unit shall be furnished as an integral part of system, and used

to load the executive program and specified user programs. The cassette interface

system shall be capable of recording the point data file and other keyboard input

parameters. This cassette system shall then be capable of reprogramming the complete

system, using the contractor furnished executive program and the field recorded discs

with no manual keyboard entries required. In addition to the floppy disc unit and

executive program discs, ten blank digital discs for record/playback are to be supplied.

F. The CPU shall cause an hourly test printout log at the C.O.C., proving that all remote

systems and peripherals are functioning properly. At this hourly printout, any system

not functioning properly shall be summarized and noted on the log as non-responsive.

The system shall continuously, and sequentially, scan each connected data group in

search for status changes or contact alarm points programmed reactions, actuated from

the CPU. Status without alarm (monitoring points shall cause no automatic activity at

the C.O.C. printer’s or operator’s terminal when changes of state occur. Status



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-6

monitoring points programmed to initiate event programs upon change of state shall do

so. Status monitoring points shall all be displayed at the C.O.C. terminal and printed

on assigned printer upon demand.

G. Alarm monitoring points going into alarm shall automatically annunciate themselves

audibly and visually on assigned C.O.C. terminals, assigned printers, and assigned alarm

annunciator modules. Alarm points returning to normal shall annunciate modules.

Acknowledgment and supervision of critical alarms shall be as hereinafter specified

under data gathering panels.

H. All analogue sensor scaling, necessary linearising, and square root extraction shall be

done within the central processor. Systems using exterior remotely located hardware to

perform these functions will not be acceptable, unless fully re-programmable through

the central keyboard.

2.07 AREA OPERATOR’S TERMINAL:

A. Each operator’s terminal shall be provided with CRT terminal with keyboard, keyboard

printer, access control and intercom system. The operator’s terminal shall be a floor-

mounted unit fully enclosed and of all solid-state construction.

B. Operator’s Access Control:

1. The CCMS shall be capable of restricting specified operator commands to

specified points by specified operators at a specified device. Inhibitors shall be

removed through the use of a software password a keylock system.

2. An advisory shall be printed in the event that three unsuccessful attempts are

made to gain access into the system with an invalid system access request.

3. A properly entered system access request shall cause the CCMS to output a

message each time an operator gains system access . This message shall

include the operator’s initials in alphabetic characters as well as the time and

the date of system access.

4. An operator input shall be echoed back on the output device associated with

the input device. The operator shall then be able to either execute or abort the

input.

5. The CCMS shall supervise all operator inputs to insure that all inputs are

correctly and properly executed.

6. Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be

executed because of operator input errors.

7. The CCMS shall explain to the operator in words and phrases why the

command cannot be executed. The following explanations shall be provided:

a. The identifier does not exist.

b. The operator is restricted from executing the input and must obtain a

clearance through a password or a keylock system.

c. The command is not appropriate for the type of point being identified.

d. The requested command involves a point which is locked out.

e. The value entered is outside the range for the analogue printed point

specified.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-7

f. The operator request did not contain sufficient information.

g. The point hardware specified is not in communication with the system.

8. Operator inputs executed under valid system access requests shall be recorded

on a hard copy device. This record shall contain the operator input and the

time and date of input execution.

9. An operator command shall be provided to reinhibit all operator input

capability that was previously available by valid system access requests.

10. The CCMS shall automatically reinhibit all operator input capability that was

previously availability by valid system access 4 minutes after the execution of

the last executed operator input requiring a valid system access request.

11. Valid system access requests and associated operator initials shall be added,

changed, or deleted on-line via a keyboard entry. All changes shall be made at

the strictest level of access.

C. A CRT with direct video capability shall be provided for soft copy change-of-state

printouts, system logs, information summaries, control system malfunction, advisors,

and operators input advisories. It shall have 300 mm display screen providing 24 lines

with 80 character/line capacity. The CRT display format shall be organized to permit

the output of displays and/or summaries, which concurrently displaying the most recent

change-of-state occurrence.

D. A keypad for command and summary operations shall be provided as an integral part of

the keyboard specified with the CRT(s). The keypad shall distinguish command

involving HVAC points, security points and points common to HVAC and security by

coloring and grouping the keys into these areas. Any time a touchpad key is depressed,

the system shall respond with the associated command word on the CRT(s) display.

E. A wide carriage, keyboard/printer shall be provided for hard copy change-of-state

printouts, system logs, information summaries, and control system malfunction

advisories. This keyboard/printer shall output 10 characters per line of paper. It shall

have a minimum operating speed of 30 characters per second. This keyboard/printer

shall be capable of using fan fold paper.

2.08 AREA INTERCOM:

A. An approved intercom unit shall be provided for intercommunication between the

C.O.C., the operator’s stations and other remote areas specified, as part of the

input/output summary. Volume in, volume out, and push-to-talk control switches shall

be designed for selective call out and for remotely initiated call in. Intercommunication

shall in no way interfere with data handling.

2.09 AREA DATA GATHERING PANELS

A. The area CPU shall be connected to the various remote data gathering panels (DGPs)

located in mechanical rooms or other spaces as shown. The data gathering panels in the

various buildings comprising the areas shall be connected to each other through trunk

wiring as necessary. The remote points of the various buildings shall be wired to their



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-8

respective data gathering panels. Each data gathering panel shall be wired to a local

source of 220V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 20 amp. power.

2.10 AREA TRANSLATOR MODULE:

A. The area translator module shall convert send-receive digital messages between the area

C.P.U. and the data-bus of the central operations console, for full S.I. units display and

commands at the central operations console specified under Central System.

B. The area sub-system shall be linked to the central system data-bus through transmission

protocol software and hardware.

C. The area sub-system, as specified hereinbefore, shall always be in a 100% survival made

for independent operation of its input/output functions.

2.11 CENTRAL OPERATORS CONSOLE (C.O.C.) - MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE - CRT

WITH KEYBOARD

A. The primary man-machine interface for the system shall be a CRT terminal operating

under full software control. All accessing of data, issuing of commands, annunciation

of alarms and system data file programming shall be accomplished via the CRT.

B. The CRT shall be complete with keyboard to provide total I/O capability.

C. The functions and facilities offered by the C.O.C. shall generally be the same as those

available at the Area CPUs.

2.12 KEYBOARD:

A. A keypad for command and summary operations shall be provided as integral part of

the keyboard specified with CRT(s).

B. The keypad shall distinguish command involving HVAC points, security points, and

points common to HVAC and security by coloring and grouping the keys into these

areas.

C. Any time a touchpad key is depressed, the system shall respond with the associated

command word on the CRT(s) display.

2.13 CRT DISPLAY:

A. A CRT with direct video capability shall be provided for soft copy change-of-state

printouts, system logs, information summaries, control system malfunction advisories,

and operators input advisories. It shall have a 300 mm display screen providing 24 lines

with 80 characters/line capacity.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-9

B. The CRT display format shall be organized to permit the output of display and/or

summaries, while concurrently displaying the most recent change-of-state occurrence.

2.14 INFORMATION ACCESS:

A. A system log shall be provided which contains the point status of all points specified by

the operator input. The system shall be capable of automatically initiating a log based

on a pre-selected time schedule.

B. An alarm summary shall be provided which contains the point status of all points

specified by the operator input and in the alarm condition. The system shall be capable

of automatically initiating and alarm system based on pre-selected time schedule.

C. An off-normal summary shall be provided which contains the point status of all points

specified by the operator input and in the off-normal condition. The system shall be

capable of automatically initiating an off-normal summary based on a pre-selected time.

D. Three special summaries shall be provided which contain the point status of all points

specified by the operator regardless how these points are grouped under specified

levels. The system operator shall be capable of adding or deleting special summary

point on-line. The system shall be capable of automatically initiating a special summary

based on a pre-selected time schedule.

E. The system shall be capable of displaying the status of a single point or all points

grouped and refreshing this display on the CRT with the current point status at least

every 40 seconds. The systems shall, upon operator request, display two systems in

alternating fashion. When displaying the status of a single point, its high and low limits

(if applicable) shall be displayed. The display shall also contain the system associated

with the point.

F. Operators Access Control:

1. The CCMS shall also be capable of restricting specified operator commands to

specified points by specified operators at a specified device. Inhibitors shall be

removed through the use of a software password or a keylock system.

2. An advisory shall be printed in the event that three unsuccessful attempts are

made to gain access into the system with an invalid system access request.

3. A properly entered access request shall cause the CCMS to output a message

each time an operator gains system access. This message shall include the

operator’s initials in alphabetic characters as well as the time and the date of

system access.

4. An operator input shall be echoed back on the output device associated with

the input device. The operator shall then be able to either execute or abort the

input.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-10

5. The CCMS shall supervise all operator inputs to insure that all inputs are

correctly and properly executed.

6. Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be

executed because of operator input errors.

7. The CCMS shall explain to the operator in words and phrases why the

command cannot be executed. The following explanations shall be provided:

a. The identifier does not exist.

b. The operator is restricted from executing the input and must obtain a

clearance through a password or a keylock system.

c. The command is not appropriate for the type of point being identified.

d. The requested command involves a point which is locked out.

e. The value entered is outside the range for the analogue point specified.

f. The operator request did not contain sufficient information.

g. The point hardware specified is not in communication with the system.

8. Operator inputs executed under valid system access requests shall be recorded

on a hard copy device. This record shall contain the operator input and the

time and date of input execution.

9. An operator command shall be provided to reinhibit all operator input

capability that was previously available by valid system access requests.

10. The CCMS shall automatically reinhibit all operator input capability that was

previously available by valid system access 4 minutes after the execution of the

last executed operator input requiring valid system access request.

11. Valid system access requests and associated operator initials shall be added,

changed, or deleted on-line via a keyboard entry. All changes shall be made at

the strictest level of access.

G. The operator will have the ability to custom program his system software on-line.

Modifications, additions, and deletions can be made to the system software. Access to

this function will be password restricted.

2.15 ALARMS AND CHANGE-OF-STATE DISPLAY:

A. A dedicated field area shall be provided for display of alarms and associated English

language messages. Only one alarm or change-of-state message shall be displayed at a

time. When simultaneous alarms occur, acknowledging of the first alarm display shall

cause the next alarm in the current alarm register to be displayed and the audible alarm

shall resound.

B. All change-of-state conditions shall be annunciated in full English language with

description indicating:

1. What is it - Alarm, Restoration, Trouble, etc.

2. When it happened - Time in 24-hour notation.

3. Why it happened - Fire, Smoke, Off, Degrees.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-11

4. Where is it - Second Floor, Zone 3, or Fan System S-3, Discharge air, etc.

5. How to react - Call Fire Department, Lower setpoint, Call up slide 24, etc.

C. An alarm condition shall cause the alarm asterisk to flash on and off at a 2 cycle per

second rate. A pulsating audible alarm shall also sound and shall continue until

acknowledged. Acknowledgment shall cause the flashing to halt and an

ACKNOWLEDGED message to appear adjacent to the alarm display.

D. Return to normal conditions, or restorations, shall appears as single line messages,

indicating type of alarm restored, such as fire restoration, the time, and the numeric

point address. For fire and security type restorations a steady audible alarm shall sound

until acknowledged. The fact that the restoration has been acknowledged shall also be

displayed.

E. Where inputs require different actions for different point conditions as in the case of fire

alarm, as against fire trouble, two independent actions taking messages shall be

provided. For example, the actions message for fire alarm might be “Call Fire

Department”, whereas the action taking message for fire trouble might be “dispatch

Electrician” or “Call Maintenance Department Extension 123”.

2.16 ALARM MESSAGES:

A. Suitable memory shall be provided to store up to 999 sixty character English language

messages. Each message shall be field programmable, directly through the CRT

keyboard, as on-line function. Assignment of messages to specific data points shall also

be accomplished through the CRT keyboard.

2.17 PROGRAMMERS PANEL:

A. The CRT terminal shall serve as a system programming panel as well as for day to day

operation. Initially, all data file programming shall be accomplished directly through the

CRT. Subsequent changes, point additions, and modifications to the system shall also

be implemented via software key controlled access and the CRT terminal.

2.18 CENTRAL PRINTERS:

A. Each printer installed in conjunction with C.O.C. shall be a high reliability digital output

device to approval. The printer shall operate at a minimum speed of 120 characters per

second. Each printer shall be continually supervised by the C.O.C. software and failures

in the send/receive electronics or the printer power shall be annunciated. The printers

shall be provided either with fan-fold paper catch trays or automatic roll-take-up

spools/reels, as directed. The number of printers operating in conjunction with CCMS

system, shall be selected such that at no time congestion or delays in receiving vital

information from the Area C.P.U.’s occur. A power on-off switch shall be provided.

B. The printers shall receive and print out the hourly reports from the Area C.P.U.

identification, and shall be dated (time, day, date, month and year), giving automatically



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-12

a comprehensive report that the C.P.U. and the D.G.P.’s served by it, are functioning

normally. These hourly reports shall identify all non-responsive transmitter/receiver

units, or power loss conditions in a summary format.

C. Upon occurrence of an alarm condition at any data point, the C.P.U. shall automatically

sound an alarm and cause the C.O.C. system to print the off-normal data point in a

distinctive manner. All alarm printouts shall include the time of day (24 hour forma),

off -normal point address, analogue point value with type of alarm (high or low value

alarm), and point status (on, secure, etc.) or point type (fire). The C.O.C. printers shall

have integral silence switches for the audible alarms.

D. The C.O.C. printers shall automatically record other non-alarm system activities. When

any system alarm point return to a normal condition, a distinctive return to normal

printout shall occur with time, address, and value or status. For all fire alarm, security

and noted critical alarm points, a printout shall occur at the time of alarm

acknowledgment identifying the type of printout, time, address and point status.

E. The C.O.C. printers shall have function key pads for software controlled logging

capabilities, with each function log having a descriptive, labelled single demand key.

Each log shall be preceded by a printout line indicating the time of day and the log type.

F. A status summary log shall be provided to automatically summarize the addresses and

status of remote monitored and controlled equipment.

G. An alarm summary log shall be provided to summarize all system off-normal points

complete with point data and analogue values.

H. An all-point log shall be provided to list all connected and calculated points complete

with current point data and analogue values. Points in an alarm condition, at the time of

printout, shall be designated by an asterisk in all logs. All log data shall be restricted to

data assigned to the appropriate printer, as noted previously.

2.19 GRAPHIC PROJECT UNIT - C.O.C.:

A. Modular, 81 frame, approved, random access graphic projection units shall be provided

adjacent to the C.O.C. station to provide an automatically indexed projection of a color

graphic representation of each data system specified. The number of modules required

shall be selected to suit the number of graphics necessary for the system. Each

projection shall be from a single frame positive slide. Graphics shall be human

engineered to depict duct, pipe, and equipment configurations, floor and information

necessary for complete system interpretation.

B. The graphic projection units shall be specially designed with mirrors and compact

housings to produce a non-glare image of minimum 225 mm by 350 mm size. The logic

and drive system shall be designed to provide a nominal access time of no more than

three seconds. The projection units shall be controlled from command switches suitably

located on the C.O.C. station, and shall automatically turn off after any period of use.



_________________________________________________________________________________

16900-13

C. The unit shall be designed for automatic indexing of proper slide on any analogue or

digital alarm occurrence. In addition, any system slide may be manually indexed upon

request. An index slide (or slides) shall be provided to outline the contents of each

graphic slide in each module.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and shop drawings and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use

electrical products complying with requirements of applicable SECTIONS OF

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Mount controllers at locations and height as indicated

or instructed by the Client’s Representative.

B. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electrical control systems in presence of

manufacturer's Representative. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 16950 TESTS AND CERTIFICATES

__________________________________________________________________________

16950 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

After completion of the Electrical Work, the complete systems shall be tested

thoroughly before commissioning. Any modifications or repairs necessary on

completion of the tests shall be done at the Contractor's expense.

The tests outlined herein shall be in addition to, and not substitution for, the

tests of the individual items at the manufacturer's plant. Insulation and grounding

resistance test shall be made before operating tests. Proper rotation shall be

determined before permanent connections are made.

All testing equipment on Site shall be provided by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall make the necessary openings in the circuits, for the testing

instruments and shall place and connect all instruments, equipment, and devices

necessary for the tests. Upon completion of the tests, these shall be removed and

all circuits connected to their permanent condition.

The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and local power

authorities representative. The Engineer shall be notified seven calendar days or

more in advance when any test is to take place, and it shall not be started without his

permission.

Certificates when so required shall be submitted for any equipment installed under

this contract originating by an authorized inspecting body in the country of

manufacturer.

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall supply the electric current necessary

for the tests.

The Contractor shall state and guarantee the particulars as specified in his tender

documents. Such guarantees shall not be departed from, without written permission

by the Engineer. If such guarantees are not respected, the Engineer has the right

to reject the faulty equipment.

The Contractor shall submit four copies of all tests results.

Test shall include the following:

- Insulation megger tests on wires.

- Continuity and resistance tests.

- Socket outlets proper wiring tests.

- Operational tests on all electrical equipment.

- Insulation resistance tests of motors.

- Testing of lighting installations.


__________________________________________________________________________

16950 -2

1.2 REFERENCES

A Insulation Megger Tests

Tests for insulation level shall be a 500 -volt Megger. A minimum of one

megohm (1,000,000 ohms) applying to the complete installation shall be

obtained. This means that when all the phase wires at the panelboard are

connected together and to the testing instrument, all switches closed, all

appliances inserted in the circuit, all neutral wires left in the air, and the

other end of the Megger is connected to the grounding, then there shall be a

minimum of 1 megohm between the whole of the installation taken together

and the grounding.

B Continuity & Resistance Tests

A continuity test to ensure that all connections have been made properly shall

be made. This can be done by the use of a bell set. Test shall also include

ensuring all switches and other interrupting devices breaking the phase wire

and not the neutral wire.

Test shall include, in addition to checking continuity of current carrying

wires and cables, continuity of grounding conductors. This shall be done

through a Megger which shall produce an alternating current of a

magnitude equal to one and a half times the rating of the circuit under test

with a maximum of 25 amps.

C Socket Outlets Proper Wiring Test

All socket outlets shall be connected properly such that looking at the face of

the socket outlet the live connection shall be on the right, the neutral on the

left and the earthing at the top.

D Operational Tests

The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of circuit breakers,

switches and any other equipment as requested by the Engineer, or as

specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

Each motor and associated equipment shall be run as nearly as possible

under normal operating conditions for as long a time as is necessary to

domonstrate correct alignment, wiring capacity, speed, and satisfactory

operation. The motor shall be loaded to full capacity, or as near there to

as possible.


__________________________________________________________________________

16950 -3

E Insulation Resistance Tests Of Motors

All motors shall be tested for insulation in with the requirement of IEC

Standard Two copies of the test data shall be submitted.

F Testing Of Lighting Installation

The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all lighting fixtures.

END OF SECTION

MINISTRY OF INTERIOR FOURTH GROUP OF

ADMINISTRATION BUILDINGS

DC-001 – NATIONAL INFORMATION CENTER

VOLUME II

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

ELECTRICAL WORKS

PART – 1 of 1

(DIVISION 16)

SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

_________________________________________________________________________

16050-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all electrical

materials as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

C 2 National Electric Safety Code

C 78.1 Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics of fluorescent

Lamps, Rapid Start Types

C 80.1 Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.

C 80.4 Specification for fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit.

C 81 Electric Lamp Bases and Holders.

B. SASO – Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

SASO 182 Standard Voltage and Frequency fos AC Transmission and

Distribution System

SASO 203 Safety Measure for Electrical Installations in Residential

Premises

C. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 228 Conductors of Insulated Cables

D. ASTM - American Standards for Testing and Materials

B 3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

D 2653 Testing Thermoplastic Insulated and Jacketed Wire and

Cable

F 512 Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation.

E. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

37.13a Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker Used in

Enclosures

F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

70 National Electric Code


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-2

G. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

1 Safety Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

20 Safety Standard for General Use Snap Switches

50 Safety Standard for Cabinets and Boxes

67 Safety Standard for Panel Boards

83 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires

93 Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches

198 Safety Standard for Fuses

493 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Underground

Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables

498 Safety Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

508 Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

514 Safety Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings

H. NEC - National Electric Code

I. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Complete list of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in

the work:

1. List shall include manufacturer's name and material or equipment

identification such as styles, types or catalogue numbers to permit

ready and complete identification.

2. Include complete set of catalogues covering these submittals.

3. If catalogue doe not indicate compliance with appropriate

standard as specified, provide additional certification as to

compliance.

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment not readily identifiable

by information named above and will be submitted for, but not limited to,

cabinets and panel boards, busways and supports and under floor ducts.

C. Testing Laboratory Label Required:

1. Label will satisfy requirement.

2. Listed only: Submit copy of listing.

3. Unlisted or Labeled: Submit statements from certified testing

laboratory or agency indicating that the item has been tested in

accordance with required procedures and the product complies

with all requirements.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-3

D. Test Results: See specification for requirement of reporting tests of

ground readings.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. All materials and equipment specified under this section shall be provided

in manufacturer's original new and unopened packing bearing

manufacturer's name and label.

B. Store materials not in actual use in covered and well-ventilated area and

protect them from dirt, dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme

temperatures.

C. For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instruction

regarding storage and handling.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for

the period of 5 years from the date of substantial completion. The

guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials

and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture

of fire alarm systems and components, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years period, and be

subject to approval of the Engineer.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced specialist sub-contractor who is

authorized by the system manufacturer, and subject to approval of the

Engineer.

C. All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements

of specified codes and standards.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUITS:

A. Interior Raceways: Raceways for wires inside the building, recessed in

concrete and CMU, shall be rigid PVC, self extinguishing, with proper

type of fittings such as bell ends or terminal adapters. Rigid PVC conduits

for use in wet walls and other locations as required by NEC 347 to be

embedded in concrete. All surface-mounted raceways for wires including

above suspended ceiling and inside drywalls shall be EMT or rigid

galvanized steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1. Fittings for steel

conduits shall conform to ANSI C80.4.

B. Exterior Raceways: Raceways for exterior use shall be direct burial type

rigid PVC, Schedule 40 with one bell end per length, rated for 80°C

cables. Raceways under traffic areas shall be encased in concrete.

C. Flexible conduits shall be of galvanized steel conforming to ANSI/UL 1.

Flexible conduits in wet areas shall be "Seal tight" type.

D. Skirting Trunking: Shall be three-compartment, two piece construction,

manufactured of rigid PVC with matte texture and manufacturer's

standard color and shall be supplied with covers and accessories, including

bends and tees, socket outlet plates, connectors, offsets, etc. Trunking

and system component shall meet UL 94 requirements for non-flammable,

self-extinguishing characteristics. Size shall be as shown on the drawings

or as approved.

E. Under-Floor Duct: Shall be three-compartment, two piece construction,

manufactured of pre-galvanized sheet steel and finished generally to

comply with BS 4672 Part 2 or equivalent standards and shall be supplied

with covers and accessories, including bends and tees, socket outlet

plates, connectors, offset, etc. Size shall be as shown on the drawings or

as approved.

F. Duct Banks: Duct banks for underground utilities shall be of rigid PVC

conforming to NEMA TC 6, Type II for direct burial and Type I for

encased burial in concrete for traffic areas. Size shall be as shown on the

drawings or as approved.

G. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, minimum size of conduits for

interior installations shall be 20 mm diameter and for exterior installations

shall be 50 mm diameter.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-5

2.2 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES

A. Cable Jointing:

Cable joints on PVC insulated and sheathed and MICC cables will under

no circumstances be permitted.

If joints are required on XLPE/SWA/PVC mains and submain cables,

these must only be undertaken with the Engineer’s written permission.

Conductors shall be jointed colour to colour (or number to number).

They shall be tested for condition and insulation resistance before jointing

is commenced. The seals of cables shall not be removed until preparations

for jointing are completed. Joints shall be completed on the same day as

commenced. Straight through joints will not normally be permitted.

Joints in the copper conductors shall be by means of tinned copper

connectors with the conductor firmly butted together and sweated solid

with tinman’s solder. Joints in rubber insulated or polyvinylchloride

cables shall be insulated with pure rubber tape served to a thickness equal

to the cable insulation.

Joints in paper insulated cables shall be insulated with high class

impregnated cotton insulating tape served to a thickness equal to the cable

insulation. Approved type cable spreaders shall be used where necessary

to maintain insulation resistance value.

All joint boxes shall be completely filled with insulating compound of a

suitable grade. Each box shall be topped up as necessary to ensure that it

is properly filled.

Joint box compound shall have high dielectric strength and insulation

resistance suitable for the working voltage of the cable. It shall be non-

hygroscopic and be suitable in all respects for the type of joint being

made.

Where there is any possibility of the ingress of oil into the sealing box, the

compound used shall be of oil resistant type.

The jointing compounds shall be poured at the correct temperature

specified by the makers. No plug or air vent shall be fitted until all air has

been released from the joint box. Plugs and air vents shall be sealed with

compound after filling.

All cable joints shall be carried out by experienced and authorized cable

jointers only. Contractor to submit biodata of the cable jointers he would

employ along with their experience certificates for approval of the

Engineer.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-6

B. Mains Cable Terminations:

Unless otherwise specified, all cable terminations shall be in suitable

sealing boxes and comply with the preceding clause where applicable.

Tails shall be of such cross section as to carry the full rated current of the

cables to which they are connected and shall be VRI, TRS, PVC, or

Varnished Cambric, as specified.

C. Connections to all other Electrical Equipment:

Connections to electrical accessories and equipment shall only be made

with approved type termination equipment and materials compatible to the

cables used.

Where shrouded clamp type terminations are to be used the cable

insulation shall be removed sufficiently to allow for metal to metal contact

without the bare conductor protruding outside the terminations.

Terminals screws shall be tightened to manufacturer’s recommended

torque.

Where terminations are to be made onto studs, approved type

compression/solder lugs shall be used. Terminations shall be effectively

shrouded and shall provide protection against direct contact.

2.3 BOXES AND FITTINGS:

A. All boxes provided in the wiring or raceway system shall conform to

ANSI-UL 514.

B. Boxes for ordinary locations or flush installations shall be sheet steel, zinc

or cadmium plated, to meet code requirements. Boxes for flush exterior

installations shall be gasketed and hot-dipped galvanized.

C. Boxes for exposed locations subject to humid conditions shall be of cast

metal with threaded hubs. Finish shall be either cadmium/zinc electroplate

covered or hot-dip galvanized. Boxes for exposed exterior locations shall

be similar except with gaskets.

2.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:

The limit of the work of the Electrical Contractor shall be up to the supply

terminals of the Equipment or device to be supplied by other trades. The

Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing the power supply and

wiring/cabling to the equipment or devices of other trades.

2.5 MOTOR CONTROL:


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-7

Motor control shall comply with ANSI/UL 508.

2.6 CONTACT IN MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL DEVICES:

Items such as float switches, pressure switches and auxiliary relays shall be

current and voltage ratings in accordance with NEMA 1C 1-18.20 for Class B

relays. All items shall be for 60 Hz and shall be UL listed.

2.7 ELECTRIC MOTORS

A. General:

All electric motors, except where otherwise specified shall be of the totally

enclosed fan cooled, induction, weatherproof type for outdoor use and the

drip proof type for indoor use.

Motors shall be of first class workmanship by an approved maker and shall

be wound for the power supply available. Motor windings shall be

insulated with class E materials.

Each motor shall be fitted with 220 volts anticondensation heater of

sufficient rating to maintain the motor windings at a temperature of not

less than 10oC when the motor is at rest. The heater shall be automatically

controlled from the starter to operate only when the motor is not running.

All motors up to 75 KW shall be capable of making 15 starts per hour

with the full load requirements by the method of starting herein specified

and there shall be no limit to this rate of starting. Small motors up to and

including 8 KW rating shall be of assisted start arrangement for star-delta,

stator-rotor etc. as the case may be. Where resistance starters are

installed each such starter resistance equipment shall be provided with

thermal cut-out protection, which shall operate in conjunction with an

overload detecting device in the respective starter where slip ring motors

are installed, the brushes shall be equal and approved standard. The rotor

assembly shall be readily removable from the stator for each of

maintenance.

Slip ring assemblies shall be located at the non-drive end of the motor, i.e.

for vertical motors at the end of the motor remote from the pump unit.

Motors shall be so constructed as to be fully capable of sustaining the

weights of vertical shafting and flywheels where necessary. The power

ratings of all motors shall be sufficient to enable them to drive their

respective machine without overloading under all conditions of starting

and continuous working and their rated output power shall be at lease

10% in excess of the calculated figures required for the maximum duty

conditions.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-8

All motors shall be completely silent in operation.

The motors shall operate at all loads without undue vibration.

Terminal boxes shall be suitable for the reception of the type of cable

required and shall, as appropriate, include glands, sealing boxes, etc. The

terminal boxes shall be hose proof and of robust construction and shall be

located so as to afford easy access for cable termination and inspection.

All terminals shall be clearly marked and shall be provided with adequately

rated compression or solder type cable lugs. Effective seals shall be

provided for ball and/or roller bearings to prevent ingress of dust and dirt

and escape of lubricating grease. All motors shall be by the same

manufacturer. Test certificates in triplicate of both routine and

performance tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within

three weeks of testing. Where requested by the Engineer, the contractor

shall also submit type test certificates in respect of temperature rise and

performance for motors rated less than 11 KW. Motors shall not be

dispatched for works assembly with associated mechanical plant until test

certificates have been approved by the Client.

B. Test at Manufacturer’s Works:

All motors shall be subject to routine check tests at the manufacturer’s

works to demonstrate good working order and electrical and mechanical

soundness of materials and construction.

Motors having rating in excess of 11 KW shall, in addition, be subject to

temperature rise and efficiency tests and provision shall be made by the

contractor for tests on these motors to be witnessed by the Engineer if

required. All rotational temperature rise tests shall be performed with the

motor set up in item normal working position, i.e. either horizontal or

vertical, in accordance with the particular drive application.

C. Routine Tests:

Winding connections. Check of phase sequence and terminal markings.

Winding resistance. Check d.c. resistance of stator and rotor windings.

No-load Rotational test. To establish soundness of bearings, dynamic

balance of rotor and noise level.

Insulation Resistance Tests. Measurement of insulation resistance of

stator and rotor windings and wiring of anti-condensation heaters and

thermoster protective devices, where fitted.

High Voltage Tests. Test voltages to be applied to stator and rotor

windings, as prescribed by relevant IEC Codes. In the case of motors


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-9

rated above 11 KW, these voltage shall be applied at full load working

temperature.

2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS

A. General:

Motor starters and contactors shall conform to relevant IEC codes and

have the following features:

Fused control circuit.

Inherent under voltage release.

Magnetic or thermal overloads on starters only.

Manual stop/start and/or remote control facility.

Integral isolators which shall be fully interlocked with the door of

the enclosure and shall be capable of breaking stalled motor

current.

Contractor to insure type 2 coordination for all starters.

In cases where MICC cables are used starters and contractors shall

have surge diverters connected across the coil.

The contractor shall be responsible for setting all overloads and protective

devices to the recommended or specified values and the filling of dash-

pots, starter tanks and similar equipment with the recommended grade of

insulating oil. He shall also ensure that the direction of rotation of all

motors is correct for the purpose concerned.

B. ELECTRODE TYPE LEVEL CONTROLLERS:

Electrode type level controls for the starting and stopping of pumps, etc.

shall comprise fixed electrodes located in the pump sump operating in

conjunction with electronic units detecting changes in conductivity and

relays located in the motor starter panels. Electrode holders shall be of

the waterproof type with cable entry arranged for screwed conduit or

PVC SWA cable as required. Holders shall be rigidly fixed at centres of

not more than 300mm and the covers shall allow for up to 105mm

adjustment of the operating level without requiring alteration of the

electrode length.

Electrodes shall be of galvanized mild steel tube or stainless steel as

required and arranged for easy withdrawal and replacement from the

holders without disconnection of the cables to facilitate cleaning.

Electrode supports with insulated bushes shall be provided where


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-10

necessary to prevent any movement which may cause short circuits

between electrodes and earth. Electronic units and relays shall be of the

plug in type to facilitate replacement and shall be suitable for operation

from a 220 volt 60 Hertz single phase a.c. supply via an HRC type

cartridge fuse.

Sensitivity of the electronic detection units shall be adjustable over a range

of 100 to 20,000 ohms with a switching differential not greater than 5% of

the set point. The open circuit voltage between any electrode and earth

shall not exceed 25 volts a.c.

Relays shall have two independent sets of changeover contacts adequately

rated for the circuits which they control. Failure and restoration of the

mains supply shall not result in a change of state of the relay contacts.

This type of level control shall not be used in locations where the

accumulation of grease or sludge on the electrodes can be sufficient to

affect the sensitivity of detection.

Level control equipment shall for foul sewage pumping stations be of the

float level regulating type incorporating a shock-proof mercury switch

encapsulated in a poly-propylene or similar material, float, hermetically

sealed with a suitable PVC nitrile sheathed cable.

The control circuits shall be operated from a low voltage supply. Suitable

overriding master controls shall be provided to protect all pumps against

dry running for both manual and automatic operating.

2.9 GROUNDING RODS: Refer to Section 16452 - GROUNDING.

2.10 LIGHTING:

A. Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be furnished

and installed in each fixture.

B. Incandescent lamps shall be for 220-volt AC, inside frosted, screw base,;

16A maximum protection, unless otherwise specified.

C. Fluorescent lamps shall be for 220-volt AC, bi-pin type, with cool white

color characteristics, shall not require starter switches, and shall comply

with ANSI C78.1.

D. Florescent ballasts shall be electronic ballast , high-power factor

E. High pressure mercury vapor discharge lamps shall be for 220-volt AC,

screw base,.

F. Types of lighting fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-11

G. High Pressure discharge lamps to be provided with capacitor to improve

power factor.

2.11 LIGHTING CONTACTORS:

A. Electrically-held type with silver alloy double break power contacts

capable of continuously carrying, making and breaking any load within the

rating of the contactor without the assistance of auxiliary arching contacts.

Auxiliary arcing contact are not acceptable. All contacts shall be

removable without disturbing line or load wiring. Operating coil shall

function on 60 Hz power; voltage as required. Contractors shall be in

general purpose sheet metal enclosures. Lighting contractors may be

included in the same enclosures as the corresponding panelboard.

2.12 PHOTOELECTRIC CELL:

A. There shall be a detector which reads and translates the intensity of light in

terms of switching on and off. It shall be made of cadmium sulphic cell

which is a semi-conductor devise whose electrical resistance varies with

the intensity of light falling on it.

B. A snap-action single pole switch shall be controlled by the current passing

through the cell. A heater mounted on a bimetal strip shall be connected

in series with the cell and the two components shall be connected to a

power source. Variation in the resistance of the cell due to changes in

daylight intensity varies the heating effect of the bimetal strip and by

careful calibration the switch-on-point will be selected.

C. The cell shall be encased in an impact resistant translucent cover to

protect it from damage and ultraviolet rays. The photoelectric cell shall be

completely weatherproof and not affected by moisture vibration or

changes in temperature.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATION:

A. The installation shall conform to the applicable provisions of National

Electric Code and National Safety Code.

B. The drawings indicate the extent and general location and arrangement of

equipment, conduits and wiring.

1. The Contractor shall study the drawings and details and in

supplement to the above mentioned drawings, all works to be done

shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings. All outlets

and equipment shall be properly located and readily accessible.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-12

2. Lighting fixtures, equipment and outlets shall be located to avoid

interference with mechanical or structural features and

symmetrically located in coordination with ceiling systems.

3. Major equipment such as switchgear, transformer, etc. shall be

assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

C. The Contractor shall provide power supply to all electrically powered

equipment or devices as required under other Sections of the

Specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be

responsible for power supply cables and wiring up to the power supply

terminals or built-in isolators or disconnect devices (if any) of the

particular equipment or device.

D. Should the Contractor make equipment substitution or use equipment that

may result in increased loads and changes in feeder and raceway sizes, and

result in larger protective equipment, such changes shall not be considered

an additive change order.

3.2 WIRING METHODS:

A. Conduits:

1. Conduit system shall be installed in accordance with Articles 346

and 348 of ANSI/NFPA 70.

2. Minimum size of raceways for branch circuit wiring shall be 20

mm diameter.

3. Raceways shall be concealed within walls, ceiling and floors where

possible and shall be kept 150 mm away from parallel runs of

flues, steam or hot water pipes.

4. Raceways shall be supported and secured at intervals of not more

than 2440 mm.

5. Exposed raceways shall have runs installed parallel or

perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersections of

vertical planes and ceilings.

6. Field made bends and offsets for steel conduits shall be made with

approved hickey or conduits bending machine.

7. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends

or cast fittings.

8. Deformed raceways shall not be installed.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-13

9. Trapped raceways in damp and wet locations shall not be

permitted.

10. Care shall be taken to prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt or trash

in raceways, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of

construction.

11. Clogged raceways shall be entirely freed of obstructions or shall be

replaced.

12. Steel conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and

cabinets with locknuts.

13. Bushing shall be installed on the ends of all steel conduits and shall

be of the insulating type where required by ANSI/NFPA 70. Bell

ends or terminal adapter and bushings shall be installed on the ends

of all PVC conduits.

14. Raceways crossing expansion joints in concrete slabs shall be

provided with suitable expansion fittings or other suitable means

shall be provided to compensate for the building expansion or

construction.

15. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry shall not be

acceptable as a base for raceways fastenings, nor shall raceways or

pipe straps be welded to steel structures.

16. Raceways shall be secured by pipe straps or shall be supported by

wall brackets, strap hangers or ceilings trapezes, fastened by wood

screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion

bolts on concrete or brick and machine screws or welded threaded

studs on steel work.

17. Nail-type nylon anchors or threaded studs, driven in by a powder

charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in

lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws.

18. Conduits larger than 25 mm shall not be installed inside structural

masonry or slab.

B. Stubbed Conduits:

1. Conduits for connection to free standing equipment shall be

provided with a short elbow and an adjustable brass top of


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-14

coupling of brass or bronze threaded inside for plugs, set flush

with the finished floor.

2. Wiring shall be extended in rigid threaded conduit to equipment

except where required, flexible conduit not exceeding 300 mm

length may be used 150 mm above floor.

3. Screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs shall be installed in

conduits from which no equipment connections are made.

C. Flexible Connections of Short Length:

1. Flexible connections shall be provided for all motors and

equipment subject to vibration or movement.

2. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet locations, or

where motors are installed exposed in mechanical equipment

rooms.

D. Wires and Cables:

1. Conductors in raceways shall be thermoplastic insulated copper

unless otherwise specified or indicated.

2. Wire connectors of insulating materials or solderless pressure

connectors properly taped shall be utilized for all splices where

possible.

3. Soldered mechanical joints, insulated with tape shall be kept to a

minimum.

4. Conductor sizes shall not be less than the sized indicated.

5. All wire joints shall be covered with two thicknesses of insulating

tape, covered with two layers of friction tape. All traps shall be

applied half-wrapped.

6. Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than 4 mm2 for

power and 2.5 mm2 for lighting except for circuits of more than

30.48 m from panel to load center, 6 mm2 shall be used.

7. Class 1 remote-control conductors shall be not less than 2.5 mm2

for control wires:

8. Coding and Identification:

a. Conductor identification of branch circuits shall be by

color coding. Color coding shall be as follows: Phase A


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-15

= red, Phase B = yellow, Phase C = blue, Neutral = Black,

Ground = green.

Conductors smaller than 16 mm2 must have colored

insulation. Conductors 16 mm2 and larger may be

wrapped with colored tape at all boxes, panels and

switchboards.

b. Control circuit conductor identification shall be made by

color-coded insulated conductors, plastic coated self-

sticking printed markers, permanently attached stamped

metal foil markers or approved equivalent means.

c. Conductor identification shall be provided within each

enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made.

d. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly

identified.

e. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that

shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or

marking shall not be acceptable.

E. Boxes and Supports:

1. Boxes shall be provided in the wiring or raceways systems

wherever required for pulling of wires, making

connections and mounting of devices and fixtures.

2. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be of cast metal hub

type when located in normally wet locations, when surface

mounted on exterior surfaces, in hazardous areas and

when installed exposed up to 2130 mm above exterior

floors and walkways.

3. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel or plastic.

4. Each box shall have the volume required by ANSI/NFPA

70 for the number of conductors enclosed in the box.

5. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall not be less than

100 mm except the smaller boxes may be used if required

by the fixture configuration.

6. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided

with suitable extension rings or plaster covers, as

required.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-16

7. Boxes for use in masonry walls shall be square cornered

tile type or standard boxes having square cornered tile

type covers.

8. Cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes

installed flush with the outside of exterior masonry

surfaces shall be gasketed.

9. Separate boxes shall be provided of flush or recessed

fixtures when required by the fixture terminal operating

temperature, and fixtures shall be readily removable for

access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided.

In suspended ceilings, all fixture housing shall be

supported properly from structural members.

10. Anchorage and Support:

a. Types of fasteners and methods of fastening in

general shall be as specified here-in-before for

conduits.

b. In overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to

raceways shall not necessarily be separately

supported except where used for fixture support.

Cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and

sheet boxes shall be supported directly from the

building structure or by bar hangers.

c. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be

attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box

and shall be supported with an approved type

fastener not more than 356 mm from the box.

d. The Contractor shall refer to other drawings for

information concerning depths of reinforcing steel

to avoid conflict when anchoring.

F. Boxes for Use with Raceways System:

1. Boxes shall not be less than 38 mm deep except where

shallower boxes required by structural conditions are

approved.

2. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall not less

than 100 mm square except that 100 mm x 50 mm boxes

may be used where only one raceway enters the outlet.


_________________________________________________________________________

16050-17

G. Pull Boxes:

1. Pull boxes shall not less than the minimum size required

by ANSI/NFPA 70 and shall be constructed of galvanized

steel or cast metal boxes.

2. Boxes shall be furnished with screw fastened covers.

3. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box,

the feeders shall be tagged to indicated clearly the

electrical characteristics, circuit number and panel

designation.

4. Feeders of different voltages must be in separate boxes;

also, signal circuits must be in a separate box from power

circuits.

3.3 DEVICE PLATES:

A. Device plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact

with finished wall surface without use of mats or similar devices.

B. Plaster fillings shall not be permitted.

C. Plates shall be installed vertically and with an alignment tolerance of 4 mm.

3.4 TESTS:

A. After the interior wiring system installation is completed, the Contractor

shall conduct an operating test for approval.

B. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the

requirements of the specification.

C. Testing of the grounding system shall be made as specified in Section

16452 – EARTHING SYSTEM.

D. Ground resistance (Megger) tests shall be performed on lighting and

power circuits.

E. Cable and circuit breaker testing, and testing in general shall be as per the

National Electric Code.

F. All phase balancing and loading tests shall be accomplished and data of

such tests shall be submitted to the Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 16110 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

The Contractor shall supply and install a complete conduit system as shown on the

Drawings and as herein specified. The system shall include conduits, fittings

(couplings, bends, boxes, cover plates, reducers, adaptors, etc.) and all necessary

parts to install a complete conduit system.

Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical

purposes.

Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically to outline the general routing of the

system. The installation shall be made to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts,

structural members, or other equipment. Should structural or other interferences

prevent the installation of the conduits, or setting of boxes, cabinets, or other

electrical equipment, as indicated on the Drawings, deviations must be approved by

the Engineer, and after approval, shall be made without additional charges. The

number of conduits shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings.

Conduits and conduit fittings shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure

reliable mechanical protection to the cables/wires contained therein, and shall

withstand the stresses likely to occur during transport, storage and installation. They

shall be marked with the marker's name or trade mark. Marking shall be indelible

and easily legible.

Conduits shall have a minimum 20 mm dia. (outer diameter) size and shall be

adequate for proper and easy wire pulls, and in no case shall the wires occupy

across-sectional area of more than 40% of the inner conduit cross-section.

The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be smooth and free from burrs,

flash, and similar defects. Thickness of wall shall be uniform.

The interior and ends of conduit fittings shall have no sharp edges; surface and

corners over which the cables are likely to be drawn shall be smooth and well

rounded.

Conduits and fittings shall have adequate mechanical strength. Conduit when bent or

compressed, or exposed to impact or extreme temperatures, either during or after

installation, shall show no cracks and shall not be deformed to such an extent that

introduction of the cables are likely to be damaged while being drawn in.

Boxes, (junction or pull boxes) shall be of ample capacity as sized as per NEC

requirements.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -2

TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES for forming and installing conduit and wireway

systems are to be purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance

with manufacturers’ instructions.

FIXING: conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.

SIZES of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in

accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of

conductors. Minimum size of conduit for all applications it to be 20 mm diameter,

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

MECHANICAL CONTINUITY: conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined

together and connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm

mechanical assembly. Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where

required to ensure effective electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate

protective earth conductor is required or not.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Conduits - Metallic

Shall be constructed from solid drawn mild steel, outside and inside

galvanized.

American rigid conduit shall conform to FSWWC-581, ANSI C 80-1 and

UL- 6 with fused zinc coating to inside and outside walls.

The galvanized coat of zinc shall be of uniform thickness applied to outside

and inside including the threads.

B Steel Conduit Accessories

FITTINGS shall be threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable

cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.

Fittings and components are to comply with CEE 23, BS 4568 Part 2 and BS

31.

LOCKNUTS for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy

hexagonal or catellated pattern for fastening.

BUSHINGS for terminating conduits are to be smooth rounded brass ring.

MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS including reducers, chase nipples, three

piece unions, split couplings and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and

manufactured for the particular application.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -3

Each conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut

square and taper reamed, furnished with coupling in standard lengths,

threaded each end.

Couplings shall be applied at one end of each conduit and color coded

plastic threaded protectors to the other end. The interior threaded surface of

each coupling shall be galvanized to ensure 100% galvanic protection on all

surfaces.

The galvanized coating shall be of such quality and uniformity that a sample

of the galvanized conduit will not show a fixed deposit of copper after four

immersions of dips in a standard copper sulphate solution.

The galvanized coating on the conduit shall be sufficiently elastic to

prevent cracking or flaking when a sample of finished conduit is bent 90o

at a minimum temperature of 15 oC.

SLEEVES THROUGH OUTSIDE WALLS: shall be cast iron, with end and

intermediate integral flanges, and internal diameter larger than diameter of

through-conduit. Length is to correspond to wall thickness. Space between

sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to within 50 mm of both faces

of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead, held in

place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of

sleeve. Alternatively, sleeves are to be with cable or conduit bolted pressure

sealing.

SUPPORTS AND HANGERS shall be galvanized malleable cast iron straps

or structural steel sections with hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.

EXPANSION JOINT FOR EMBEDDED STEEL CONDUITS – TYPE A:

watertight, flexible conduit with end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length

is to allow movement within range of joint and is not to be less than 20 times

diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with thick rubber tubing with 5

mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumber with earth clamp is to

electrically connect both sides of joint. Fitting is to the approval of the

Engineer.

EXPANSION JOINT FOR EXPOSED STEEL CONDUITS – TYPE B:

sleeve with fittings to permit telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable

conduit is to be fitted with watertight bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of

galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper with earth clamp is to

electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is to the approval of

the Engineer.

EXPANSION JOINT FOR EXPOSED STEEL CONDUITS – TYPE C:

PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit terminating in pull boxes and securely

fixed on each side of structural expansion joint. Bonding jumber is to

electrically connect both sides of joint.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -4

C Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Electric metallic tubes shall be in conformity with FSWW-C-563, ANSI C80.3

and UL 797, hot dip galvanized zinc coated.

EMT fittings shall be constructed of plated malleable iron or steel,

compression type and shall be similar to FSW-F-408.

D Conduits & Fittings - Non-Metallic PVC

Non-metallic conduits shall be heavy duty type, rigid PVC flame resistant

complying with SASO 255.

Light duty rigid grey conduit and orange conduit of all types are strictly

prohibited.

E Flexible Conduit - Metallic

Flexible conducts shall be formed from continuous length of spirally wound,

interlocked zinc-coated strip steel.

Flexible metal conduct shall conform to FSWW-C566 and UL 1 – (American

type) . Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be constructed of single strip,

continuous, interlocked and double wrapped steel, galvanized inside and

outside, coated with liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

conforming to UL 360.

F Flexible Conduit -Non Metallic

Only heavy gauge conduit, corrugated type, made of hard PVC, pliable with

additional plain coating and grey colour shall be approved conduits shall

strictly confirm either to BS 4607 Part 3 and IEC 423.

G Boxes - Metallic

Boxes shall be constructed of cast metal as specified hereinafter.

Boxes used for hanging fixtures shall be suitable for ceiling roses. Boxes for

installation in concrete shall be concrete tight. Shallow boxes shall not be

used unless building construction is such that it is impossible to use standard

depth boxes.

Boxes shall be constructed of feraloy cad/zinc electroplated with aluminium

cellulose lacquered.

Blank covers shall be constructed of sheet steel with gasket and stainless

steel screws except for damp and wet locations.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -5

In damp and wet locations blank covers shall be constructed from cast

feraloy with gasket and stainless steel screws.

Floor boxes shall be water tight one piece cast iron color- coated inside and

out for additional corrosion resistance. Treaded steel cover shall be electro-

galvanized. Boxes shall have adjusting screws.

H Boxes - Non-Metallic

Boxes shall be standard PVC as specified under Conduits & Fittings

All boxes shall be provided with grounding (earth) terminals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Raceway applications and installation :

Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used generally in underground

installations and in screed below pavement and in duct banks.

Conduits embedded in ceiling slab, in walls and underfloor shall be non-

metallic type.

Conduits exposed above false ceiling shall be EMT type.

Exposed conduits other than above false ceiling shall be rigid steel type.

Heavy gauge steel flexible conduits shall be used in movable partitions, and

from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures and the final 60 cm of

connection to control items subject to movement or vibration.

Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used for final 60 cm of connection to

motor and in lieu of flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of the

following conditions.

1. Exterior location. Pump rooms .

2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to

accumulate.

3. Corrosive atmosphere.

4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.

All conduit work and plastering shall be complete before wires are pulled in

unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Conduit shall be plugged with

cork and boxes covered appropriately to avoid filling with plaster.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -6

Conduit runs between outlets shall not contain more than three quarter bends

or equivalent. The maximum run between two outlets shall not exceed 25

meters for straight runs and 10 meters for runs with one or more bends. Pull

(draw in) boxes shall be provided otherwise whether so indicated on the

Drawings or not. Location of pull boxes shall be approved by the Engineer.

Conduits shall be installed without causing any damage to the structural

members.

Horizontal and cross runs in buildings partitions or side walls shall be

avoided.

All bends shall be carefully made to prevent distortion of the circular cross-

section. Bends made on site in conduits shall have an inside radius of not less

than nine diameters.

Where bends of less than nine diameters are necessary, standard factory

elbows shall be used: however the conduit size chosen shall be such as to

permit a cable-bending radius within the factory elbow of at least eight times

the cable diameter.

Conduits in slabs shall be installed as close to the middle of the concrete slabs

as practicable without disturbing the reinforcement. Conduits shall be placed

between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing steel. The outside

diameter shall not exceed one third of the slab thickness, otherwise the

Contractor shall use more than one conduit. Conduits shall be placed not

closer than three diameters on centers in order to ensure proper conduit bond.

Conduits in slabs shall be placed parallel to the main reinforcement steel in

the slab.

Top of any conduit in slabs shall be at least 2 cm below the finishes floor

surface, unless otherwise indicated or authorized.

Conduits in slabs running parallel to beam axis shall not run above beams.

Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to walls and

ceiling beams. All changes in direction shall be made as far as possible with

approved bends, elbows, and pull boxes. The spacing between parallel runs

shall be uniform throughout. Unless otherwise indicated conduits shall be

held securely in place by standard factory spacer bar saddles, spaced not more

than 1.5, 2.0 and 2.4 meters for 20mm, 25mm and 32mm and larger conduit

sizes respectively for metallic conduits and at 1 meter for non-metallic

conduits.

Unless otherwise indicated, raceways exposed above false ceilings shall be

supported from the slab above the ceiling in the same manner as exposed

raceways. Raceways shall not be supported from false ceiling supports.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -7

Couplings, expansion couplings, strap saddles, spacer bar saddles, spring clip

saddles, conduit clips, adaptors, etc. shall all be standard factory conduit

accessories.

Flexible metallic conduits shall be used only for connections to motors, or to

other equipment subject to vibration or adjustment or to make connections to

lighting fixtures in false ceilings. Each connection shall contain at least one

quarter bend so that no vibration can be transmitted behind the flexible

connection.

In damp and wet locations all couplings, expansion coupling, strap saddles,

spacer bar saddles, spring clip saddles, conduits clips, screws, adaptors shall

be corrosion proof, approved for use in damp and wet locations.

In damp and wet locations the entire conduiting system, including boxes,

fittings, panelboards etc.. shall be mounted so that there is at least 7mm air

space between it and the wall supporting surface.

All conduits shall be carefully cleaned before and after installation. All ends

shall be reamed free from burrs, and inside surfaces shall be free from all

imperfections likely to injure the cable.

After installations of each complete new conduit run, the run shall be snaked

with a band to which shall be attached an approved tube cleaner equipped

with an approved cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85% of the

nominal diameter of the conduit. All conduits through which the mandrel

will not pass shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own

expense.

All field cuts in conduits shall be square, and cut ends shall be filed and shall

have burrs removed. An insulating bushing shall be installed on each end of

conduit, unless the connector is designed to prevent contact with the cut end.

All connections shall be mechanically strong and tight, and made up properly

with approved connectors. No running threads shall be permitted.

B Installation Of Boxes

Boxes of ample capacity shall be provided at every junction of conduit

system and as required by the Specifications.

All boxes shall be securely fastened.

Blank plates shall be installed on outlet boxes in which no apparatus is

installed, or the appartus installed does not provide a suitable cover for box.

Device boxes shall be used for all wiring devices.

Non-metallic boxes shall be used only for concealed conwork, and for

conduit work above false ceiling.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -8

Exposed boxes for switches, socket outlets and other devices shall be cast

metal boxes.

Cast metal boxes shall be installed in such a manner that the conduit

connections and the gasketed cover are dusttight. All unused openings shall

be closed with pipe plugs and compound.

Boxes for similar equipment shall be mounted at uniform height within the

same or similar area. Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings.

Device box shapes and sizes shall be determined by the type and size of wiring

devices for which they serve.

Boxes fixed inside false ceiling shall be provided with mounting brackets for

rigid fixing to structure members or other means of support.

C Sleeves

Sleeves shall be provided for exposed conduit or cables passing through

interior floor slabs and walls. All openings shall be sealed with mastic

compound. The compound shall not cause any corrosion or harmful effects to

the conduit. Sleeves passing through floor slabs shall be flush with the bottom

of the slab, extend approximately 3cm above the surface of the floor and be

watertight between sleeves and floor slab.

Sleeves passing through exterior walls and slabs shall be wall entrance seals of

watertight construction. They shall be watertight between slab and sleeve, and

between sleeve and conduit and cable.

These wall entrance seals shall be of malleable iron with black paint finish and

PVC sleeve, with a watertight sealing gland.

Sealing gland design shall be such that they may be tightened any time after

installation. Wall entrance seals shall have oversized sleeves of proper length

to position the sealing-gland housing with the wall faces.

After the cable has been pulled through the duct, a seal shall be made round it,

within the duct with a bituminous mastic compound, making the seal

watertight.

D Adhesives And Joints

Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilising the appropriate components

as supplied by the conduit manufacturer.

Permanent adhesives to produce a rigid watertight joint shall be used with

standard couplers and accessories.


_________________________________________________________________________

16110 -9

A flexible (non-hardening) adhesive shall be used where expansion facilities

are required.

E Expansion Joints

Expansion coupling shall be provided at every 6 meter run of exposed

conduit work, at joints or as required to compensate for thermal expansion

and contraction of both exposed and embedded conduits.

Conduit entries of fittings shall be so designed that a reliable joint can be

made between the conduit and the fittings.

Conduits and fittings shall be BS tested or approved equal.

All accessories and fittings such as bends, straps, double straps, junction

boxes, bushes, etc. shall be provided as required.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16111 CABLE TRAYS

_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,

apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this

section:

1. "Basic Electrical Requirements"

2. "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes metallic cable trays. Types of cable trays in this

section include the following:

1. Ventilated (perforated) bottom.

2. Ladder.

B. Related Sections: The following Division Section contains

requirements that relate to this section.

1. Division 7 section "Fire Stopping".

2. Division 16 section "Supporting Devices".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections:

1. Product Data: Manufacturer' catalogues and data for cable tray

products and accessories.

2. Shop Drawings: Layout floor plans and elevations showing cable tray

system. Designate components and accessories including clamps,

brackets, hanger rods, splice plates connectors, expansion joint

assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. Show accurately scaled

components and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show tray

types, dimensions, and finishes.

3. Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of factory test reports

performed in conformance with Standard approved on cable trays of

types and size specified for this project.


_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -2

4. Field Test Reports: in compliance with "Field Quality Control" Article

of this section.

5. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and maintenance

Manual".


A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from

a single manufacturer.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray with other installations.

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit

field conditions and as approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS :

Subject to compliance with requirements, the manufacturer must have a sound

experience in the field of cable trays manufacturing for not less than ten

years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied

equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been


2.2 CABLE TRAYS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Cable tray systems shall be of indicated types, sizes, and standard

classes and shall be complete with manufacturer's recommended

covers, barrier strips, dropouts, fittings, conduit adaptors, hold-down

devices, grommets, and blind ends as required and indicated.

B. Cable tray products shall have rounded edges and smooth surfaces.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, with splice

plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units; capable of

supporting concentrated loads of 90kg at any point, over and above

cable load.

D. Provide cable tray covers, where indicated; construct of metal and

finishes which mate and match cable trays.

E. Provide cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding

jumpers, as indicated and as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.


_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -3

F. Galvanizing: is to be in accordance with BS EN 1461 , applied after

fabrication.Hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

G. Sizes: trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes, 300 , 600 and

900 mm wide, and at least 2,44 m length of section . Size of tray or

ladder is to be determined by number and sizes of cables in accordance

with the Regulations and/or as shown on the Drawings. Tray or ladder

is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables contained

within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full

loading capacity.

Medium duty tray shall be used when not exposed to physical damage.

Heavy duty tray shall be used in trenches, electrical/ mechanical

rooms,

on roofs.Cables trays on roofs shall be covered.

Medium duty tray : min thickness , 1 mm up to 30 cm width.

1.5 mm up to 90 cm width.

Heavy duty tray : min thickness , 1.2 mm up to 30 cm width

1.5 mm up to 60 cm width

2 mm up to 90 cm width.

H. Earthing Connector: for trays or ladders, provide earthing connector

on each coupling between adjacent sections.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized

after fabrication.

2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES:

A. Covers: Solid type, of same materials and finished as cable trays.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes and finishes as cable trays.

2.5 SUPPORTS AND CONNECTOR:

A. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers shall

be as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

B. Bolts and screws shall be cadmium plated or electrolytically

galvanized.

2.6 FASTENERS FOR SUPPORTS:

A. Fasteners to connect cable tray supports to the building structure shall

be as follows:

B. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.


_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -4

C. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

D. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed

specifically for the intended service.

2.7 FIRE STOPPING:

A. General : Materials shall be UL listed and labeled and FM approved

for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers.

B. Sleeves: Schedule 40, welded, black steel pipe sleeves. Sizes as

indicated or minimum NEC size for cable or cable group to be

installed.

C. Sealing Fittings: Suitable for sealing cables in sleeves or core drilled

holes.

D. Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant as specified in paragraph

"Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers" in Division 16 Section 16050 , "Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

A. Install cable trays in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written

instruction.

B. Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays.

C. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and

installation of supports.

D. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be

adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor

of at least four or the calculated load plus 90 kg , whichever is greater

spacing of supports is not to exceed 1.5 m.

E. Installation of supports shall be in accordance with cable tray

manufacturer's written instruction and recommendations.

F. Fastening Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten cable tray

supports securely to the building structure as specified in Division 16

Section "Supporting Devices".

G. Support at Connections to Equipment: Where cable trays connect to

equipment, provide flanged fittings fastened to the tray and to the


_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -5

equipment. Support the tray separately. Do not carry the weight of the

tray on the equipment enclosure.

H. Thermal Contraction and Expansion: Install expansion connectors in

cable tray runs that exceed the following length: Steel Tray: 52.5 m

(175 feet),and on building expansion joints.

Spacing and gap settings for expansion connectors shall not exceed

recommendations of approved applicable standards.

I. Direction Changes : Make changes in direction of cable tray with

standard cable tray fittings.

J. Locate cable tray above piping except as required for tray

accessibility and as otherwise indicated.

K. Firestopping: Where cable trays penetrate fire and smoke barriers

including walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, install fire-stopping at

penetrations after cables are installed.

L. Sleeves For Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables

through firestopped cable tray penetrations of fire/smoke barriers.

M. Working Space: Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit

access for installing cables.

N. Barriers: Where trays carry conductors of different systems, such as

power, communications, and data processing, or different insulation

levels, use separate cable trays. In case of absolute necessity, where an

Engineer's approval is required install barriers to separate the systems.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Electrically ground cable trays and ensure continuous electrical

conductivity of cable tray system. Use tray as an equipment ground

conductor for itself only, not for connected equipment.

3.3 WARNING SIGNS:

A. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs, on

or in proximity to cable trays, where easily seen by occupants of space.

3.4 FIELD TESTING:

A. Earthing: Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding

and grounding connections.

1. Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated

indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the Engineer's

approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent


_____________________________________________________________________

16111 -6

of rated proof-load for fastener. If fastening fails test, replace fastener

and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

3.5 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

A. Upon completion of installation of cable trays, inspect trays, fittings,

and accessories. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair

damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage with a zinc-rich paint

recommended by the tray manufacturer.

C. PVC or Paint Finish: Repair damage with matching touch-up coating

recommended by the tray manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16121 MV CABLES

________________________________________________________________________

16121-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 This section of the specification covers the provision , installation and

testing of MV cables.

1.2 The latest revision of the following codes and standards shall be applicable

for cables covered in this SPECS. In case of any conflict, the

manufacturer / vendor may propose cables conforming to one group of

codes and standards quoted hereunder without jeopardizing the

requirements.

1.3 Applicable Codes & Standards:

IEC-60228 Conductors of Insulated Cables.

IEC-60502-2 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories

from 1 kV up to 30kV (Um = 36kV).

IEC-60811 Common Test Methods of Insulating and Sheathing

Materials of Electric Cables.

IEC-60229 Tests on cable over sheath.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

1.4.1 Dimensional cross-sectional drawings of each cable along with

technical data and catalogues shall be submitted by the

supplier to facilitate evaluation of submittal.

1.4.2 Type test certificates and reports.

1.4.3 Details of manufacturing and test programs

1.4.4 Factory test reports


1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the statutory

laws having jurisdiction and local codes of practice applicable to

the job site.

1.5.2 Conform to applicable codes and regulations .

1.5.3 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

electrical wire and cable products of type and sizes required, whose

products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less

than 5 years.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-2

1.5.4 IEC Compliance: Comply with IEC requirements as applicable to

construction, insulation and colour coding of electrical wires and

cables.

The supplier shall guarantee the cables against all the defects

arising out of faulty design or workmanship, or of defective

material for a period of two (2) years from the date of delivery.

1.6 PACKING AND SHIPPING:

1.6.1 Packing and shipping of the cable shall conform to the following:

a) The cable ends shall be sealed with a water-proof, heat

shrinkable end cap. With adhesive type sealing compound.

Cable ends shall be properly secured to the reel.

b) The cable shall be delivered without splices, on standard sized

returnable

Reel of sturdy construction properly packed and lagged

externally to prevent possible damage to the cable during the

transportation. Wood lagging shall also be secured with steel

straps to provided physical protection for the cable during

transit and during customary storage and handling operations.

c) The minimum diameter of the drum of the shipping reel shall

not be less

then the minimum bending diameter of the power cable.

1.7 REEL MARKINGS

1.7.1 Cable reels/drums shall be marked in legible and indelible letters

giving the following particulars:

a) Cable voltage and conductor material and size and number of

cores.

b) Type of insulation.

c) Length and weight of cable on reel.

d) Manufacturer’s name and country of origin.

e) Year of manufacture.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-3

PART 2 -PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL:

The power cable shall meet or exceed the requirements of this

specification in all respects.

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA:

2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, the cable shall confirm to IEC 60502-

2

2.2.2 The power cable shall be designed for service conditions relevant

to each site.

2.2.3 Cable design shall facilitate heat shrink, cold shrink or pre-molded

joints and terminations. This requirement shall include the use of

an extruded inner covering under armor where applicable.

2.2.4 The conductor, semi conducting layer, the insulation and the

insulation semi conducting layer shall be a triple extrusion process.

2.3 MATERIALS:

2.3.1 Conductor: The conductor shall be uncoated annealed copper as

per IEC-60228 , and shall be round, compacted and stranded. The

conductor size, shape and material shall be as specified in

Technical Data Schedule.

2.3.2 Conductor semi-conducting Screening: Conductors of the cables

shall be screened. The conductor screen shall consist of an

extruded black semi-conducting material compatible with the

insulation of the conductor and shall have an allowable operating

temperature equal to or higher than the insulation. The outer

surface of the conductor shield shall be cylindrical and shall be

firmly bonded to the insulation. The extruded shield shall be easily

removable from the conductor.

2.3.3 Insulation: The insulation shall be extruded solid dielectric cross-

linked polyethylene (XLPE) complying with the appropriate

requirements specified in Section 6.1 of IEC-60502-2.

The nominal insulation thickness shall be as specified in IEC-

60502-2, Table 6. The cross linking process shall not expose the

material to water or steam.

The average insulation thickness shall not be less than the specified

nominal value.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-4

The minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below the

nominal value by more than 01.mm + 10% of nominal value.

2.3.4 Insulation Semi conducting Screening:

Core insulation of the cables shall be screened. The insulation

semi-conducting screen shall consist of an extruded black semi-

conducting material applied.

The extruded insulation semi conducting screen shall be easily

strippable without damaging the insulation, leaving no conducting

material that cannot readily be removed. An insulation screen that

requires heat for removal shall not be supplied.

2.3.5 Metallic Screening:

All cores with semi-conducting insulation screening shall have a

supplementary copper wire screen helically applied in intimate

contact with the non-metallic semi-conducting screening.

A copper tape counter –helix shall be applied over the copper

wires. The screen size shall be as given below excluding copper

tape.

16 mm2 for up to and including 70 mm2 core.

35 mm2 for sizes in excess of 70 mm2 core.

The minimum size of copper tape binder shall be 0.1 x 15 mm2

2.3.6 Inner Coverings and Assembly of Cores.

For three cores Cables:

An extruded inner covering shall be provided over the cores

assembly. The metallic screens of the cores shall be in contact

with each other.

2.3.7 Inner Covering and Fillers Requirements

The inner coverings and fillers shall be of materials suitable for the

operating temperature of the cable and compatible with the

insulation. The fillers shall be non-hygroscopic. The inner

covering materials shall be PE compound.

2.3.8 Armor :

For Armored cables, single wire galvanized steel shall be provided

over the inner covering. Nominal diameter shall conform to IEC

60502-2, Table 10, and minimum diameter shall not be less than

90% of nominal value.

2.3.9 Outer Sheath

The outer sheath material shall be red PVC type ST2, as per IEC-

0502-2. The nominal thickness of outer sheath shall be as per ICE-

60502-2. Minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than

80% of nominal value.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-5

2.4 CORE IDENTIFICATION

For three core cables: Red, Yellow and Blue identifying tapes shall be

used, and insulation shall not be colored.

2.5 FABRICATION

2.5.1 The conductor shield, the cross-linked polyethylene insulation and

the outer semi conductor shall be extruded by the triple extrusion

method as given in clause 2.2.4.

2.5.2 The power cable shall be free of material and manufacturing

defects, which would prevent it form meeting the requirements of

this specification.

2.6 MARKING

2.6.1 The jacket for all cable shall be marked by embossing at interval

not exceeding one meter with the following minimum information:

a) The manufacturer’s name or trademark.

b) Voltage designation (In English).

c) Type of insulation, XLPE (in English)

d) Conductor size and material (in Arabic and English).

e) Year of manufacture (in Arabic and English).

f) Cumulative length at every one meter with the highest length

marked on the outer end of the cable.

2.7 . TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 15 KV TO 36 KV XLPE POWER

CABLES:

Description Specified

Values

Design and Construction Requirements

1. Reference Manufacturing Standard IEC-60502-2

2. Max. Permissible Continuous Conductor Temp

(oC)

90

3. Max. Short Circuit Temperature (oC) 250

4. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Inner Covering

(oC).

*

5. Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Outer Sheath

(oC)

*

6. Rated Voltage (kV) 15 kV

7. Number of Cores 3

8. Conductor Material Cu


________________________________________________________________________

16121-6

9. Shaper of Conductor Round

10. Conductor Cross-Section (mm2) As shown on

SLD

11. Insulation Material XLPE

12. Nominal Thickness of Insulation (mm) As per IEC

13. Minimum Thickness of Copper Tape and Width

(mm)

0.1 x 15

14. Inner Covering Material PE

15. Core Identification (Red, Yellow, Blue) Yes

16. Thickness of Outer Sheath (mm) As per IEC

17. System Short Circuit for one Second (kA) 21 for 15 kV

18. Maximum Partial discharge at 1.5 times rated

voltage, 10 PC

Yes

19. Meets Spark Test requirement for jacket Yes

20. Meets all Test requirements of IEC-60502- 2 Yes.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

Directly buried cable shall be laid underground as shown on the Drawings and

as herein specified.

Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to

approved formations and dimensions. Trenches shall have vertical sides and

shall be close timbered and strutted where necessary to prevent subsidence.

All unsuitable excavated material shall be removed from site.

All cables laid in the same trench shall be placed in the same horizontal plane

leaving a space of at least 7.5cm except as otherwise shown on the Drawings

and specified hereinafter.

Cable trench depth shall be as shown on layout drawings, with minimum depth

of 100 cm for a single layer of MV cables unless otherwise indicated on

drawings.

High tension cables shall, where possible, be laid in separate trenches.

Otherwise a space of at least 50 cm shall be left between these cables and any

other cable unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

Direct buried cables shall be laid in a clean soft sand bedding with nominal

depth of 100 mm below cables and at least 100 mm above the top of cables.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-7

Bedding shall be of clean small-grained sand or equivalent, free of stones and

other material liable to damage the cables.

After the cables have been laid, the trenches shall be backfilled in 150 mm

thick layers which shall be well watered and rammed and consolidated.

Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large/sharp angular

material, or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where

materials may damage ducts, cables or other substructures, or prevent adequate

compaction of fill or contribute to corrosion of ducts, cables or other

substructures.

Trench filling shall be well-watered and compacted to obtain highest possible

thermal conductivity and to avoid cavities in the trench-top covering following

any settling of the soil.

The surface of refilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated in a thoroughly

safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil is achieved.

Direct buried cables shall be protected by suitable concrete cable covers tiles,

complete with marking indicating the presence of electrical cable Covers shall

be laid a nominal 100 mm above the top layer of cables throughout their full

length. Covers shall extend to full width of cables laid, giving an overlap of

at least 50 mm, beyond outer cables.

A red PVC strip marked 'DANGER' and as specified in the design

specification shall be installed 100 mm above cable protection covers.

Adequate guarding and/or fencing shall be provided to all excavations for the

protection and safety of the public, traffic and adjacent properties.

Cables shall be laid direct from drums.

Sufficient number of rollers shall be provided to avoid twisting of cable on its

longitudinal axis during the pulling operation.

Rollers shall be placed as close as possible to avoid abrasion to the cable

serving.

If power driven cable pulling is employed, it shall be by bond pulling method

using steel carrier wire.

Cable laying operations shall be carried out with all care and attention, to

ensure that no damage to the sheath, armour or its serving is caused during

the process. The ends of cross linked polyethylene cables shall be capped to

prevent ingress of moisture into the filler or other hygroscopic elements of

cable. The caps shall remain intact during transport and laying operations.

All cable or armour shall have links to earth to enable testing of sheath.

Earth resistance shall not be greater than 10 ohms.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-8

Cable screens shall be solidly bonded to earth at each end of the route.

Bonding leads shall be of sufficient cross section to carry the maximum short

circuit current.

3.2 TESTING

3.2.1 General

3.2.1.1 All cable shall be tested in accordance with the latest

standards and as specified herein. The supplier shall

provide all test results for review and acceptance by

supervising agency.

3.2.1.2 The full range of routine, special and type tests specified

in IEC-60505-2 shall be carried out as applicable.

3.2.1.3 Routine and / or special tests shall be carried out in the

factory. Type test reports and certificate from an

independent testing laboratory shall be submitted to

supervising agency.

3.2.1.4 Sheath of all cables shall be spark tested as per IEC-

60229 .

3.2.2 . Routine Tests

The following routine tests shall be carried out on each

manufactured length of cable.

3.2.2.1 Electrical Resistance of Conductors:

Resistance measurement shall be made on all conductors

of each cable length submitted to routine tests. Resistance

values shall be in accordance with IEC-60228 .

3.2.2.2 Partial Discharge Test:

The partial discharge test shall be carried out in

accordance with IEC-60885-3 The magnitude of the

discharge at 1.73 Uo shall not exceed 10 pC.

3.2.2.3 Voltage Test:

The power frequency test voltage shall be 38KV. Values

for single phase test voltage are given below:

Rated Voltage 15 (17.5) kV

Test Voltage 38 kV (15 minutes)

If, for three-core cables, the voltage test is carried out

with a three phase transformer, the test voltage between

the phases shall be 1.73 times the values given above.


________________________________________________________________________

16121-9

3.2.3 Special Tests

3.2.3.1 Conductor examination shall be in accordance with IEC-

60228 .

3.2.3.2 Dimensional check shall be in accordance with IEC-

60502-2.

3.2.3.3 Hot set test for XLPE insulation, as per IEC-60502-2.

3.2.3.4 Hi-Pot test should be performed on site at 38kV for 15

minutes. Leakage currents to be recorded

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16250 LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD

___________________________________________________________________________

16250-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Main Switchboards in

accordance with attached specifications and drawings.





and products:

1. SASO 1609 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies-Part 1 : Type tested and partially type tested

assemblies

2. IEC 60439-1 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-

Part 1 : Type tested and partially type tested assemblies

3. IEC 60068-2-11 Basic environmental testing procedures-

Part 2 : Tests- test Ka : Salt mist.

4. IEC 60068-2-30 Basic environmental testing procedures-

Part 2 : Tests- test Db And guidance : Damp heat.






control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed

switchboards.






3. ISO certification.

D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of LV switchboards for

not less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already




___________________________________________________________________________

16250-2

1.4 SUBMITTAL











provided.






C. Test Reports:








1.5 COORDINATION






installation.



B. Store switchboards in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory




___________________________________________________________________________

16250-3


switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following specifications apply to electrical distribution switchboard fixed type,

in compliance with standard IEC 60439-1.

B. Extensions to the low voltage electrical switchboards shall be possible on either side

(right or left) with the possibility of connection of a busduct to the main incomer

ACB.

2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC

A. The switchboards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:

1. Rated voltage 1000 V three-phase.

2. Rated operating voltage 690V

3. Frequency 60 Hz.

4. Insulated level 2.5 kV- 60 Hz, 1min

8 kV-1,2/50µs.

5. Busbar rated current As shown on the drawings.

6. Short-circuit current As shown on the drawings.

7. Degree of protection (IP) As shown on the drawings.

2.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The switchboard shall be suitable for operations at a height of 2000 meters or less

above sea level.

B. The switchboards shall be capable of operating normally within the following

temperature range



C. Manufacturer shall declare weather switchboard is able to operate in air temperature

higher than + 40 °C and if current derating is necessary.

2.4 CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall comply with standard IEC 60068.2.30

(hot and damp climates) and with standard IEC 60068.2.11 (salt mist).

B. The low voltage switchboard shall have a permissible symmetrical short circuit

current up to short circuit current shown on the drawings for 1 second. The busbars

shall be designed for mounting on insulated supports that are sufficient in number to


___________________________________________________________________________

16250-4

accept the electro-dynamic forces resulting from the flow of the peak asymmetrical

short circuit current.

C. The low voltage switchboard shall have an earthing circuit including a bar that can be

removed for isolation purposes during the necessary insulation measurements

(removal of the bar shall require a tool)

D. The switchboard shall be suitable for front or rear connections.

E. Cable entry shall be via the bottom or the top.

F. The low voltage switchboard shall not be higher than 2200mm.

G. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall have power closing fixed type air circuit

Air circuit breaker for 1000A and above, withdrawable type for 1200A and above

with full coordination with BMS ( Control and Monitorin,g breaker as incomer and

moulded case circuit breakers as outgoing branches if less than 1000A. It shall be

provided with an electronic monitoring device to measure and record currents,

voltages,frequency, active and reactive power, power factor, maximum demand …

H. Natural ventilation shall make it possible for the Switchboard components to operate

with in the recommended temperature ranges.

I. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall have small depths, thus optimizing layout

in electrical rooms.

J. The system shall make it possible to implement fixed or withdrawable distribution

and motor control sections, positioned side by side, which together form an assembly

referred to as an electrical switchboard.

K. Selection of switchboard and motor control center components shall be made in

compliance with standard IEC 60947 and related specification in the contract

documents.

L. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall be made up of identified functional

volumes including the busbar compartment, switchgear and control gear component

compartment, connection compartment and auxiliaries compartment.

1. The different busbar shall be the main busbars, distribution busbars and auxiliary

busbars.

2. The busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper.

3. The compartment shall be located inside a metal enclosure with walls providing

protection against direct contact with live parts and guaranteeing a degree of

protection (IP) requested. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type,

protection code IP 42 for indoor installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations,

in accordance with IEC 144.

4. CONSTRUCTION: sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and

minimum 2 mm thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin

covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.

M. Sheet metal elements in the immediate proximity of high currents shall be of

aluminum.


___________________________________________________________________________

16250-5

Q. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation side by side and back to back and

capable of receiving lateral ducts for busbar, cables and terminals.

R. The switchboard cover panel shall be removable.

S. The construction system shall provide a complete set of elements for installing fixed

or withdrawable switching and protective devices, measurement devices and control/

monitoring devices in the switchboard.

T. Contractor shall insure full discrimination between upstream and downstream

breakers.

2.5 Protection and safety

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall ensure the safety of life and property as

well as provide a high level of continuity to service

1. Switching safety shall be ensured by mechanical device preventing on load

withdrawal

2. Operating safety shall be ensured by compartmenting in compliance with standard

IEC 60439-1 and according to form types 3.

3. Current interruption shall be of the “ visible break isolation “or “positive contact

indication “type as defined by standard IEC 60947- 3.

B. In view of reducing the risk of electrical shock

1. Power and control circuit shall be separate and completely isolated.

2. Auxiliary circuits shall be of the extra low voltage type.

C. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall be equipped with two types of

mechanical locking compatible with the different positions of drawers. The locking

system shall be partially mobile and implement three padlocks.

D. The safety of persons shall be ensured by complying with the requirements of

standard AS 3439-1 concerning the propagation of an arc inside electrical

switchboards. Test certificates shall be provided.

2.6 ROUTINE AND SPECIAL TESTS

A. Routine Tests

The switch board shall be subject to routine factory test and shall be substantiated by

a test report signed by the manufacturer's quality control department., in accordance

with IEC 60439 –1 as follows:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams.

2. Visual Inspection.

3. Functional electrical and mechanical operation

4. Dielectric test.



___________________________________________________________________________

16250-6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP







and repairing.








specifications.




C. Splices shall be implemented to ensure the electrical continuity of the horizontal

busbars, auxiliary buses and the proactive conductor between adjacent sections.

D. It shall be possible to secure the sections to a floor that is flat by anchoring directly to

a concrete floor using anchor bolts or by securing to ordinary metal profiles.







various tests.






END OF SECTION

SECTION 16260 LV SUB-MAIN SWITCHBOARD

___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Sub-Main Switchboards

in accordance with attached specifications and drawings.





and products:

1. SASO 1609 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-


2. IEC 60439-1 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-







control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed

switchboards.






3. ISO certification.

D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of LV switchboards for

not less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already



1.4 SUBMITTAL






___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -2







provided.






C. Test Reports:








1.5 COORDINATION






installation.



B. Store switchboards in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory




switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.


___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following specifications apply to electrical distribution switchboard or fixed type,

in compliance with standard IEC 60439-1.

2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC

A. The switchboards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:

1. Rated voltage 1000 V three-phase.

2. Rated operating voltage 690V

3. Frequency 60 Hz.

4. Insulated level 2.5kV-60Hz,1min

8 kV-1,2/50µs.

5. Busbar rated current As shown on the drawings.

6. Short-circuit current As shown on the drawings.

7. Degree of protection (IP) As shown on the drawings.

8. Impact strength (IK) As shown on the drawings.

2.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The switchboard shall be suitable for operations at a height of 2000 meters or less

above sea level.

B. The switchboards shall be capable of operating normally within the following

temperature range



C. Manufacturer shall declare weather switchboard is able to operate in air temperature

higher than + 40 °C and if current derating is necessary.


A. The low voltage switchboard shall have a permissible asymmetrical short circuit

current up to short circuit current shown on the drawings for 1 second. The busbars

shall be designed for mounting on insulated supports that are sufficient in number to

accept the electro-dynamic forces resulting from the flow of the peak asymmetrical

short circuit current.

B. The low voltage switchboard shall have an earthing circuit including a bar that can be

removed for isolation purposes during the necessary insulation measurements

(removal of the bar shall require a tool)

C. The switchboard shall be suitable for front or rear connections.

D. Cable entry shall be via the bottom or the top.


___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -4

E. The low voltage switchboard shall not be higher than 2000mm.

F. Natural ventilation shall make it possible for the Switchboard components to operate

with in the recommended temperature ranges.

G. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall have small depths, thus optimizing layout

in electrical rooms.

H. The system shall make it possible to implement fixed distribution , positioned side by

side, which together form an assembly referred to as an electrical switchboard.

I. Selection of switchboard components shall be made in compliance with standard IEC

60947 and related specification in the contract documents.

J. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall be made up of identified functional

volumes including the busbar compartment, switchgear and controlgear component

compartment, connection compartment and auxiliaries compartment.

1. The different busbar shall be the main busbars, distribution busbars and auxiliary

busbars.

2. The busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper.

3. The compartment shall be located inside a metal enclosure with walls providing

protection against direct contact with live parts and guaranteeing a degree of

protection (IP) requested. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type,

protection code IP 42 for indoor installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations,

in accordance with IEC 144 .

4. INDOOR ENCLOSURE: sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and

minimum 1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door.

K. Main incomer and outgoing breakers shall be moulded case breakers.

L. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation side by side and back to back and

capable of receiving lateral ducts for cables .

M. The switchboard cover panel shall be removable.

N. The construction system shall provide a complete set of elements for installing fixed

switching and protective devices, measurement devices and control/ monitoring

devices in the switchboard.

2.5 Protection and safety

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall ensure the safety of life and property as

well as provide a high level of continuity to service

1. Operating safety shall be ensured by compartmenting in compliance with standard

IEC 60439-1 and according to form type 2b.

2. Current interruption shall be of the “ visible break isolation “or “positive contact

indication “type as defined by standard IEC 60947- 3.


___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -5

B. In view of reducing the risk of electrical shock

1. Power and control circuit shall be separate and completely isolated.

2. Auxiliary circuits shall be of the extra low voltage type.

2.6 ROUTINE TESTS

A. Routine Tests

The switchboard shall be subject to routine factory test and shall be substantiated by a

test report signed by the manufacturer's quality control department., in accordance

with IEC 60439 –1 as follows:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams.

2. Visual Inspection.

3. Functional electrical and mechanical operation

4. Dielectric test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP







and repairing.








specifications.




C. Splices shall be implemented to ensure the electrical continuity of the horizontal

busbars, auxiliary buses and the proactive conductor between adjacent sections.


___________________________________________________________________________

16260 -6

D. It shall be possible to secure the sections to a floor that is flat by anchoring directly to

a concrete floor using anchor bolts or by securing to ordinary metal profiles.







various tests.






END OF SECTION

SECTION 16270 LV FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

___________________________________________________________________________

16270 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section covers the manufacture, furnish, installation and testing of all

equipment, accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Final

Distribution Boards LP, ELP, PP and EPP.





and products:

1. SASO 1611 Saudi Standard for Low Voltage Distribution Boards

2. IEC 60439-3 Low voltage Final Distribution Boards.

3. IEC 60529 Degree of Protection provided by the encloure (IP Code)

4. IEC 60947-2 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear – Circuit breakers.

5. IEC 61008-1 Residual Current operated Circuit Breakers without integral

Overcurrent Protection (RCCB’s)

6. IEC 61009 Residual Current operated Circuit Breakers with integral

Overcurrent Protection. (RCBO)





control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed Distribution

Boards.

C. The supplier shall provide proof of application of a quality procedure in the

manufacturing facility complying with standards. This means:





PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

A. These specifications apply to LV Final Distribution Boards rated upto 250 Amps.

B. The Distribution Board and the associated Switchgear and Control gear like Circuit

Breakers, Contactors, Switches, etc. should be from the same manufacturer.


___________________________________________________________________________

16270 -2

2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. The Distribution Boards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical

values:

1. Rated Insulation Voltage 690 V AC.

2. Rated Operating Voltage 380 V AC.

3. Frequency 60 Hz.

4. Busbar rated current upto 250 Amps. (or as indicated on the

drawings)

5. Short-time withstand current 17 kA RMS for 200ms.

6. Peak Short Time withstand 34 kA

7. Degree of protection (IP) IP31 as per IEC 60529


A. Metal enclosure of the low-voltage distribution board shall be made of electro

galvanised steel sheet metal without any welding Points which shall have received an

anti-corrosion coating (hot polymerised polyester/epoxy powder).

B. One central slotted hole should be provided to ease accurate levelling of the

distribution board.

C. Additional slotted holes for ease at wall fixing should be provided.

D. The front face of the switchboards shall be removable to facilitate servicing.

E. Removable gland plate should be available at the top and the bottom of the

distribution board

F. Cable knockouts should be available on sides, top and bottom of the distribution

board for quicker and easier installation.

G. Main busbar should be made of tin-plated copper and fully shrouded.

H. Main busbar, in vertical position, should be installed into a rigid and adjustable

suspended pan assembly.

I. In order to provide easy connection and maximum cable space, split neutral bars

should be provided as standard in both sides.

J. Earth bar should be provided as standard.

K. Number of holes per terminal bar should not be less than the number of outgoings.

L. Switchgear and controlgear should be of DIN installation type.

M. Switchgear and controlgear connections to the busbar should be of bolt-on type.

2.4 PROTECTION AND SAFETY

A. The main busbar of the Distribution Board should be fully shrouded to prevent any

accidental direct contact.

B. The split neutral busbar should be completely shrouded to prevent any accidental

direct contact.

C. The Main Incoming shall be a switch disconnector of adequate continuous, making

and withstand rating as shown on drawings.If supplied from a sub distribution board

located in the same electrical room, main lugs may be provided instead of the switch

disconnector.


___________________________________________________________________________

16270 -3

D. All outgoing feeders to bathrooms, wet areas should be provided with Residual

Current Protection Devices for protection against direct and indirect contact.

E. All incoming switchgears should be suitable for isolation as per IEC 60947-2.

F. Keylock facility should be available in order to prevent the opening of the distribution

board by non authorized persons.

G. Keylock should be field installable.

2.5 INDICATION

A. Identification labels should be provided for incoming and outgoing circuits, earth and

neutral busbar.

B. Outgoer labels should be provided next to the branch circuit breakers for easy and

direct outgoers identification

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall supply and install the followings as indicated on single line

diagrams:

1. Lighting Contactor shall have totally enclosed silver alloy double break

power contacts capable of continuously carrying, making and breaking any

load within the rating of the contactor without the assistance of auxiliary

arcing contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. All contacts

shall be removable without disturbing line or load wiring.

2. Lighting contactors shall be electrically held type.

3. Lighting contactors shall be manufactured approved by the Engineer.

4. The Lighting feeder pillar serving the street lighting shall be supplied

through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled with

a timer connected in parallel with the photocells. An over-ride facility shall

be provided for maintenance.

5. The photo-electric controls shall consists of omni-directional Cadmium

cell thermal relay of high quality emptying solid state photo - variable

conductance elements giving a 2:1 On/Off ratio with sensitivity to switch on

lights when the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux. This allows for the

high pressure Sodium lights striking time, taking account of the rather fast

rate of daylight intensity drop off in the region.

6. The cell shall be encased in an impact resistant translucent cover to protect

it from damage and ultraviolet rays. The photoelectric cell shall be

completely weatherproof and not effected by moisture, vibration or changes

in temperature.


___________________________________________________________________________

16270 -4

7. The timer shall be of the quartz, electronic type, capable of operating for at

least 500 hours in case of power failure. Timer is to be of the solar type to

be settable once throughout the year and to be set at definite periods for

switching on and off.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP & INSTALLATION







and repairing.

B. All electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's


specifications.







various tests.



a) General equipment check.

b) Field wiring and ground system verification.

c) Equipment adjustment.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16330 LIGHTING

___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


and materials required for the installation of indoor and outdoor lighting fixtures,

control gear, mounting provisions, accessories and connection to circuit wiring and to

corresponding lighting control equipment





and products:


2. IEC 60598 Luminaires

3. IEC – 400 Lamp Holders

4. IEC – 566 Capacitors

5. IEC – 61 & IEC – 238 Incandescent Lamp Socket

6. IEC – 82 Ballasts





control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed lighting

fixtures.



1. Use of a quality manual approved and signed by a management representative,

2. Regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality

control procedures,


D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of lighting for not less

than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied

equipment of the same type and same make.


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -2

1.4 SUBMITTAL


Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

- Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution

curves, coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation

factors etc.

- Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including

manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall

dimensions, operating characteristics and principles

- Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of

installation and to the Specification

- Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of

ceiling features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as

applicable and pertinent to the installation

- Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions

- Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required,

together with colour and texture samples of each fixture.






C. Recommended Spare Parts List:



1.5 COORDINATION







___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -3



B. Store lighting fixtures in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory



PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

2.1.1. LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL

A. GENERALLY: construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply

with the Regulations and Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated,

assembled and wired entirely at factory. Manufacturer's name,

factory inspection stamp and official quality label are to be fixed to

each fixture supplied.

B. LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES): to be manufacturer's

standard, as given in Lighting Fixture Schedules shown on the

Drawings, or equal.

C. SHEET STEEL HOUSINGS: to be not less than 0.6 mm thick, and

thicker when required by the Specification or the Standards.

D. SHEET STEEL REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.5 mm thick.

E. ALUMINIUM REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.7 mm thick,

unless otherwise approved.

F. FABRICATION: metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground

smooth without tool marks or burrs. Flat metal parts are to be

stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication. Metal

parts are to have finish free from irregularities.

G. RUST-PROOF FERROUS BASE: ferrous metal parts are to be

bonderized (treated with corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and

given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before application of

final finish.

H. FINISH FOR NON-REFLECTING METAL SURFACES:

approved baked enamel paint. Paint colour on fixture frames and

trims is to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -4

I. FINISH FOR LIGHT REFLECTING SURFACES: white baked

enamel paint having reflection factor not less than 85%. Mirror

reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished, anodized

aluminium with reflection factors not less than 97%.

J. MECHANICAL RESISTANCE OF FINISH: after finish has been

applied on steel surfaces and cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius

bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from

base metal.

K. RESISTANCE OF FINISH TO ULTRA-VIOLET: finish is to

withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-violet RS lamp placed 100

mm from surface without discolouring, hardening or warping, and is

to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.

L. HEAT RESISTANCE: finishes, wires and components inside

fixtures are to be certified materials to resist the temperatures or

other conditions encountered in the fixtures.

M. WIRING INSIDE FIXTURES: to be not less than 1.0 mm², up to

(105°C) to resist temperature inside fixtures and insulated for 240 V

application. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed,

insulating, terminal blocks.

N. HINGES: fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to

have concealed hinges and catches, and stainless steel retaining clips.

Other alternative equally durable products may be submitted for

approval.

O. SUSPENSION ALIGNERS: to be provided for pendant fixtures for

axial, vertical and horizontal alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be

minimum 25 mm.

P. RECESSED FIXTURES: to be constructed to fit into suspended

ceilings without distorting fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be

provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.

Q. OUTDOOR FIXTURES: to be non-ferrous metal or specially

moulded material for outdoor use.

R. REMOVAL OF PARTS for maintenance is to be possible without

removing fixture housing.


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -5

S. VANDAL PROOF FIXTURES:

Luminaire body to be 1.0mm thickness painted white with

aluminum frame.

Luminaire to be provided with 3mm thick wire guard.

Diffuser is clear lexan sheet 4mm thick.

Reflector to be 0.5mm thickness stainless steel.

Sunken Vandal proof screws and riveted nuts to fix the aluminum

frame with the luminaire body.

Gasket to be provided around the body.

2.1.2. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. LAMP HOLDERS GENERALLY: heavy duty, moulded white

plastic with non-corroding spring contacts.

B. LAMP HOLDERS FOR INDUSTRIAL FITTINGS: spring loaded

turret type, heavy duty, dust protected.

C. BALLASTS GENERALLY: Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to

be used in any one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag,

series type. Equipment is to be enclosed in sheet steel casing with

corrosion resistant finish.

D. BALLAST THERMOSETTING COMPOUND is not to soften,

liquefy or support combustion under any operating condition or upon

ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and dampen vibrations.

Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to

exceed 55 deg. C above maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg.

C.

E. BALLAST TYPE: Electronic type high frequency, compact light

weight.

F. BALLAST RATING: ballast is to be manufactured and certified for

the specific lamp it controls and for operation from nominal power

supply, with voltage and frequency equal to nominal voltage and

frequency of distribution network.

2.2 LAMPS

A. RATED VOLTAGE of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to

nominal voltage of distribution network. Lamps with different rated

voltages are not acceptable.


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -6

B. TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN LAMPS: tubular, quartz, resistant to high

temperatures. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 2000 hours and

luminous output above the following:

1. 9500 lumens for 500 W lamps

C. STRAIGHT TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS: unless otherwise

specified, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture description and with

improved fluorescent internal coating. Colour of light is to be cool white

4000 K Lamps are to be low energy type with tube diameter 26 mm.

Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours and luminous output

above the following:

a. 1150 lumens for 18 W lamps (600 mm long)

b. 2500 lumens for 36 W lamps (1200 mm long)

D. PL-C COMPACT LAMPS: single ended, compact-miniature lamp,

consisting of four narrow fluorescent tubes welded together, with

integral instant starter and capacitor and with special two-pin plug-in

base and socket. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and

luminous output above the following:

a. 900 lumens for 13 W lamps (130 mm long)

b. 1200 lumens for 18 W lamps (150 mm long)

c. 1800 lumens for 26 W lamps (170 mm long).

E. Lamps are to be type PLC .

F. METAL HALIDE LAMPS: comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed

in clear tubular hard-glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all

gas discharge tubes with iodide additives indium, thallium and sodium in

the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in three spectral bands; blue,

green and yellow-red with high colour rendering. Lamps are to be to

IEC 188 with E40 base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than

10000 hours and luminous outputs, after 100 hours burning, are to be

above the following:

a. 5500 lumens for 70 W lamps

b. 11500 lumens for 150 W lamps

Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C,

and maximum bulb temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -7

burning position for 2000 W, 220 V lamp is to be possible up to 75

degrees.

G. Low Voltage Halogen Lamps: Halogen Lamps shall be equipped with

dichroic reflector coated type.

Average lamp life shall be 3000 hrs, colour rendering Ra100 and color

temperature 3000 deg. K.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERALLY: install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to

building lines and at uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as

approved by the Engineer. Make final height adjustment after

installation.

B. FIXTURE SUPPORT: provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes

with hangers, brackets and flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to

support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers etc. and method

of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet

boxes to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when

required, for proper installation. Provide one point of support in

addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually mounted

fixtures longer than 600 mm.

C. STEM HANGERS: provide two stem hangers for individually

mounted pendant fixtures. Stems are to have suspension aligners and

are to be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at required height.

D. SUSPENDED CEILINGS: if ceiling construction is unable to

support weight of fixtures without strain or deformation, suspend

fixtures directly from building structure.

E. SOLID CEILINGS: coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings

with exact fixture dimensions and structural elements.

F. CONTINUOUS ROWS: arrange fixtures so that individual fixtures

can be removed without dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide

minimum spacing between fixtures.

G. COVER PLATES: install cover plates over fixture outlet box or

opening in ceiling or structure when left unused.


___________________________________________________________________________

16330 -8

H. FLUSH RECESSED FIXTURES: install to completely eliminate

light leakage within fixture and between fixture and adjacent finished

surface.

I. VENTILATION: keep ventilation channels free after fixture is

installed, if required by the design of the fixture.

J. TIGHTNESS: ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably

insect/dust tight when installed, and completely weatherproof for

installations subject to weather conditions.

K. LAMPS FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION: place new lamps in

fixtures immediately prior to hand-over and when instructed by the

Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not to be used for

final lamping of fixtures.

3.2. INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A. VISUAL INSPECTION: check neatness of installation, uniformity of

equipment and nameplates etc.

B. ILLUMINATION MEASUREMENTS: to be taken at selected

locations, to determine level and uniformity.

C. OPERATION: check lighting installations for operation including

control and regulation equipment.

D. ELECTRICAL DATA: measure power factor, current and voltage at

start for installations with discharge lamps.

END OF SECTION

untitled

Documents

contract drawings

quality manual

quality assurance

highvoltage switchgear

voltage transformers

manufacturers data sheets

acceptable level of

quality procedure complying